a syntax of attic greek - thompson

7/28/2019 A Syntax of Attic Greek - Thompson

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/a-syntax-of-attic-greek-thompson 1/475

THE MOODS. 133

One or two instances from Homer will illustrate the

difference between the Subjunctive and Optative :

Mr) ere Ki%eia>, 11. i. 26, let me not find thee.

Mr] firjv a.K\et,a><} dnoXoi^v, II. xxii. 304, let me not

fall ingloriously.

ovk ea6 ovtoi avrjp, ovtf eaaerai, ovBe yevijTai.

Hom. Od. xvi. 437.

Lives not that man, nor e'er will live, nor e'er is like

to be (born).

Here the Subjunctive differs from the Future Indicative

in stating what ia thought likely to occur, not positively

what will occur.

peia deos 7 e6e\<ov tcai rrfKodev avBpa aawaai.

Hom. Od. iii. 231.

Lightly a god, an he will, might save thee e'en at a

distance.

The Optative gives a more remote representation than

the Subjunctive of a future possibility.'

Note. The Subjunctive and Optative (with two excep-tions to be noticed in the Optative) refer to future time.

The reference to the future, however, is more vague in the

Optative, so vague that the notion of time is often scarcely

apparent in this mood. This, perhaps, may be why theOptative lent itself to a connexion with past tenses in historic

sequence. But there is nothing in the form of the Optative,

neither its connecting vowel nor its suffixes, which per se

denotes past time. And the only two usages in which theOptative really refers to past time are: (1) in General Sup-

positions (see Conditional Sentences) ; and, (2) in Oratio

Obliqua, where occasionally it represents a past tense of the

Indicative (see Oratio Obliqua).

The Subjunctive and Optative are both used (1) in Inde-

pendent, (2) in Subordinate Sentences. Their uses in Sub-

ordinate Sentences are given in the Syntax of the CompoundSentence. „. ... , , ... „_

Digitized by Microsoft®

134 VOICES AND MOODS.

§ 132. THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT

SENTENCES.The Independent Subjunctive is used :

A. In Exhortations. First person often with (pipe, aye,

xyere, Idi (877 or vvv added).

<f>epe Br/ eoirco irpo<; ifia<;. Dem.

Come now, let me speak before you.

aXX' Wi, ito/iev.

Come then, let us go (suppose we go).

In Soph. Phil. 300 the 2d Person (/*<£%).

B. In Prohibitions (with firj).

(a) First person plural (singular very rare, cf . Eur.Hipp. 567, Herael. 559).

(6) Second and third person with aorist subjunctive,

(a) fir) <f>oj3<!>fieda, let us not be afraid.

fir\ areXr] rov \oyov KaraXiTrafiev. PLAT.

Let us not leave our argument incomplete.

(b) fir) ravTa Trotrjcrrj^.

Do not do this.

Ne haec feceris.

fiw&evi avfMpopav overlays. ISOOR.

Taunt no one with a misfortune.

0. In Questions of doubt (Deliberative Questions)

with the First Person. (3ov\ei, fdovXeaOe (0e\ei<;, 6e\ere

in poetry) are often added.

enrwfiev, rj <7t,y£>/iev, rj n Bpdtrofiev ; EUR.Are we to (should we, must we) speak, or keep silence,

or what shall we do ?Digitized by Microsoft®

OPTATIVE IN INDEPENDENT SENTENCES. 135

tl fiovKeade Bpa&co ;

Quid vultis faciam ?

What would you have me do ?

oijioi ri Spdcrta; ttoi $vya> pTjTpog xepas; EUR. Med. 1271.Ah me, what must I do? whither escape a mother's hands ?

Note 1. —The third person, however, occurs pretty often,

especially in Plato and Demosthenes.

TTorepov ere rts ttjs 7rdA.eci)s eydphv 17 ipov etvat <j*rj;

Dem. 18. 124.Should one call you the enemy of the state, or my enemy 1

iro&ev T4S ap^r/Taiy PLAT.Where is one to begin ?

Tt eiirrj Ttsy

What must one say 1 Plat, and Dem.itch Tts oSv tfrvyrj;

Trot poXwv p,evG>; Soph. Ai. 403.

Here this tis refers to the first person.

Note 2. —The Subjunctive, expressing a future possi-

bility, common in Homer, is not wholly unknown, thoughrare in Attic.

ovt' f(TTiv ovre trore yivqrai Kpeirrov. PLAT. Leg. 942.

It is not, nor is it ever likely to get better.

§ 133. THE OPTATIVE IN INDEPENDENTSENTENCES.

The Independent Optative is used :

A. To denote a Wish (without av).

m/wal yevoio iraTpof evyevearepos. SOPH.

Boy, may'st thou prove more fortunate than thy

father.

In the first person a wish often conveys an exhortation.

See Subjunctive in Exhortations.

/«; %<at\v fier afj,ovaca<;. EUE.

Let me not live without culture.Digitized by Microsoft®



136 VOICES AND MOODS.

In the third person a command or permission may be

conveyed.

epSoi t(? rjv e/cao-ro? eiSeirj reyyqv. Ae.Let each man keep to his trade, whateer he knows.

elSeirj is assimilated to the mood of principal verb epSoi.

Cf. Xen. An. iii. 2. 37, i?yojTo (al. r]yela6a)) : Aesch. P. 7.

1047, where two Optatives are co-ordinate with preceding

Imperatives.

B. In Deliberative Questions. The Optative differs

from the Subjunctive in the same questions only in ex -

pressing a less vivid and more remote possibility.

reav, Zev, hvvaaiv Tt? avBpwv

virepfiacrlq, Kwraa^oi ; SOPH. Ant. 605.

Thy power, Zeus, what mortal man

By 6 'erstepping might control ?

Cf. Aesch. Gh. 392 ; Ar. Pint. 438 ; Soph. 0. C.170; Plat.Rep. 352 C (aKova-ais).

Note. Several places, especially in the Tragedians, are

quoted where the Optative without av occurs in its Homericpotential sense (e.g. Od. iii. 231, quoted before). In most of

these places, however, if not all, the reading is doubted.

Jele (§418, I. a) quotes two passages from Plato, Phaedo,87 E, e7TLSei,Kvvoi —Siot^otro, where Heindorf would insert av

and Pep. 362 o, dSeXcfrbs dvSpl irapei-q, where to Aeyo/ucvov showsthat the phrase is a quotation, probably from the Epic.

§ 134. THE IMPERATIVE.

The Imperative is used in Commands, Entreaties,

Prayers, and Prohibitions. It denotes future time.

In Prohibitions we must use p,7\ either (1) with 2d Person

Present Imperative (continued act), or (2) 2d Person

Aorist Subjunctive (single act), thus :

pyr] tcXeTrre, or /xrj /cXe'i/fi??, do not steal ; but neither p,r)

KXeTTTTj'i nor /cXeifrov.


THE IMPERATIVE. 137

Ae. Thesm. 877 (fir) yjrevo-ov) is a rare exception in Attic.

Mr/, 7rpo5 Oewv, fiaivcoixeOa, /mtjB' aio-)(pa)<s aTroKcofieOa.

Xen.Let us not, by the gods, be mad, nor die shamefully.

But ftrj with the 3d pers. Aorist Imperative is admis-

sible both in poetry and in prose.

/ttySet? vfiwv ravra vofiiaarm. Xen.

Let none of you think so.

Note 1. For the Infinitive used as an Imperative, see

Index.

Note 2. ola-0' 8 Spatrov. The Imperative is sometimes usedin relative clauses depending on an Interrogative.

dW ourd' Spatrov/ T<j> crKekti 6eve rr)v irerpav.

Ar. Av. 54Do you know what to do 1 Kick the rock with your leg.

oTcrOd vvv a pot yeveo-Ow; Seapa rots ^evoicri irpoo-Oes.

Eur. /. T. 1203.

Knowest tlwu what must be done for me ? put chains on the

strangers.

Logically it would be <x Set yevio-Oai;

And as the Future is used in Greek as an equivalent forthe Imperative, we find

oicrd' oSv 6 8/oacras . . . oSrj&ov rjp.lv ctTtov. EUR. C'ycl. 133.

Dost know what thou must do ? provide us victuals.

The Imperative in Greek is subordinate in the above idioms.

As this is impossible in English, we have to substitute a

periphrasis. Do you know what (you must do=do) 1



CHAPTEK VII.

THE TENSES.

§ *35- Greek tenses may be classified in two ways.

A. With regard to the Order of Time.

B. With regard to the Kind of Act or State.

A. ORDER OF TIME.

The Time of a Tense must be either

1. Past (Imperfect, Aorist, Pluperfect).

2. Present (Present, Perfect).

3. Future (Future, Future Perfect).

PRIMARY AND HISTORIC TENSES.

Tenses in Present and Future Time are called Primary.

Tenses in Past Time are called Historic.

SEQUENCE OF MOODS.

In Compound Sentences the theoretical rule is that

A Principal Sentence in Primary Time is followed by

the Subjunctive in the Subordinate Sentence.A Principal Sentence in Historic Time is followed by

the Optative in the Subordinate Sentence.

This sequence however is purely theoretical; for, as

will be seen in the Compound Sentence, a Subjunctive

constantly takes the place of an Optative in Historic

Sequence.138 Digitized by Microsoft®

TIME OBSERVED THROUGHOUT MOODS. 139

§ 136. Time how far observed throughout the

Moods.

(a) The only mark of Past Time in Greek is the Augment.The distinction between Past and Present therefore is strictly

observed only in the Indicative.

Absolute and Relative Time. —The distinctions of Time, how-ever, are observed in the Optative, Infinitive, and Participle,

when these Moods are used in Indirect Discourse or Oratio

Obligua, i.e. when they represent indirectly the words or

thoughts of another. This is most clearly seen in the IndirectStatements and Questions.

e<^>7] ravra iroietv —iroirjtrai —-Koirpruv.

He said that he was doing, did or had done, would do this.

TToiilv =7tom3 in Eecta, and therefore is relatively present

xoirjcrai = eiroi-qva. „ „ relatively past ;7roi7](reiv=7roi-qa-<i) ,, „ relatively future

relatively, i.e. to the Principal Verb present, past, and future :

but Troietv, ironjcrcu, 7roMj<re<.v are all absolutely past, becausee<prj, the Principal Verb, is past.

e\e£av on ire/j.xf'eie cr^as /3ao-t,\evs.

They said that the king had sent them.

In Eecta hre^xj/^v ij/uSs.

rjpero el Kevos o <f>6f3os enj.

He asked if his fear was groundless.In Eecta xevds io-ri;

yjcrdovTO tow TroXe/XLovs Trpoo-TrXiovras,

They discovered that the enemy were advancing.

Eecta, ol iroAijutpi Trpoo-TrXiovaiv.

(b) The Aorist Participle denotes an action past relatively to

the "principal verb.

BoiiUTOt oi e£ "A/opijs dvacrravTes rijv Boliotlclv wK-qo-av.Tiiuc.

Boeotians who had been driven out of Arne settled in Boeotia.

See further however under the Aorist Participle, which in

itself does not denote time.

(c) With regard to the Future in the Moods it seems always

express future time, for

(1.) The Future Optative is only used to represent in theObliqua a Future In^gJjg^f^r^^Discourse.

Ho THE TENSES.

(2.) The Futwre Infinitive is most commonly used after verbsof saying and thinking, and therefore like the Optative, repre-

sents a Future Indicative of the Recta. Whenever the FutureInfinitive is used after other verbs, instead of the usual

Present or Aorist Infinitive, the idea of futurity still seemsto be emphasised, e.g.: —

He delays to do his duty, peXXei iroatv or n-oi'qa-ai t«Seovra.

/jiAXXei iroirj<ruv (with emphaticreference to the future).

avafidWeTai is similarly used.

(3.) The Future Participle denotes a future relative to the

principal Verb.

(rvXXajxfidvei K{!/3ov, u>s aTTOKrevlav.

He seizes Cyrus with the intention of hilling him.

B. THE KIND OF ACT OR STATE.With regard to the Kind of Act denoted Tenses are

divided into

1. Continued (Present, Imperfect).

2. Finished (Perfect, Pluperfect).

3. Indefinite or Single (Aorist Strong and Weak).

1. A continued Tense mentions an act as still going on,

or in progress, whether in past, present, or future, an act

in which the agent is still engaged, i" was writing, I amwriting, I. shall be vjriting (the letter).

2. A finished Tense mentions an act as one which is

perfect, complete, in a finished state, I have written,

I had written, I shall have written (the letter).

3. An indefinite Tense mentions the mere act itself,

a single act, without any such limitation of its con-

tinuance or completion, I wrote, T write, I shall tvrite

(the letter). Hence the Stoic grammarians called such a

Tense an Aorist (i.e. adpia-rov or unlimited).Digitized by Microsoft®



IDEAL DIVISION OF TENSES. 141

The distinction between the Kinds of Act is observed

throughout all the Moods, and is therefore a more univer-

sal and abiding distinction than that of Time.

Note. The kind of act is denoted in Greek by the Tense-stem, AY-, AYC-, AYCA-, AEAY-.

The Present Tense-stem (Present and Imperfect Tenses)denotes a continued act.

The Perfect {i.e. reduplicated) Tense-stem (Perfect, Plu-

perfect, and Future Perfect Tenses) denotes a finished act.

The Aorist Tense-stems (Strong and Weak Aorist tenses)

denote an indefinite or single act.

The Future is ambiguous, denoting either a continued or

an indefinite act.

§ 137. Ideal division of Tenses.

An ideal twofold division of Tenses may be thus con-

structed, to be read horizontally and vertically.

142 THE TENSES.

Note. ,A very rare poetical periphrasis occurs with Aorist

Participle, o-tftMnjeras eao[J,ai)

\v7rr]dets ecrojucu, SOPH. 0. T.

1146,0. C. 816.

This scheme, however, is purely ideal, and does not corre-spond to the Greek tenses, however well it corresponds withour analytic English tenses.

In Greek the kind of act, as has been observed already, is

denoted by the Present, the Perfect, and the Aorist Tense-

stems : the Future Tense-stem has to be left out.

The most important distinction is that between a Continuedand an Indefinite act.

§ I38. THE PRESENT AND IMPERFECTINDICATIVE.

A. The Present Indicative denotes :

1. An act in which a person is engaged in present

time ; <ypu<f>a>, I am writing now.

2. An act which is habitual or repeated, or a general

truth, without being limited to the present moment.

pcofiT] a^aQ'ns 7roX.Xa«t? Ti/crei /3\a/3rjv. Euk. Frag.

Strength untrained oft brings forth harm.

Vis consili expers mole ruit sua. Horace.Note 1. The Present has also certain idiomatic uses of which

the following are the commonest :

(a) The Historic present denotes a past event. In CompoundSentences it reckons as an historic tense. This historic pre-

sent seems sometimes equivalent to an aorist (narrative),

sometimes to an imperfect (descriptive).

a-vkXapfiavu KSpov (is dwoKTCvC} v. XEN.He seizes (seized) Cyrus with the intention of hilling him.

(b) The Present, as it denotes an unfinished act, oftendenotes an attempted act.

tow AaKeScUiiioviovs avaipei, tow Se <3?a)K6as <7<6fa. DEM.He is trying to destroy the Lacedaemonians, and to save the

Phocians.

PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 143

This is especially the case with SiSio/iL, I offer, i.e. try to give,

and 7ra'6><o, I try to persuade. The present participle also hasthis meaning.

(c) The Present as a Perfect :

1. With iraAcu or 178)7 (all this while, this long while, not nowfor the first time), like iam, iamdudum, in Latin with thePresent.

Zfj.ot.ye vvv T£ i<al irdkai Sokci. EUE. Frag.I think so now, and I have long been thinking so.

vocrei yjSrj Sc/ca &T1).

He has been ill these ten years.

Esp. in the poets irdXcu may refer to a statement made only a

moment ago (as we say hyperbolically ever so long ago). Cf.

Soph. El. 676.

2. Certain presents have the force of perfects : ijkid, I amcome, adswm; oi'xo/ucu, I am gone (quickly) ; vikZ, I am victo-

rious; KparS),I

am victorious; fjTrwixai,

I amdefeated; ASlkw,

I have done wrong, Iam unjust; oXXv/xai, d7rdAA.11//.at, in Tragedy,I am lost, or undone.

3. Verbs of hearing and learning, &kov(j> (kXvio, poet.), rrw-

Oavoimi, alo-Odvo/xai, p.av6dv(a. dpn is often used with these

verbs.

Qe/xuTTOKXea ovk aKoveis avSpa dyadbv yeyovora ; PliAT.

Have you not heard that Themistocles proved himself a patriot ?

(d) The Present Infinitive and the Present Participle mayrepresent the Imperfect Indicative in English.

oi o-vfnrpeo-ptvovTes Kal Trapovres Kcnajj-aprvprjo-ova-i.

Dem. de F. L. 381. 5.

Those who were his fellow-colleagues in the embassy, and whowere present, will bear witness.

B. The Imperfect is the past of the Present. It

describes a past action as (a) still going on, or (6) as going

on along with other actions, or (c) as frequently recurring.

For (a) and (6) see Aorist.

c. SaKpaTi]? caaTrep eyiyvaiaicev, ovtco<s eXe n/e. Xen.

Socrates used to speak exactly as he used to think.Digitized by Microsoft®



PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE. 145

Not only in the Subjunctive and Optative, but also in the[ndicative, a periphrasis with dp.1 is used for the Perfect. Theabiding nature of the result is then emphasized.

eis oSe p.ovoyevqs ovpavbs yeyovtus Itrri re kgu It' Itrrat.

Plat. Tim. 31.

This one sole-created heaven hath been created, and shall still

endv/re.

Cf . e'x' wi^ Aorist Participle.

The Perfect of many verbs is equivalent to a Present:redvrjKev, he is dead; KiKX-qfxai, I am called; ykyova, I am be-

come, i.e. I am; /tEjuv^juai, I remember; olSa (o-vvoiSa.), I know,

novi. The Pluperfect is then an Imperfect, kredvrjKu, he wasdead, etc. The Perfect Imperative of such verbs is a simple

Perfect.

Note. A great number of Perfects in Homer describe present

acts or states : avcoya, /3£j3pi8a, KtKevda, pk/xrjka, p.ip,ova, eppiya,

etc. etc.

B. The Pluperfect is the Perfect carried back to past

time. eyeiypaxjiT], T had written, my writing was in a

finished state in the past.

For the Future Perfect, see Future.

The Perfect Imperative (3d singular Middle and Passive)

issues a decisive command which is to be executed at once,and there an end.

piyfii TodSe wpicrdto vp.Zv f] /3paSvrrj?. ThUC. i. 71.

At this point let yov/r slowness find a limit (come to an end).

Hactenus progressa (terminata) esto (finem habeat) vestra

tarditas. Poppo.

§ 140. THE AORIST.1. The Aorist denotes the mere occurrence of an act in

past time. Apart from difference of time the Aorist is

always distinguished from the Imperfect (and in the

Oblique Moods from the Present) by noticing the mere

doing of the act, and not describing the act as in pro-

gress. The Aorist has been likened to a point, the Im-perfect (and Preseirb^f/teea/lji'ii®crosoft®

THE TENSES.

Note. As the Aorist notices the mere act or state itself, three

aspects of this are observable.

1. The commencement of the act, the beginning, not the con-tinuance.

This has been called the Ingressive or Inceptive Aorist.

eftao-iXevcre, he came to the throne (ifiaalXevev, he was king).

iirXovrrjaev, he became rich (en-XovTa, he was a rich man).Ivoo-ijo-e, he fell ill (evoo-ei, he was ill).

2. The act as done and over, not as doing.

AYCIII1IOC EnOIHCE denotes the simple fact thatLysippus was the maker of the statue.

AYCinilOC EnOIEI denotes the labour spent on the

making.

eSeiirvrjcrav, they supped, i.e. ended supper.

ZSeiTTvow, they were at supper.

vv^ iyevero, night came on, i.e. it was night.

vv\ kyiyvero, night was coming cm, i.e. it was twilight.

3. The act as instantaneous and momentary, not as occupyinga long time.

eyui Se r)\9ov, eTSov, eviKrjcra.

" Caesar's brag of ' came, and saw, and overcame.' " Shak.

2. The Aorist is narrative, the Imperfect is descriptive;

i.e. the Aorist is used when we merely mention a past actas having occurred, while the Imperfect is used when wewish to describe or paint (so to speak) past acts as still

going on.

oi pev airrj\6ov. K\eavSpo<; Be edvero, ical avvfjv

Uevo(pa>vTi (f>i\,iKa><;, kcu %eviav o-vvefiaXovTo. Xe.N.

So they went away. Meanwhile Oleander was en-gaged in sacrificing, and in friendly intercourse

with Xenophon, and they formed a friendship.

Note 1. Other uses of the Aorist :

The Aorist is also distinguished from the Imperfect by themere mention of an act without reference to other acts, whilethe Imperfect often describes an act as going on side by sidewith another act.

THE AORIST. 147

Havcravtas e« AaKeSalfiovos (TTparrjybs vtto tmv 'EAA.iji/o)v e£e-

7refj.(ji9ri pera eiKocri veZv otto HeXoTrovvq&ov, £vviir\eov Se Kal

'A.6r)vaioi rpiaKOvra vavo-l, Kal ecrTpdrtvarav Is Kwt/jov, Kal

chjtijs ra iroAAa KaTco-Tpeâvro.

Pauscmias was sent out from Lacedaemon by the Greeks as

admiral with twenty ships from Pehpormese. The Athenians also

accompanied him with thirty ships, and they proceeded to Cyprus,

and subdued the greater part of it.

Note 2. The Aorist is used (esp. in Tragedy) where we use a

Present. The moment of past time is but an instant before.

Something an instant ago has evoked the act.

eTrrjve<r' epyov Kal irpovoiav rjv Wov. SOPH. Ai. 586.

I commend the act, and the forethought thou didst show.

Elect. 668. 677, Eur. Hec. 1275* El. 248, Philoc. 1289, 1314.

gvvfJKa, I understand, and â-drjv, I am pleased, are of constant

occurrence.

6$/h£'epwrt,

7re/otxa

/3 ')s 8' dvcTTTOfiav.

Soph. Ai. 692.I thrill with love and flutter overjoyed.

Here the act is instantaneous also.

Note 3. English often uses the Pluperfect where G-reek uses

the Aorist ; this is especially the case in Oratio Obliqua :

01 'IvSot e'Ae£av on irefitj/eie cr<£as fiacrikev's.

Xen. Cyr. ii. 4. 7.

The Indians said that their king had sent them.

Eecta «re/*êv, where we should say " has sent " (not sent).

This in Obliqua becomes had.

And with temporal and local sentences

hreiSr) heXevrrjare Aapdos Kal KaTecrrr] ' Apra£ep£r]s.

Xen. An. i. 1. 3.

After Darius Jiad died and Artaxerxes had been established

in the kingdom.Quum mortuus esset Darius, etc.

krpdirovro h Udvopfiov oOtv dvrjydyovro. ThUC. i. 92.

They turned towards Panormus whence they had set sail.

Note 4. The Greek Aorist and English Perfect.

Though we have an Aorist in English corresponding to the

Greek, yet Greek uses the Aorist even more constantly than

English. We use a Perfect sometimes where Greek uses anDigitized by Microsoft®

148 THE TENSES.

Aorist. Thus I am shocked if these are the orders which you-

have given, Setvbv Troi.ovp.ai, el roiavra Trap'qyyeiXas. Here an

act rather than a finished state is denoted,and the Greek

Aorist is more correct than the English Perfect. See exampleabove, Soph. Ai. 586, Wov would naturally be rendered into

English, thou hast shown. Again a Gnomic Aorist in Greekmay be rendered by an English Perfect.

Note 5. The Aorist Participle generally expresses time prior

to its principal verb, but not always so, and, when so, not fromits own inherent meaning, but only from its connexion witha principal verb.

Thus yeXdo-as (ol/xwâs) e<p-q, With a smile, laugh (sigh) he

said.

(i eirotrjcra'S dvapvYjo-as p.e. PLAT. Phaed. 60.

You did well to remind me.

Here the two acts are contemporary and identical.

So eS eirolrjcras dîKo/wvos. HDT. v. 24.

Cf. Curtius, Elucidations, p. 211.

Note 6. The following verbs show the contrast between the

Present and the Aorist in the kind of act denoted. It will

be noticed that several are Ingressive Aorists.

voaretv, to be ill. vocrijcrcu, to fall ill.

<j>evyet,v, to run away. <f>vyeiv, to escape.

<fx>f3eio-8a.i, to be in fear. 4>oj3rj9rjva.i, Seco-ai, to take fright,

trp&jviiv, to be busy about, irpdâi, to accomplish.' yeXSv, to be laughing. yeXao-ai, to burst out laughing,

apxeiv, to rule. apgai, to obtain dominion or office.

io™xveiv, to be strong. Kr^wrai, id become strong,

o-iyav, to be silent. o-iyrjo-au, to become silent.

e'xav, to have. °"X e ' vi

t° obtain.

<l>aLve<Tdai, to appear. cfaavfjvai, to become apparent.

KoXcp,eiv, to be at war. TroXep/qo-ai, to- begin war.belhim gerere. belluni inferre.

fSao-iXeieiv, to be Icing. /3atriAe{)crai, to come to the throne.

Note on the Aorist.

The Aorist is often called the momentary tense. It is

doubtful, however, whether momentariness is its essential

meaning. We should use the aorist if we translated TheDigitized by Microsoft®

THE FUTURE. 149

Pharaohs built the pyramids, ol /Sao-iAas tuv AfyimriW <£ko8o-

Hijo-av Tas Trv/oa/ttSas, though the pyramids, like Eome, were

not built in a day. We should equally, use it in translatingHe burst out laugfimg, kykXao-t, or He fell ill., ivoo-rjtre. Andagain we should use it of such an instantaneous shiver of

emotion as is contained in ?<£/h£' epwn, I thrill with love.

The mere mention of the act (or state) itself, without regardto its duration, seems to be the one description of the Aorist

which suits it all through. Aorist and indefinite are not verysatisfactory words, but they have been retained as familiar,

for want of a better. Simple and Isolated have been suggested.

§ 141. THE FUTURE.

The Future denotes an act which will take place here-

after.

Its action is either continued or indefinite (see above).

Note 1. Idiomatic uses of the Future :

The second person of the Future both affirmatively andnegatively resembles an imperative.

(a) Affirmatively (either as a statement, or as a questionwith ov Interrogative)

irpbs ravra ir/oa£eis oTov av 9eX.rjS. SOPH. 0. G. 956.

Thou wilt do therefore (do therefore) whatever likes thee.

oix '*^-$* T '; ov iranjo-er', ovk dprj^ere ; Ak. L/y. 459.

The expression is not so abrupt in form as an imperative.

Asuggestion is made, or a permission given, which, however,

is an unmistakeable Imperative.

(b) Negatively with ov —key' ci ti fiovXei, x«P' <?' ov ipavcreis irorL EUE. Med. 1320.

Speak if thou wilt, but with the hand thou must touch me never.

Observe (1) that in Euripides oi with the Future is a state-

ment, in Aristophanes a question ; (2)that in

bothpassages ov

with the Future is <&r^M9ii^l9r^ofi% Imperative.

150 THE TENSES.

Note 2. A 'periphrastic Future is formed by peXXia with the

Present or Future (more rarely the Aorist) Infinitive.

ptXXai ypd<f>av, ypdipeiv (rarely ypdipai).

I am going to write, I mean or intend to write.

p,iXXo) vp.as clyav £ts 'Acrtav.

I am going to lead you (am on the point of leading you) into

Asia.

In Asiam vos ducturus sum.

SerjcreL tou toiovtov el peXXei fj iroXiTua <Tu>£co-6a.i.

Plat. Hep. 412.

There will he need, of such a ruler if the constitution is to be

e/ieXXov in the same way is used

epeXXov cr' apa Kivryruv ky&. AE. Nub. 1301.

Aha ! I thought I should tickle you.

evTavQa epeXXov KaraXvcrctv.XEN.There they were intending to rest.

Ibi deversuri erant.

Sometimes peXXo>, epeXXov, means I am doomed, destined,

irm ov fjLeXXu, tC ov peXXw ; mean Wlvy should I not ?

2. The Future Perfect denotes a finished act or state

in the Future :

r) irokneia TeXew; tceKoafirjaeTai. Plat.

Ov/r state shall have been perfectly constituted.

Note. The Future Perfect, like the Perfect, sometimes de-notes what will take place instantly.

Compare

KO.V TOVTO VlKUip.£V TtdvB' f)piv TTiTTOL-qTai. XEN. An. L 8. 12.

If we secure this victory we have done everything.

with4>pd£e ko.1 TreTrpagerai. AR. Plut. 1027.Speak, and it shall be done instanter.

A periphrastic future perfect active is formed with dpi —ra Seovra icropeOa eyvtaKOTts, k.t.X. DEM. Phil. i. 54,We shall haverjj^gffiBf4viierSkbmr duty.

GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES. 151

§ 142. Gnomic and Iterative Tenses.

Almost any tense in Greek, as in English, can express a

customary or a repeated act, or a general truth.

1. The Present —ptapyq dfiadrjs iroXXdius tiktu (3\a(3r)v. EUK. (See above.)

Strength without science often causeth harm.Vis consili expers mole ruit sua.

2. The Perfect—

iroWoi 81a 86£av Kai ttoAitkJjv 8vvafj.iv KaKaireirovdacriv.

., Xen.Many have come to trouble (and do come to troulle) m conse-

quence of reputation and political power.

(This perfect alternates with presents in the text.)

3. The Aorist called Gnomic, as expressing a yvdiir], sentiment or

general truth —dOviiovvTes avSpes oviru rpoiralov e&Tiqcrav. PLAT.Half-hearted men never yet set up a trophy.

So in English —" Faint heart never won fair lady."

Seij/ftV t' arjfia Trve.vp.dTWV kKoljuare (rrevovTa ttovtov.

Soph. Ai. 674.

And the breath of dreadful wimds husheth ever the moaning

deep.

The present and perfect, the present and aorist, the perfect

and aorist, often alternate in the same paragraph.

4. The Imperfect and Aorist with av denote a repeated act.

dva\ap.j3dvo>v ov~v avTwv T<x Troi-qpara SirjpaiTUV av avTOvs

ti Xeyoiev. PLAT. Apol. ch. viii.

Taking up their poems then I used to ask them (I would ask

them) what their meaning was.

ti rives iSoiev Trrj tovs <r<peripov<s eiriKpaTOVVTas avedap<rr](rav

S. v . Thuc. vii. 71.

If at any point they saw their own side winning they picked

up their courage (as often as this happened).

For an excellent pjpagg fprffaffi^hH. 289-297.

152 THE TENSES.

§ J 43- The Tenses in the Moods.

The distinction previously explained between the Present,the Perfect, and the Aorist, is observed in all the moods,the Indicative, Imperative, Subjunctive, Optative, Infinitive,

and Participle. Some instances are given to show the differ-

ence, especially between the Present and the Aorist.

firjSh <f>o/3ov, Don't be timid : jj.rjSev <$>oj3-qdfj<s, Don't have

any fear of this.

€ ' "T7 *X e ' s dvnXeyeiv, dvrlXeye' el Se [i-q, Travcrai iroWaidsXeytov tov avrbv Xoyov. PLAT. Grit.

If you have anything to say in objection, say on {at length, in

a continued speech), but if not, give over (at once) repeatingthe same argument.

Subjunctive or Optative —ov tovto Trwirore ZireicrOrjv dis fj >pvxtf, ecus fi.lv ev t$ dvyrai

cr(o[iari, y, (rj, orav 8e tovtov diraXXayy, reBvrjKev.

Xen. Cyr. viii. 7. 19.

He never believed that the soul, so long as it exists in this

mortal body, Jives, but that as soon as it is separated fromit, it dies (fj denoting continuance, aTraXXayfj the instantact of death).

Infinitive —ov povXevea-dai en &pa dXXa j3ef3ov\evcr8ai. PLAT. Grit.

It is no longer file moment to be making up one's mind, but to

have it made up.

XaXeiruv to Troielv to Se KeXevo-ai paSiov.

It is difficult to do (to be engaged in doing), but easy to com-mand (to say ' do this

').

So with the other Moods.

CHAPTER VIII.

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

1. The Infinitive (a Substantive).

2. The Participle (an Adjective).

3. The Verbal Adjectives in -tos and -reos.

§ 144. Note on the Infinitive.

The Infinitive is, in its origin, a Verbal Substantive in the

Dative case. Though subsequently its uses diverged so widelyfrom this limited signification, yet its origin gives us a clue toits different meanings.

Thus—&pa airiivai would mean time for going away.oWai-ds yeveo-Oat, able for becoming.

/jLavOdvctv t/ko/«v, we are come for learning.

irapex<0 epavrbv rijxvuv koX KaUiv, I offer myself for cutting

and burning.

6av[ia ISeo-dai, a wonder for the viewing.

For full information consult Professor Max Miiller's

Inaugural Oxford Lecture.

§ I45. THE INFINITIVE.

The Infinitive is a Verbal Substantive denoting action.

Compare to ttoiclv with r) ttoitqo-li.

It has therefore points in common both with (1) the Verb,

(2) with the Noun.

1. Like the Verb

(a) It has tenses and voices —Xveiv, Xvo-ew, Xva-ai, etc.,

Xvcrai, Xvcracrdai, XvtiTJvat,.

(b) It takes a subject before and a predicate after itDigitized by Microsoft® 153

1 54 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

(c) It governs the same case as its verb.

(d) It is qualified, like a verb, by adverbs, and not like

a substantive by adjectives.

(e) It forms subordinate sentences, the indirect statement,

a temporal sentence (with irplv), a final sentence,

a consecutive sentence, with &a-re and (is, and in

connexion with av it is a substitute for the in-

dicative and optative moods with av. This last

use gives it a sort of right to be called a mood.

2. Like a Substantive

(a) It stands as the subject to a verb.

(b) It is declined with the article as a nominative, accusa-

tive, genitive, or dative.

(c) It is connected with Prepositions.

§ I46. THE SUPPLEMENTARY^ INFINITIVE.

1. The Infinitive supplements the meanings of verba

and nouns (especially of verbs) which in themselves are

incomplete.

hfiaOov tovto 77-0M70YU.

They learned to do this.

ov "7re<j>vice SovXeveiv.

He is not bom to be a slave.

6rjfjLi<TT0K\rj<; iKavwTaro<; rjv enretv kclL yvoivai. Kai

irpa^ai. Lts.

Themistocles was eminently able to speak, to decide,

and to act.

Note 1. Sometimes the article is added.

to /?ta ttoXitwv Spav e<f>vv d/j?7xavos. SOPH. Ant. 78.

I am by nature incapable of acting in defiance of my fellow-citizens. Of. Track 545, 0. C. 442, Aesch. P. V. 865.

1

Also called the Complementary, or the Prolate, Infinitive. Theterm Supplementary egpg^^njjjjgy^nteUigible.



i 5 8 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

Infinitive.

THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE INFINITIVE. 159

The explanation is that the mind has inserted the Accusa-tive Subject before the Infinitive, licet mihi me esse beatum,e£ecrTiv vjjXv v/tas \af36vTa<s oVAa f$07]6eiv.

Note 2. The personal passive construction is used in Greekside by side with the impersonal passive followed by the

Accusative and Infinitive, the former being the commoner.

6 Kupos rryyiXd-q vi/crjcrcu. XEN.Cyrus was reported to have conquered.

AeytTcu 'A\Ki/3id8riv HepitcXei Sia\e)^8rjvai irepl vofuov.

Xen.It is said that Alcibiades conversed with Pericles about the

laws.

This construction should be compared with the Latin

(traditur, fertur, dicitur, existimatur, videtur, creditor, etc.,

etc., with an Infinitive); e.g. existimatur errare, probus esse,

he is thought to be mistaken, to be upright (it is thought that

he, etc.) See Zumpt § 607 and note. But the Greekcon-

struction is much freer, and follows many adjectives.

Certain adjectives, Sixcuos, agios, worthy ; e7rmj8eios (fit),

«ri'8o£os (probable), dva-y/«uos (necessary), may take either a

personal or an impersonal construction with the Infinitive.

Thus we may say either Sikouos eif" ravra iroieiv or Suctuov

ktrrw ifie TuJro iroietv, 1 am justified in so doing or it is right for

me so to do.

Instances of Sikcuos occur in Plato's Apology ii. 1, Crito iv.,

Soph. Ant. 400.

Note 3. Soku is generally personal

dS Xeyeiv juoi SoKelre, I think you speak well.

Cf. rots 7rA.eio-Tois ISokow, most people thought, (they seemed to

most).

eSo£a aKoCo-at, I thought I heard.

Soku) uoi tov ovov egdyeiv, lam determined to lead out the ass.

The impersonal oWi tivi, is rare : Sonet, ISoge, it is decreed,

is different. With Sonm, Soku, cf. the use of 'ioiKa, I seem,

varying with eWe, and the Latin, videor mihi, videtur mihi.

Note 4. The Infinitive is used for the imperative in formal or

solemn language, in poetry more freely.Digitized by Microsoft®

160 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

(a) In legal orders or official commands.

(XKOvere X.€(i . . . irlveiv mrb T?}s (raAiriyyos. Ae. Ach. 1000.

Hear ye, good people all t drink to the trumpet's sound.With aKoveTe compare yes !

(b) In prayers.

deol woXtTai, /*?; yue SoiAeias ru^eiv. AESCH,Gods of my country, let me not meet with slavery (grant

that, etc.).

Examples occur in Soph. Elect. 9, Ant. 1080 (where a kingspeaks), Thuc. v. 9, vi. 34.

Note 5. The Infinitive is used in expressions of surprise.

(Of. Lat. 'Mene incepto desistere victam.')

T7js ixmpia<s, to Ala vo[iiC,uv, ovra. Tr/XiKovrovL

Ar. Nub. 819Wliat folly I to thinh of a man of his years believing in Zeus !

Note 6. The tenses of the Infinitive correspond to the tensesof the Indicative throughout in the character of the action (as

continued, finished, or indefinite).

They only express distinctions of time when representingthe Indicative of the Recta in indirect statements or direct

questions.

But the Present Infinitive sometimes represents an Imper-

fect and not a Present Indicative.

was ovv cu^as VTroXa.fif3o.veT zvyto-dai rbv QiXittttov 6VtWevSev Dem. de F. L. 381. 10.

What vows do you suppose Philip was offering when he wasmaking libations 1

This is often the case after e<j>r]v. So in Latin, meminime dicere means / remember I was saying (also accepimus,

scribit). See Zumpt, § 589, note.

Madvig first pointed out this, § 171. 6, Rem. 1. It is fully

discussed in Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 15.

§ I48. THE INFINITIVE AS A NOVA.1. The Infinitive, like a Substantive, may stand either

as the Subject or the Predicate of a sentence.Digitized by Microsoft®

i62 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

(c) The Genitive is very often Objective.

rjTrelyovro irpbs tov TOTa/xov tov irieiv emOvfiiq..

Thuc. vii. 84.

They were hurrying to the river m their desire to drink (of

The Genitive of the Infinitive sometimes expresses the aimor purpose (usually in this sense it takes eve/cot). The idiom

is considered either a genitive of value or a genitive of cause.

(See Causal Genitive.)

ereix" 7 "^? 'AraAai/Tij 17 vijcros totj /tij Xyo-ras KaKovpyeivt})v MBoiav. ' Thuc. ii. 32 (cf. i. 4).

The island of Atalante was fortified in order that the pirates

might not injure Huboea (with a view to their not, etc.).

The construction is not very common, but thoroughly estab-

lished, in Attic Prose. The only thing in Latin like it is the

genitive with the Gerundive, a construction which frequently

occurs in Livy : haec prodendi imperii Bomani, tradendae Hanni-bali victoriae sunt, xxvii. 9 ; aeguandae libertatis esse, xxxviii. 50.

See Zumpt, § 662, note 2.

§ I49. THE PARTICIPLE.

The Participle has three different uses.

A. It is an attributive to a Substantive.

6 irapcov ")(povo<s, the present time.

B. It qualifies the principal Verb of a sentence like a

Supplementary Predicate, or Adverbial Sentence.

ravra eirparre (TTpaTrffcov.

He was doing this while he was general.

C. It supplements the meaning of a verb, the meaning

of which would otherwise be incomplete (cf. the Supple-

mentary Infinitive).Digitized by Microsoft®

Note 2. Many neuter Participles are Substantival.

to o-v/jifapov, expediency, utile, utilitas With an Adjective

in agreement, t<x pui<pa <rvp,$ipovTa, t?js jrdAea>s, Dem. Thesmall interests of the state.

ra Seovrci, duties or duty, officia.

Thucydides and the poets use a neuter present participle as

a Substantive, where an Infinitive would be more usual.

iv tw pr] peXerZvTi,, by want of training ( = !v T<£ prj pekerav).

to ScSids, fear=TO SeSievai, to #apo"OW = To dapcreiv=To

Odpcros. THUC.TO VOO-OW=TO VOO-£lV:=17 V0V0S. SOPH. PMl. 674.

In the poets ol t£kovt6s, parents; 6 reKwv, the father;

r) riKovo-a, the mother (17 TiKrovo-a also, Soph.). <5 l/ceivoi-

TCKuv, his father, to tttotjOcv cry faxfi: ^ le wild fluttering in thy

heart, Eur. Bacch. 1269.

B. The Participle qualifies the Principal Verb like

a Supplementary Predicate or an Adverbial Sentence,

(Conditional, Temporal, Causal, etc.).

These usages of the Participle are very common in

Greek, and are most important to notice. The particles

which bring out the special significance of the Participle

in each case should be carefully noticed. The different

usages are given under the heads of the different sentences

in the Compound Sentence. (See Index)

Note 3. The Participle in a Sentence expresses circumstanceor manner generally.

The particles ovtioi, totc, eTra, /cpra (/cat eira), eVetra are

put before the Principal Verb. The sense hovers betweenthat of time and of circumstance.

To this head belong the phrases (as old as Homer), ri paOdvtI iradwv ; in the obliqua 6Vi paOwv, iradmv.

rl paOovres epapTvpeire v/tefs ; DEM. 45. 38.

What induced you to give evidence ?

't'i Tradovo-au dvrjrah ei£acri ywai^i; Ar. Nub. 341.

What has happened to (the clouds) that they look like mortalwomen?

So ti €xa)i/ ; ti ySouAduevos ; Plat. Phaed. 236, E.Digitized by Microsoft®



1 66 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

Note. The Participle alone, without the Genitive being

expressed, occurs (see Genitive Case, Genitive Absolute) —(a.) Where the Genitive is easily supplied from context

ol Se TroX.efii.ioi, 7rpoo~i6vTu>v (sc. twv 'EAAiji/coi/ men-tioned just before), tews plv rio-v\a^ov.

Xen. An. v. 4. 16.

The enemy, as they were approaching, for a while were

remaining quiet.

Cf. iv. 8. 5, ZpwTrjo-avTos (sc. avTov).

(b.) In certain impersonal expressions

outios e)(6vTa>v. Xen. An. v. 4. 16.

Such being the case, quae quum ita sint.

io-ay ye Xdevrwv on at vrjes irXeovo-i. THUC. i. 116.

On the news arriving that the ships were sailing.

vovtos ttoXXQ (sc. Atos). Xen. Hell. i. 1. 16 (cf. An.

Vesp. 774).

Cf. Thuc. i. 74 (S}?A(o06j/tos), Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 18 (o-r/^oi/-

Oivrtov). Compare the Latin Ablative Past Participle Passive(cognito, edicto, etc.) agreeing with the whole sentence.

The Participle is very rarely omitted.

cos tpov /xovijs 7reAas (sc. oi'crijs). SOPH. 0. C. 83.

Since I alone am at thy side.

§ 152. The Genitive Absolute in Greek and the

Ablative Absolute in Latin.

Great care must be taken not always to use one where weshould use the other. The Greek has a perfect series of

active participles, the Latin has no past participle active

except in the case of Deponents.

Therefore in Latin we may write

His verbis editis egressi suntSo saying they went out.

But in Greek this would be

and notTovTtav Xe\6evTU)v eAietrctv,

Digitked by MicWsoft®

ovyi $ e ecraxra/Aev oiov re bv kcu hvvarov. PLAT.

We did not save you when (though) it was feasible and

possible.

Sofjavra vp.lv Tama, e'iKecrde avSpa? etcarov. ANDOK.

On coming to this resolution (decree), you appointed a

hundred men.

cnamr) eSenrvovv, wsirep tovto TrposreraypLevov.

Xen.

They were talcing their meal in silence, as though they

had been ordered to do so.

For other examples see Thuc. i. 126 (vTrdpxov), viii. 79(86£av). For passive participles see Thuc. i. 125 (SeSoypevov),

V. 30 (elp-qpivov), v. 56 (yeypap.jj.ivov).

Sometimes a personal verb is found with the Accusative

Absolute, but then usually with the subjective particles ios,

<Ss7rep.

'ivioi t<3v dScA^Gv dpeXovo-iv &%irep ov yiyvopevovs <f>t\ovs.

Some men neglect their brothers under the impression that they

do not become friends.

Xen. Mem. ii. 3. 3 (quotation shortened).

Cf. Mem. i. 2. 20. But Xen. Hell. iii. 2. 19 (Sd£avTa ravra

kcu irepavOkvra), THUC. iv. 125 (nvpviOlv ovSev).

§ 154. VERBALS IN -Teo<s.

Verbals in -reos imply necessity. They take the samecase as the verb to which they belong. The agent is

generally in the Dative(but see

below).The verbal has

two constructions, the Personal and the Impersonal.

§ 155. A. THE PERSONAL CONSTRUCTION.ao-Kwrea ecrri croi rj apery.

You must practise virtue.

Colenda est tibi virtus.Digitized by Microsoft®



THE IMPERSONAL CONSTRUCTION. 169

§ 156. B. THE IMPERSONAL CONSTRUCTION.

Here the verbal is either singular or plural.

acncwTeov, ) , , \ , ,j / > eari aoi Tim apeTwv.

acrKTjTea, )'

€7ri9vu,t]Teop,l , v „ > „ / „ , „ -p.,> n ' C effTt TO 49 aVOOCOTTOlS TWS UOSTm. DEM.

emOvfirjrea, )' '

Men must covet virtue.

Note. The agent, however, in Attic, is fairly often in theAccusative, instead of the Dative.

ovSevl rpoirtp (jia/itv e/cdvras dSiK-qreov elvai. PLAT. Grit.

We maintain that m no way must we deliberately commit in-

justice.

And the Dative and Accusative are both found together.

Eur. Phoen. 710, 712.

§ 157. C. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE.

The Supplementary Participle is used, much like the

Supplementary Infinitive, to complete the meaning of

many verbs and verbal phrases. It agrees either (1) with

the Subject, or (2) with the Object of the verb.

§ 158. THE SUPPLEMENTAR Y PARTICIPLE INAGREEMENT WITH THE SUBJECTOF THE VERB.

The Participle is used with the following classes of

Verbs :

* Verbs marked thus have peculiar usages which are ex-

plained in the notes.

A. Verls of Feeling and Perceiving (see Indirect

Statement). These verbs differ from the following

because they can equally take a finite mood with on or

&>?, thus showing the substantival character of the con-

struction which &t%JBt^mosam

B. Verbs of Mental Emotion.

)(a.ip(n, tfSofmt, dx&opai, dyava.KT<a (I am vexed), x<*X£7r<Bs <pepw

(I am vexed), pxTa.fieXop.ai, perapeku fioi (I repent, regret), dvk-

ypfiai (I endure), paStas <pepw (I easily bear).

âlpovcrip aKOVOVTe<s e%era%o[ievwv t£>v avBpwrrwv.

Plat.

They like to hear people cross-questioned.

XpTj/J'O.TUiv ovk alcrxyvei kiupeXovpevo'S ; PLAT.

Are you not ashamed to be devoting yourself to numey-makmg ?

paSliai <£epeis fjp.as diroXelirtov. PLAT.You don't mind leaving us behind (you make light of doing so).

C. Verbs of beginning, continuing, and ending an action

(including persevering and growing weary).

*dp\opai, *vTrap)(w, (f>8dv(a, SiareXw, 8idya>, Siayiyvopmi (I

continue), xavop.ai, aTrelp-qKa, and Kap.v(o (I grow tired).

top \onrov @iov KaOevZovres Zunekolr av. PLAT.

You would go on sleeping for the rest of your lives.

ov fjut) tTavcTcofiai <pCKoao(pu)v. PLAT.

Never will I give over the pursuit of wisdom.

ovk dveôpai fwcra. EUEIP.

I will not endure to live.

D. Verbs of being manifest, being detected (convicted),

and of escaping notice.

*8ijXos ii/Jti (SrjXS, intrans.), *<£av£jOos eipi, *^>a.ivopai, SeiK-

vvp.i, Xavddvia, dXlo-Kop-ai (the active form is alpa).

897X0? el tcaTa<ppov£>v. PLAT.

It is clear that you despise me.

Sei^co avrov afjiov bvra. Dem.7 will prove that he is worthy.

eheiâv eToip,oi ovtgs. Thuc.

They showed that they were ready.

(fiavepOL eifftv aya)vt,%op,evoi iravTei}. Xen.

It is evident that they all are contending.Digitizeaby Microsoft®

NOTE ON SPECIAL VERBS. 171

JliyXew? yap a^ia

warpo? t A%ik\ea)<; en, tovto irpaTTWV, airoOavel. PLAT.

If you are caught again m this pursuit, you shall die

(if you are convicted of following it any longer).

So SijAtS, Soph. 0. G. 556, and Ji. 472, Ant. 20 (in nomina-tive attraction). SeiKw/xi (see third example above) may beintransitive, Euk. I. A. 436, Thug. 72. The above verbs,

however, have several other constructions, for which see

below.

§ 159. Note on Special Verbs.

1. apxaficu takes both the Infinitive and Participle, moreusually the Infinitive. The Participle seems to denote, morethan the Infinitive, that the act is going on.

rjp£avTO olKoSofieiv.

They began to build (of the intention).

rjp^avro otKoSojUoiWes.

They began the building (the act going on).

See Thuc. i. 107.

2. wrapx®.

idv Tts >7/Jas eS ttoiZv VTrdp^r/. XbN.

If any one first confers a kindness on us.

Otherwise inrdpx<» is used almost like Tvyxdvw.

vwdpxei. ex^/Oos &>v. DEM.He is an enemy (to begin with).

3. <f>6dvo>.

(a) ecf>6acre (ecfiOr]) drputop.evo'S.

He was beforehand in arriving.

ovk av <}>6dvois Xiyiov (gen. of 2d person).

Make haste, speak— or, quick, quick speak (Lit. you could

not anticipate (^ wish, or your duty) m speaking.)

The phrase forms an urgent command. Cf. Eur. Or. 936,

Ale. 662, Arist. PI. 1133.

Cf. Aeye cfiOdcras, speak quickly.

Quin statim loquere

In the last example <f>9dv(a is in the Participle.

So dv6ft)£as /*e <f>9do-as. ARIST.You opened the door before me {got the start of me).

Cf. Thuc. iv. 8.

4. dvvTU) (I achieve) is used like <j>ddv(o.

avvuov v7ro8vcrdjj.evos. ARIST.Look sharp and put your shoes on.

avvvas dvoiye.

Look alive and open the door.

5. aicr\vvo[i.ai.

o.ur)(yvo[x.ai Xkyiov.

I am ashamed of saying {while I do say).

aicr-^yvofiai Aeyctv.

I am ashamed to say (and generally, / refrain from saying).

6. dirondfjivu).

dirOKd/JLVIl) TOVTO TTOMV.

I am weary of doing this.

WTtOKdjlVlO tovto Troieiv,

I leave off doing this through weariness.

7. SrjXos eljM. Several constructions.

{a) The personal construction with participle.

SrJAos jJi/ oi6jJ.evos. XEN.It was evident that he thought.

The personal construction with u>s and participle.

S'iJA.os io-TW (JS ti Spacrelwv kixkov. SOPH. Ai.It is plain that he is craving to do some ill {Spao-dui, de-

siderative).

Cf. Soph. Ant. 242 ; SjjXois (verb) m.

(5) The personal and the impersonal construction with on andfinite mood.

SrjXoi elo~iv oti IjriKeiVoVTat. XEN.It is clear that ^g^^^Mom

NOTE ON SPECIAL VERBS. 173

SfjXnv icrTLV 077. Trmxrofxai. PLAT.It is evident that I shall give over.

8. <f>avepos ei/xi, and <j>a.vepov eort : dpKW (I suffice), dpKti, it is

sufficient (Soph. Ant. 547) : hcavos ei/u, Ikmov eort, are simi-

larly constructed either with the participle (personally) or

with on and a finite mood.

9. (paivo/xai takes the Participle and the Infinitive.

(£aii/£Tou dvrjp dyadbs tTvai.

He seems to be (is considered) a brave man.

Videtur esse fortis.

The appearance or opinion may be groundless.

<£cuveTcu dvfjp dyadbs &v.

He shows himself (proves himself, manifestly is) a brave man.

Cf. appareo in Latin.

Apparebat certamen fore. Lrv. It was evident there would

be a struggle.

Apparebat utilis. Suet. So ^euSijs faiverai (&v omitted).

ar/pteia (jiatvets (=<£aii/ei) ycyeos. SOPH. El. 24.

You show proofs that you are.

10. Xavddvo).

XeXrjda efiavrov etSws. XEN.I know without myself being aware of it.

Horace (Od. hi. 16. 32) and Propertius (i. 4 5) imitatethis Greek construction.

e.g. Hor. Fallit sorte beatior=Xav6dvei 6X/3t<arepa oStra.

Barely in Attic Xadwv is used participially with a verb=secretly, clam.

11. Tvyxdva, and (in poetry) KvpZ.

€TV)(OV TrpotreXOutv dvSpt. PLAT.

I chanced to meet a man.

Trpbs rt tovt' ebTrwv Kvpeis ; SOPH. El.

Why is it thou speakest thus 1

The notion of chance is often almost lost in both verbs.

They often denote mere coincidence in time, just then. Bothare used sometimes without a participle.

vvv dypourt Tvyxdvei. SOPH. El.

At this moment he happens to be abroad.Digitized by Microsoft®

12. o?xo/xa<. denotes rapidity and completeness.

otyero.1 favyiav.

ot)(0[j,ai <fiep(i)v.

Celeriter aufero.

oi'xetcu Oav<av.

He is dead and gone.

13. StJXos el/M (above), <f>avep6s el/j,i, Xav6a.vio are also con-

structed with oVt and finite mood. For Xavddvu on see

Plat. Crito, xii.

14. The Poets use this Supplementary Participle witha great many verbs, e.g. verbs implying superiority andinferiority (vikZ, qrroipai, lXXe.Lirop.ai) . doing right or wrong(d8iKCo, dfiaprdvio, eS or KaAfis ttoiS>).

§ l60. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE INAGREEMENT WITH THE OBJECT.

The Participle is the Predicate to the Object.

The Verbs which take this Participle are mostly the

active forms of those in the previous rule, but the cor-

respondence is not complete.

A. Verbs of stopping (making to cease), finding anddetecting, overlooking (i.e. allowing to be done).

iravo) (I make to cease, cf. iravopai), irepwpS and efopw, 1overlook (TrepieiSov, en-etSov), but not l<3, 8uKvvp.i (I point out),

Ko.Ta\ap,f3dvo), alpZ (see aXto-Kopat, in previous rule), <f>top£>,

I detect, catch, convict.

<yeXa>VTa<; e%6pov<; iravaopiev. SOPH.

We will check the merriment of our foes.

pvr) irepuScofiev vfipiadeicrav Trp> AaKehaifiova. ISAEUS.

Let us not look on and see Lacedaemon outraged.

ov )(aiprq<reis' dXXd are KXeirrovd' alprjo-to. ARIST.You slian't get off scot-free. No, I'll catch you thievina.

Digitized by Microsoft® s *

THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 175

B. Verbs of perception (see Indirect Statement, § 167).Note \. Observe, however, that Verbs of Perception may be

usedwith a Supplementary Participle which is not equivalent

to an Indirect Sentence.Thus 6pZ <re x a

'l P°VTa may mean either / see you rejoicing,

or I see that you rejoice.

yp-Oero Kvpov ireirTWKOTa, he heard that Gyrus had fallen ; butQtrd-qa-ai w&troTe pov ctvkocjhivtovvtos ; have you ever noticed meplaying the part of an informer ? clkovo) o-e rjKovra, I hear that

you are come; but &kovu) o-ov Sia\eyo[ievov, I hear you con-

2. olSa, crvvoiSa, iTrio-rafiai

olSa TavTa iroiSv.

I biow that I am doing this.

otSa ravra ttokiv.

I know how to do this.

So with lu-iora/itu,

I know for certain (scio)

e/iavTiy (rvvoiSa, ovSev brio-To.p£v<p.

e(ia,VT(p trwoiSa ov&lv «rto"Ta/*6vos.

/ am conscious that I know nothing for certain.

§ l6l. The Tenses of the Participle, and Timein the Participles.

The Tenses of the Participle correspond with the Tenses of

the Indicative always in the character of the act, and some-times in time.

1. The Present Participle denotes an act in progress, thetime of which is usually determined by, and therefore con-

temporary with, that of the principal verb. But the timomay be determined by some word in the sentence, such as

vyv, totc. Sometimes the context, without such a clew-word,determines the time.

ttjv vvv BoMtiTiav Ka\ov/j,€vrjv oyKrjcrav. ThUO. i. 12.

They occupied what is now called Boeotia.

ol KoptvOwi p-exP 1 tovtov irpodvp.ui's Trpaxrcrovres dveivav tijs

(jiikoveiKLas. THUO. V. 32.

The Corinthians, who up to that time had been energetically

at work, now abated their vehemence.Digitized by Microsoft®

ol <rv[nrpe<r/3evovTes Kal Trapovres Kara/j.aprvp'qcrova-LV.

Dem. de Fals. Leg. 381. 5.

Those who were thenhis

fellow-envoys, andwere present, will

testify against him.

Here tote would, have made the time clearer.

2. The Aorist Participle generally refers to an act prior to

that of the principal verb.

TavTO, enroVTK dirrjXdov.

They said this and went away.

But in many cases there is no such priority of time.

eS iiroirjcra's dva/JVijcrds p,e.

You did well to remind me.

§ 162. The Future Participle.

1. The Future Participle, as a rule, denotes mere futurity

in time only after verbs of Perception.

oZSa Tavra Spd<r<av.

I know that I shall do this.

rjSrj <re Tavra Spdcrovra.

I knew that you would do this.

Here the Latin future in rus is the equivalent of the Greekfuture participle (me, te haec facturum esse).

6avov/j.evr] yap e£rj8r). SOPH. Ant. 460.

I knew well that I should (or must) die.

Here the Latin gerund (mihi moriendum esse) would be thebetter equivalent.

2. But the Future Participle often denotes intention,

(a.) With a verb of motion.

ovk Is X.6yovs ik'qXvd', d\\d (re KrevSv. EUR. Tro. 905.I am not come to parley, out to kill thee.

Cf. THUC. i. 18, 8ov\wo-6/j.evos.

Here the Latin supine in -um after a verb of motion, ratherthan the future in -rus would be used. We should translate?j\9e deao-opevos by spectatum venit, not by spectaturus venit.

3. The subjective particle o>s is often addedto the FutureParticiples (as to o^%

g ^^j^) bso ^ denotes the presumed



PART II

THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.

CHAPTEE I.

§ 163. SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.

1. THE INDIRECT STATEMENT.2. THE INDIRECT QUESTION.

3. THE INDIRECT PETITION.

§ 164. THE INDIRECT STATEMENT.

The Indirect Statement quotes words or thoughts not

at first-hand (i.e. directly), but at second-hand (i.e. indi-

rectly). It therefore follows verbs and phrases of saying

and thinking.

The Indirect Statement is expressed in three ways.

A. By the Infinitive.

B. By Sri, or a>? with the Indicative or the Optative,

never with the Subjunctive.

C. By the Participle.

§ 165. A. THE INFINITIVE IN THE INDIRECTSTATEMENT.

1. The Infinitive follows expressions of saying and

thinking. The Subject before the Infinitive and the178 Digitized by Microsoft®

INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT STATEMENT. 179

Predicate after it are in the Accusative (but see next

rule). The usual negative is ov (see second example).

N.B. 1. tjytjfii and c/xxovcu regularly take the Infinitive.

2. Xkyw (active) generally takes on or <!>s, Xkyerai (it

is said) takes either the Infinitive, or on, <Ls witha finite verb.

3. ehrov takes 6Vi and <Ls. (Observe that eh-ov, I said,

introduces a Statement ; cwrov, I bade, a Petition.

1 told has the same double sense in English.

tov Slicaiov avSpa evSaifiova elvai, <f>r)fii. PLAT.

i" assert that the just man is happy.

ovSe'va ol/icu Sai/Aovav elvai ica/cov. EUKIP.

J think that none of the deities is evil.

2. But if the Subject of the Infinitive is the same as the

Subject of the Principal Verb, it is usually not expressed

at all. The Predicate is in the Nominative. This is

called the Infinitive Attraction.

(prjal <TTpa,TT]ye7v.

He says that he is general.

vo/il^et<s elvat, <£/)oz/i/«>?.

You fancy that you are prudent.

(fipovLpas the Predicate.

6 ' A\ei;av&po<; ecpacricev Aios uto? elvai.

Alexander used to pretend that he was the son of Zeus.

Alos vlos the Predicate.

Abler) elvai, <jyr]tri. AESCH.

She saith that she is Justice.

If the Subject needs to be expressed, alro? is used in

the Nominative (in all genders and numbers).

KXe'cov ouk ecf>7j avro<; aXK eicelvov crrpaTrjyelv.

THUC.

Cleon declared that it was not himself but Nihias who

was general.Digitized by Microsoft®

180 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.

vo/Miêre ovv clvtoi elvai <f>povifioi.

You fancy, then, that it is you who are prudent (that

you yourselves are prudent).

The Subject however, o,vt6<;, must never be expressed

unless it is necessary to distinguish it from a Subject in

the Accusative, or to throw a special emphasis on it.

In nine cases out of ten the presence of a Predicate in

the Nominative is sufficient.

Note 1. Instead of a-ui-ds the personal pronouns eyw, cn5

occur (Dem. 52. 12, 9. 74,, Lys. 25. 18), and the reflexive cruets

(Plat. Rep. 518).

Sometimes the accusative is used instead of the nominative(ep.e, fie, ere, e/mvrov, o-eavrov, eavTOv). This construction, moreemphatically than the Infinitive Attraction, marks the Sub-

ject of the Infinitive as the Object of the main verb.

(j>7]fu Seiv Iksivovs ojiro\k(rdo.i, epe Se crdêcrdai. ANDOK. i. 30.

I hold that they ought to be condemned to death, and I be

acquitted.

For other instances see Plat. Gorg. 474, Xen. Cyr. v. 1. 21(epavrov), Herod, i. 34 and ii. 2 (eiavrov).

Note 2. Verbs of hoping and promising (expecting, under-taking, swearing). They usually take the Future Infinitive(like the Latin).

ij\iri£ev pd^rjv e(recr0o.i.

He was expecting that there would be a battle.

vnr&Tôv ravTa fijTijcretv.

You promised to search into this.

But with little or no change of meaning they also take aPresent, or an Aorist Infinitive sometimes, the future timebeing expressed not by the Infinitive, but the principal verb.

e\iri£ei Swarbs eTvai S,p\uv. PLAT.He hopes to be able to rule.

vn-eaxero /xoi BovXeicraxrOai. XEN.He undertook toadvise me.

the person alone is changed, "they say that they them-

selves are witnesses." The tense and mood remain

unchanged.

In an Indirect Statement of Historic Sequence it maybe expressed in either of two ways, both being equally

common :

,i , ( (1) avTot ttacTvpe? elev (Optative)eXeyov &>? < ; n ( ><./'/> /T ... ,. N

I (2) avroi fiaprvpei eicriv (Indicative);

i.e. either the Optative is used, and this is the really

Indirect Statement, or no change is made in the mood in

consequence of the Historic Sequence, the Indicative being

used. This retention of the mood and tense of Direct

Discourse is a well-known practice, pervading all Greek

syntax.

Again, a Direct Statement is, icparqa-opev t5>v ' Adrfvaimv,

we shall beat the Athenians.

The Indirect Statement is

(1) Primary, Xeyovaiv on KpaTiqaovcn tojv AOrjvaiwv,

They say that they will teat the Athenians.

(2) Historic, ekeyov on ( 1. KpaTriaoiev rwv'AdTjvaicov.

They said -l they would beat the Athenians,

that \ 2. KpaTTjaovai ra>v 'Adrjvaiwv.

The two constructions, the Optative and the Indicative,

are often found alternating in the same paragraph.

The rules therefore in passing from the Direct to the

Indirect Statement are :

1. The Person is always changed.

2. The Tense is never changed.

3. The Mood may be changed from the Indicative

to the Optative when the Sequence is Historic,

but constantly the Indicative remains un-

changed^nY

Hi^or^ccr

a|o ^ Primary Sequence.

on AND i>s WITH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 183

In case of a difficulty as to tense and mood, the learner

should practise turning back the Indirect to the original

Direct Statement.Thus in the sentence eroXfia Xe'yetv &>? TrdvTw; tov<;

exOpov? eviKTjirev, he made bold to say that he had conquered

all his enemies, the original Direct was TrdvTas tow?

eftOpovs iviKTjara, I conquered all my enemies. The tense

and mood of the Direct Statement are retained.

Again, ^/ee o ayyeXXmv Tt? to? 'EXareia KaTetXrjTTTai,

there came a messenger announcing that Elateia had been

captured. The messenger said in the Direct, 'EXareia

KaTelXrjTTTai, Elateia has been captured. In the Indirect

therefore the original tense and, in this case, the moodare retained. It might have been KaTetXrjfifie'vr] e'lrj.

\e<yet a><s ovSev e&Tiv aSitcmrepov <f>rjfir]<;. AESCHIN.

He says that there is nothing more unjust than

rumour.

Eecta : ovb~ep eari k.t.X.

Xoyicrdo-dw tovto otc aypiiev vdre IluSvav. DEM.

Let him reflect that we once possessed Pydna.

Eecta : etj(pP' ev /C - T -^"

(ftavepax; elirev oti rj 7roXis T6Tei%iffTai rjSrj. ThuC.

He told them openly that the city had already been

fortified.

Eecta : TeTet%io-T<« k.t.X.

d,7reKpivdfir)p on fioi XvaVTeXoloicnrep s^we^eti'. PLAT.

I answered thatit

wasgood

forme to be exactly as

I am. Eecta : XvatreXel k.t.X.

Kvpo<i eXeyev, on r\ 0S05 eaoiTo vpos fiaaiXea /j,eyav

els BaftvXwva. Xen.

Cyrus told them that the march would be to Babylon

against the great King.

Eecta : eaTai k.t.X.Digitized by Microsoft®

enrev oti o avrjp av aXwaifios €ir\. Xen.

He said that the man might be captured.

The av of course belonged to the Direct. 6 dvrjp

dXmatfws av eirj.

The Indicative and the Optative are sometimes found

in the same paragraph.

eXeyov oti, Kiipo? fiev reOvqicev 'Apialos Se ev t&araOfia eir).

They said that Cyrus was dead, and that Ariaeus

was in the camp.

It might have been reOvrjicws e'lrj and earl.

eiyvto oti eaoiTO nrepi t^? tov 'A\Ki/3td8ov KadoBov

\oyo<!, Kai on 01 'Adrjvatoi evSe^ovTai, avTrjv.

Thuc.He saw that there would be a proposal for the recall

of Alcibiades, and that the Athenians wouldapprove of it.

For eyvm &ti see 3. The Participle in Indirect Discourse, Note 1.

Note 1. on and u>s. <!>s being asubjective particle, i.e. ex-pressing what is in a person's mind, is used, more than on, of

opinions, of pretexts, sometimes of untrue statements, andwith negative expressions, ov Aiyco a> s. <!>s is used rather thanoti after verbs of thinking.

Tio-o-acfiepvrj's Sia/JaAAet tov Kvpov tt/oos tov d8eA<£ov a>s

hrifiovXevoi (ivtQ. Xen. An. i. 3.

Tissaphernes accused. Cyrus to his brother, alleging that hewas plotting against him.

e'Aeyov a>s \P1 fy*"? ei3A.aj3«o-0ai. PLAT. Apol. 1.

They were telling you that you ought to be on your guard(against me).

vo/ii'f ovcriv Ik€i us "H<£aio-Tos x a ^ K<^"- Thuc. iii. 88.The local belief is that Hephaestus is working at his forge.

In Soph. Elect. 43 6Vi is used of an untrue statement.Digitized by Microsoft®

1 86 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.

(both Primary and Historic). The reason of course is that

there is no Optative Imperfect or Pluperfect.

fy<ev ayyeAos Xeyoiv on Tprfpeis rjKove 7rapaTrXeovo~as.Xen. An. i. 2. 21.

There came a messenger saying that he had heard that triremes

were sailing round.,

Direct : t/kovov, I was hearing.

For further rules see Oraiio Obliqua.

Note 5. Verbs and phrases of emotion, Qavp.d(mt

I wonderdyavaKTd), I am indignant ; Setvov iroiovpai, do. ; cfrOovS, Igrudge; alo-xvvopat, I am ashamed; alo-xpov «m (Seivov

ko-ri, it is a shame); pep^o^au, I blame, etc., usually are fol-

lowed not by 6™ but by the conditional el.

roSe edavp.ao~a el iv apexes tiQrfi pepei tyjv dSiKiav.

Plat. Rep. 348.

I was surprised at your setting injustice in the light of a virtue.

8et,vbv TTOiovvTai el pf/ eicrovTai. ThUC.They think it abominable (if) they are not to know.

These phrases also take on, Cf. miror si (mirum si) as well

as miror quod.

§l67.C. THE PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT

DISCOURSE.The Participle is used in Indirect Discourse after Verbs

of Perception (see, perceive, hear, learn, mark, know, remem-

ber) and some others. The usual Negative is ov.

opS, I see. oTSa, I know (o~uvoiSa epavrQ, Ialo-ddvopai, I perceive. am conscious).

&kov(i>,

Ihear. kirio-Tdp.a.i, I know

forcertain.

irw6a.vop.ai, I learn by in- p.epvijpai, I remember.

quiry. eTri.Xav8dvop.ai, I forget,

pavddvd), I learn. yiyvdio-KU), I get to know.

ob E\\r]ve<; ovk tfSeo-av Kvpov redvrjKOTa. Xen.TJie Greeks did not know that Gyrus was dead.

jjSew? a/cova IjWp arou? BiaXeyo/xevov. PLAT.

T love to hear Socrates conversing.Digitized by Microsofmr

THE PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 187

e/jtaVTif fwijSeti' ovBev «rio-Tot/4ev(j). PLAT. Apol. viii.

I was conscious that I knew nothing for certain.

ovre fikya, ovre crfiiKpov £vvoi8a ifiavraj cro^os &v.Plat. Apol. vi.

I am conscious that in no degree, great or small, am I wise.

The rales about the Subject and the Predicate of the

Infinitive equally apply to the Participle.

ewpcov ov tcaTopOovvres. THUC.

They saw that they were not succeeding.

at<r8avofie6a yeXoloi 6i>Te?. Plat.

We perceive that we are ridiculous.

Note 1. The Indicative (and Optative) with 6Vt and <Ls are,

however, often used with Verbs of Knowing, especially yiy-

v&ctku), and 018a (ur&' OTl).

eyvco on ol 'AOrjvaioi ovSev evSuxrovo-iv. THUC.He saw that the Athenians would not give in at all.

Note 2. If the Principal Verb itself is a Verb of Perception

the Indirect Sentence will be in the Infinitive to avoid the

clumsiness of two participles close together, if both Participles

refer to the same person.

alo-86/i.evos ovk av jreiflav avrovs. THUC.Perceiving that he should not convince them.

alo-66/j.evos ovk dv vdduv would have been intolerable.

Note 3. dyyeAAw, I report, sometimes takes a Participle.

irpwTOS /3a<7tAet KCpov kirijiovXcvovra rjyytiXa, XEN.I first reported to the Icing that C. was plotting against him.

ofioXoylo, I agree,assent ,•

e£e\eyx<»,eiriSeiKw/ju,

Ipoint out

(see Eule), may almost be regarded as verbs of statement.

These take a Participle.

Note i. The remarks made about dv with the Infinitive

apply equally to the Participle.

Note 5. The Tenses of the Participle in Indirect Discourse

represent the Corresponding Tenses of Jjjdirect Discourse, and

therefore the time which they denote.Digitized by Microsoft®



SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.

§ l68. THE INDIRECT QUESTION.

The Indirect Question may be regarded as the Indirect

Statement put interrogatively. All the rules given as to

person, tense, and mood for the Indirect Statement apply

equally to the Indirect Question. The Subjunctive mustnever be used, as in Latin, in an ordinary Indirect Ques-

tion. (See Deliberative Questions.)

The Negative is ov.

For the Interrogative Pronouns and Adverbs see Pro-

nouns. Their Indirect (or Eelative) forms are used in

Indirect Questions, but it is just as common to use the

Direct Forms. El, like the English */, is the regular

indirect interrogative, meaning whether (in a single ques-

tion=Lat. num).

Direct rk earl

Who is he I

Indirect Primary : ovk olBa oorts (or r/s) earl.

I do not know who he is.

2. CfTf,eari.

I did not know who he was.

Direct ravra erroitjaa'; ;

Bid you do it 1

Indirect Primary : epmra avrov ei ravra errolnaev.

He asks him if he did it.

Indirect Historic : rtpwrnaev avrov \'

,'TavTa '"'oiTiaeiev.

( 2. ei ravra eirotrjaev.

He asked him if lie had done it.

b,ri rreirovOare ovk olBa. PLAT.

What you have felt I know not.

Digitizeaby Microsoft®

THE INDIRECT QUESTION.

epcoraxTiv et "Kijarai eiatv. THUC.

They ask them if they are pirates.

Eecta : \rjo-rat, eerre ;

tore oios r\v o Xaipecfiwv. Plat.

You know what sort of a man Chaerephon was.

Eecta : oto<; rjv ;

SirjpatTWv av avTOVS ti \eyoiev. PLAT.

/ used to ask them what they meant.Eecta : ti \eyeTe ;

ijpeTO, el Tts 6t7; efiov <7o<f)a>Tepos. PlAT'.

He asked if there was anybody wiser than I.

Eecta : eari, t«s ;

fjtropovv ti, 7TOT6\eyei

6 0eo?. PLAT.

T was at a loss to understand what the god meant.

Eecta : ti irore Xeyet

e/3ov\evovTo nva KaTakevtyovaiv. DEM.

They were considering whom they should leave behind.

Eecta : ti va KaTaXetifrofiev ;

rjpanwv avTov et, avaifKevcreiev. DEM.

i" was asking him if he had set sail.

Eecta : ai/eVXevcra? ; did you set sail ?

Observe in examples 6 and 7 that the Historic

Sequence is disregarded.

Good examples will be found in Soph. El. 32, 679, 974,

1348, Ai. 557, Ant. 239, 1190.

If the Direct uses the Imperfect Indicative, e.g. n's fy o

p.v9os ; what was the tale ? the Indicative will be retained in

Indirect Historic for reasons explained on p. 182. It wouldbecome eTirov Sorts rjv 6 fivdos. itirov Sorts sir) 6 fiv0os wouldrepresent a Direct tis kttiv 6 /ivOos ; See a good instance in

Soph. Ant. 239.Digitized by Microsoft®

,

§ 169. DELIBERATIVE OR DUBITATIVEINDIRECT QUESTIONS.

These questions, when Indirect, are in the Subjunctive

(Primary or Historic Time), or the Optative (Historic

Time).

The Subjunctive is retained in the Indirect because it

was the mood of the Direct.

Direct ': tI <f>a>

What am I to say?

Indirect Primary : ovk e^co o,ti (rt) (f>a.

I know not what 1 am to say.

Non habeo quid dicam.

Indirect Historic : ovk elyov \' „' T ;'/,„'

/V( 2. 0,TI (Tl) p(U.

I knew not what I was to say.

Eon habebam quid dicerem.

ovk e%a>, 07j-<»? aoi eeirw a vow. PLAT.

/ don't know how I am to tell you my thoughts.

Direct : 7r<»s croi eiirca ;

rjiropeb b ti %prjcrai,To t&> Trpayfiart. Xen.

He was at a loss to know how to deal with the question.

Direct : ti xp7]o-co/x,ai

ejrr\povTO etKopivBioK irapaholev

tt\vttoKlv. ThuC.

They asked whether they were to deliver over the city

to the Corinthians.

Direct : -rrapaSaifiev ;

rjiropwaav birr] KaOopfiicrcovTai. THUC.

They were at a loss where to come to anchor.

Direct : irrj Kadopuiawueda ;Qigitized by Microsoft®

THE INDIRECT PETITION. 191

to, Se eKirw/tara ovk 018' ei toi5t^> 85. XEN. Cyr. viii. 4. 16.

/ aW£ foww whether I am to #we the cups to this man.

Obs. el with Subjunctive, and see Note.eA.eyes on ow av e^oii e£e\.0iav o,ti x/)$o o r <*vr$.

Plat. Oil iv.

Pom were saying that if you escaped you would not know whatto do with yourself.

!/3ovA.£iWto e'ire ko.to.ko.v(tu><71v etre Tt aAAo xprj&mvTai.

Thuc. ii. 4, 6.

TAey were deliberating whether they should burn the men todeath, or do something else to them.

Observe the eire —eiVe with the Subjunctive again.

§ 170. THE INDIRECT PETITION.

The Indirect Petition (a command, a request, or a

prayer) follows verbs of commanding, requesting, praying,

advising, and the like.

efarav, I bade or ordered ayyeKkm, I bid.

(irpoel-irov). Trapaicak5>, I exhort.

iceXevco, I order. dljia>, I request, call upon,

SiaKe\evofx,ai, I order, ex- expect.

port, direct. irapaivco, I advise.

TrapccyiyeWco, I order, in- cnrayopeva), I forbid.

struct.

All these take the Infinitive, which is the commonGreek construction for the Indirect Petition. The Nega-

tive is firj.

The difference between the Greek and Latin construc-

tions here should be carefully noted.

elirov tc3 Uavaavia rov Kr\pvico<; /mtj XenrecrOai.

Thuc.

They ordered Pausanias not to leave the herald.

1 d is interrogative as well as conditional, and so goes with the Sub-junctive as well as with the Optative. 'Edit (fy) is not interrogative

where it appears to be so, as in a few phrases with <ri<6irei (e.g. ovcixeii&r <roi doKia eS \iyuv). /^fegfgW^c^o^g but Vvirchance (si forte)

eiceXevo-e tovs "EXXrjva? et? fia-XV 1 ' Ta^drjvai. XEN.

He ordered the Greeks to be drawn up for battle.

Seo/Mai v/j,a>v avyyvafirjv /jloi e%eiv. PLAT.

I beg you to pardon me.

irapatvovftev croi iretOecrOai rot? j3eXTt,o<ri.

We urge (advise) you to listen to your betters.

a%i5> o-e aki]dri Xeyeiv. ANTIPHON.

I call upon (require) you to tell the truth.

The Subject or Predicate will be in the Nominative if

necessary, as in the Indirect Statement :

IIpo//,r]0ea irapaiTelTai Ewi/ATjOevs avro^ veifiai.

Plat.

Epimetheus begs Prometheus that he himself may

distribute.

("Let me distribute/' says Epimetheus.)

For verbs of forbidding see Index.

Note 1. Some of these verbs take ottws (Situs pvq) with the

Future Indicative and Optative. iia.KeXevop.ai, irapaKaXS, Iexhort ; dyyeXXw, irapayyeXXia, I tell, order ; airayopevw, I for-

bid ; irpoetirov, I proclaimed, ordained; d£i<o, I beg, call upon.

Sia.KeXtvovTO.1 oitojs Tifiu>pr)<Terai iravras tous tolovtovs.

Plat. Rep. viii. 549, e.

They exhort him to take revenge on all such people.

Keiv(p 8' epvtjv dyyeiAar 1 evToXfjv oitojs

tov jraiSa S«'£ei. SOPH. Ai. 567.

And bear to him my message that he show the boy.

d-irtjyopeve's 6Va>9 p.r) toSto aTTOKpivoip/qv.

Plat. Rep. i. 339, a.

You told me not to give this answer.

O7rcos /xijSei' l/oa after past tense in Rep. i. 337, E.

For the Construction of ojtos, oirms /tij, see Final Sentences, etc.

CHAPTEK II.

§ 171. THE PAKTICLE "Kv.

"Av (and the Epic kcv, kI, Doric «<£) were originally Demon-strative Adverbs meaning there, then, so, in that case, perchance,possibly, contingently. They were Adverbs qualifying the Posi-tive Statement of the Verb. This part of the subject belongs

to Philology rather than Syntax.

"Av in Attic Greek may be regarded as having practi-

cally two distinct uses.

1. It is joined to Verbs, the Indicative (Historic Tenses),

Optative, Infinitive, and Participle. It denotes a Con-

dition on which the fulfilment of the verbal actiondepends.

2. It is joined to Pronouns and Particles with the

Subjunctive Mood. Such are 0?, oo-rt? (6? av, octtk; av)

ore, eirei, eirettxr], irpiv, ews, etc. (prav, eirav, eireibav, irpw

av, e&>? av) : the Conditional el {lav, r)v) : sometimes the

Pinal &>?, 07T(»9, ocfipa (ta? av, etc.). In this use av (but

not in Final Sentences) makes the meaning of the Pronoun

and Particle indefinite, who-sp-ever, when-so-ever, if ever (in

one very common use of lav), though this meaning cannot

always be expressed. When Historic Sequence requires

a change from the Subjunctive to the Optative av must

be dropped, e.g. 6? av Bovkmrat but 6? Bovkono.rr * Digitized by Microsoft® r



194 THE PARTICLE &v.

§ 172. DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE

SENTENCES.

Before dealing with Eelative, Conditional, and Temporal

Sentences it is most important to understand the difference

between a Definite and an Indefinite Sentence.

In the Sentence ravra a fiovKovrat, e^ovai, tlwy have

those things which they want, the antecedent rama is

definite {those particular and known things), and the

Eelative Sentence which follows refers to a definite act.

But in the Sentence a av fiovXavrai e%ovaiv, the Ante-

cedent is indefinite and the act is virtually Conditional

they have whatsoever things they want, anything they want,

anything if they want it. This second sentence in Historic

Sequence becomes a /3ov\oivto el%ov. Similarly in the

sentence e7retS?7 Se o\t,yap%ia eyevero ol rpiaKovra fiere-

•jre/ityavrd fie, when an oligarchy was established the Thirty

Tyrants sent for me, Socrates is speaking of a definite

time (b.c. 404) and of a definite act. But eire&dv oTuy-

apyla yivi)-rai, whenever, or as often as, an oligarchy shall

he established, or is established, an indefinite time and act is

spoken of. The sentence is virtually conditional again,

if ever, or if at any time, etc., and might be expressed

thus, idv irore yevijrai. In Historic Sequence the sen-

tence would be 67T6iSrj yevoiro.

It will be seen therefore that when the Antecedent is

definite the Indicative is used ; where indefinite, the

Subjunctive with dv, or the Optative without av

e.g. o\k elSev eirr)veae, those whom he saw he praised.

ob? av iSr) eiraivel, whomsoever he sees he praises.

01/9 tSot stto vet,, whomsoever he saw he used to praise.' Digitized by Microsoft®

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 195

Note. Further instances of

1. Definite sentences.

Kvpov /MTCure/ttreTCii otto ttjs apx*)S> ^s avrbv o-aTpdirrjv

67TOirjO-£. XEN.He sends for Cyrus from the province of which he had made

Mmgovernor.

«?<os egecrriv ravra vp.iv emScif^ai deXca. PlAT.While it is permitted I desire to explain this to you.

eTroXiopKCL tous "EXXrjvas /«x/h oS ^rjpdvas rrjv SiWjOuva

ecXe rrjv vrjaov. ThUC.He was blockading the Greeks until he drained the ditch and

took the island.

2. Indefinite sentences.

H£eori 6Vt av /3ovXrjrai sinew. ANTIPH.He may say whatever (or anything) he likes.

p-^XP1 ^' °"

v fy® ^ Kf o, at a~irovSal pevovriov. XEN.Until I return let the armistice be observed.

ecus irep av ip,irve<a ov p.r) Tra.vcruyp.ai (pi.Xocro(t>wv. PLAT.So long as I breathe I will never give up philosophy.

KaTecrrrjcra &e kTriptXtirrdai citi Scot T<j> x°PV ^avocrTparov.

Antiph.I appointed Phanostratus to provide whatever the chorus

required.

§ 173. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.

A Compound Conditional Clause consists of two

Correlative sentences, one of which contains the Con-

dition, and is called the Protasis ;* the other contains the

1 Protasis (irpdraais) means Premiss. Apodosis (iiridocris) meansConsequence. The Apodosis is tile Principal, the Protasis the Sub-ordinate Sentence. Whether originally a clause with el was a Sub-ordinate Sentence, is a point which need not be discussed in AtticSyntax. How far the Apodosis, as being the Principal Sentence,

influences the construction of the Protasis-, is an interesting question,

which is alluded to under the Oratio Obliqua. Professor Goodwin(Journhl

ofPhilology, viii. 15, p. 33) strongly maintains the assimi-

lating force exerted by the principal verb on the subordinate verb,6Digitfced by Microsoft®



ig6 THE PARTICLE S».

Consequence, and is called the Apodosis. Sucn a clause

reduced to its simplest form may be thus expressed :

If A is B, C is D,

or C is I), if A is B

i.e. the fulfilment or truth of the Consequence depends

on the fulfilment or truth of the Condition. This depen-

dence of the Consequence (the Apodosis) on the Condi-

tion (the Protasis) is the essential point of aconditional

clause.

§ 174. DISTINCTION OF CONDITIONS.

I. The most obvious distinction of Conditions is that of

Time. Some refer to the present, others to the past, others

to the future. This distinction is universally present in all

Conditions.

II. A second distinction concerns the opinion implied as to

the fulfilment or non-fulfilment of the Condition. In twoforms, and two forms only, the expression in itself conveysinformation on this point. 1

III. A third distinction is that between Particular andGeneral Conditions. A Particular Condition refers to adefinite act or set of acts : e.g. " If the windows up-stairs are

1 There is, as Professor Goodwin tells us, no special form implyingthat the condition is or was fulfilled. That is to be decided by thecontext. This is true, though of course a fact may be clearly implied,and in some cases narrated. Such is the case chiefly in past GeneralSuppositions, e.g. et tis Avreliroi, eiBtis ireBrficei, Thuc. viii.

66, which isthe same as saying, "Every one who spoke against them was at oncegot rid of." A General Supposition may also be expressed in anOrdinary Past form. Thus, d ti fiXXo linidvSwov tytveTo avivrwuliertaxopev, Thug, iii. 54, which is only a way of saying, "We tookpart in every danger as it arose." Indeed a fact is narrated hereunder a, conditional form, though not by virtue of the form itself,which need only denote a connexion between Condition and Conse-qnence. With regard to General Suppositions in present time, theymay refer to facts, but usually are generalisations from observed facts

or habits.


DIVISION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 197

open, the rain is coming in;" "If you receive a telegramsend it on to me;" " If he had a five-pound note he would

lend it me." A General Condition refers to any act whichmay occur or have occurred any number of times : "If ever

a candidate is convicted of bribery he loses his seat;" "If

(ever) he were left to himself he used to waste his time;"" If (ever) he had a shilling in his pocket he gave it to the

first beggar he met.

§ 175. DIVISION OF CONDITIONALSENTENCES.

Conditional Sentences accordingly may be divided into :

I. Ordinary Conditions ; II. General or Frequentative Condi-

tions. Ordinary Conditions again may be subdivided into

A., those with regard to which no opinion is expressedwhether the Condition is fulfilled or unfulfilled, probable 01

improbable, true or false ; B., those in which the form oi

expression implies that the Condition is unfulfilled. There is

no form to express an opinion that the Condition is fulfilled.

The context alone could suggest this. In General Conditions

again no opinion is expressed concerning the fulfilment or

non-fulfilment of the Condition. Thus in Ordinary Conditions

of the second class alone is any such opinion expressed.

§ I76. ORDINARY CONDITIONS.

For Real Examples see further on.

A. All that is stated is that a Consequence did, does,

or will follow from a Condition. The expression in itself

does not tell us whether the condition was, is, or will be

fulfilled. That is beside the question : the stress is

wholly on the if. The sole difference between the three

forms (1, 2, 3) is <m§it8Utipftncrosoft®

rgS THE PARTICLE &v;

1. Present. 1

Any Primary Tense of the Indicative.

ei ravTa Troieis aSi/ceis.

If you do this (strictly you are doing wrong,

if you are doing this)

2. Past.

Any Historic Tense of the Indicative.

, „ f ewolets rjSitceis.et ravra i > / > ?. /

^ 67TOM7t7as rjdiK7]cra<;.

( were doing this you were doing wrong.

^ y \ did this you did wrong (aorist, a

single act).

3. Future.

To express a Condition in future time there are threeforms, differing, but differing only, in distinctness of ex-

pression.

(a) The ordinary future form.

eav ynv) ravra < , > aot/cncret?.^ iroii]<Tr)<; )

If you do this (strictly you will do wrong.if t/ou shall do this)

1 There are endless varieties of present and past conditions, and thetwo are constantly combined. Present and future may be combined.

el ravra ire7ro(i)KOS aSuteTs, ^5/fci]Kas.

If you have done this you are doing wrong, you have donewrong (the Apodosis might be anImperative).

el ravra SoKei trot irKe'ojfiev.

If you think so let us set sail,

el ravra iroiels dXy^treis.

If you are doing this you will be sorry.

ei ravra iwoleis or ^7roh)tras ASiKels or dSt/fi}<reis.

If you were doing, or did this you are doing, will do, wrong.And so on.

" It is hoped that no difficulty will arise from the selection of the

verb d8i/tfi in these special examples. 'ASikw, of course, means, I aman Minos, a wrong doerf^^go^ fafflgmi)™ injure.

THE PARTICLE &v.

§ 177. Ordinary Conditions in Greek and Latin.

A.Protasis.

1. Present.

2. Past.

« TOLVTO, TTOIUS

Si haec facis

el ravra 7r«rot7jKas.

Si haec fecisti.

, „ f CTT0(£1Set raura < . /

[ 67ro«jo-as

a- 1 \ faciebasSt haec j

J^,-„ IA

3. Future, (a) e&v (fiv) ravra { ™fr I

/Si haecfeceris (int. perf.)

,,> , - ( iroioins(0) a rawa < ,

'

N '

I

7roiij<7eias

S« haec facias

(c) a raCiTa irotijcreis

#1 Aaec fades

B.1. PRESENT (or el ravra eiroieis

Continued Past).

Si haec faceres

2. PAST. el ravra eiroiijcras

Si haec fecisses

Apodosis.

d8lK£?S.

iniuste facis. 1

rj&bKeis.

rjSlicqo-as.iniuste faciebas.

iniuste fecisti.

dSi/ojcras.

iniuste fades.

aSutoii)? av.

d8iK7jcreta9 av.

iniuste facias.

d.8iKr]<rei ls.

iniuste fades.

3 «' »jjoiK£is av.

iniuste faceres.

ijSiKiytras av.

iniuste fecisses.

II.

§ 178. GENERAL OR FREQUENTATIVECONDITIONS.

These are best taught by real examples. Observe the

Apodoses, distinguishing these uses of the Subjunctive

1 The normal Latin equivalents of the Latin of Ciceko, Caesar,and Sallust are here given. The variety of Latin forms is far greaterthan the Greek, and varies more according to the period of the writer.

The above are given only as a guidein

comparing the two languages,not as an attempt at a full division of the Lfttin Conditional Sentences.

NEGATIVES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES, zoi

and Optative (in the Protasis) from their uses in Ordinary-

Conditions. In the Apodosis any frequentative tense

denoting respectively present and past time may beemployed.

1. Pkesent (a generalisation true now or for any future

occasion).

avrjp -7rovr)po<; SvaTV^el, kolv evTvxfj. MENAND.A bad man is in evil state,

Even if he e'er is fortunate.

2. Past.

et rt? avrenrot, evBvi eredvrjKet. ThuC.

If ever any one spoke against them he was promptly

put to death,

eredvrjicei is, of course, a virtual Imperfect.

§ 179. THE NEGATIVES IN CONDITIONALSENTENCES.

The Negative of a Protasis is /M7, of an Apodosis ov.

ei fir; ravra Troiel? ovk koXox; e%et.

If you are not doing this it is not well.

For exceptions see the chapter on the Negatives.

Relative Conditional Sentences.

Real Examples are given further on.

As has been explained, a Relative Sentence with an In-

definite Antecedent is equivalent to a Conditional Sentence.

Any form of the Protasis with el or lav may be expressed

by a Relative Sentence. Both 6's and 00-74? are used, butoo-Tis, as being the indefinite form, is preferred, especially in

affirmative sentences. In negative sentences /iij is sufficient

to show that the Relative is indefinite.Digitized by Microsoft®



202 THE PARTICLE S.v.

A.Protasis.

1. Present. a (a nva) fya= 6? ri e\ei.

2. Past. S. (3. two.) [ ll *-

ev

3. Future, (a) 8, (a nva) &v e'x27

= edv ti exV-

(b) a (a nva) e'x"'

= €i ri ex°i.

(c) a (a Ttva) f£et

= « Tt e£ei.

B.

1. Present a (a nva) e?^6i/

(or Impf. Past).

2. Past. a (a nva) ot^v

Apodosis.

POSITION OF S.v. 203

Note. The present participle alone is given (except in B.

2). Of course the aorist participle, denoting a single as

opposed to a continued act, may be used in any of the forms,

tvhile the present participle denotes an imperfect act {i.e. anact in progress).

§ l8l. Position of av.

av of an Apodosis can never begin a sentence. Its natural

position is after its verb, but, as it possesses a power of

emphasising the word it follows, it often comes before the

verb and after some word which is to be emphasised. Almostany word may be so emphasised, especially an interrogative or

a negative.

ovk av e^oi/xi y' ei7refv on oi Trpoo~ei~xov tov vovv. PLAT.

I could not say that I was not attentive.

tt(3s av rts, a ye pA) erritrrano, ravra cro<f>6s eirj ; XEN.How could a man be wise in matters of which he knew nothing

certainly ?

ttoXXy] av T6S eiSaipovia euy Trepl toi>s vkovs.

Plat. Apol. xii.

Great would be the good fortune in the case of the young,

ap oSv av jj.e. oi&rde TotraSe cttj Siayevecrdai.

Plat. Apol. xxlThink you then that I should have lived all these years ?

av belongs to Siayevecrdat.

kirieiKr) av fioi SokQ irpbs tovtov Aeyeiv. PLAT. Apol. xxiii.

/ think I should be adopting a conciliatory tone towards him.

av belongs to Aiyeiv and emphasises «rieiKrj.

As in the last two examples av when separated from its

verb often comes near oiofiai, Sokw, 4>t}/xl, oTSa, so much so as

to look as if it belonged to them. But we must be careful

to connect the av with its proper verb, ovk 018a av el, or ovk

av otSa el for ovk otSa el —av should be especially noticed, e.g.

ovk olS' av el jrei'crai/u (Eur. Med.), I know not whether I should

persuade him, where av belongs to Trelo-aifii.

§ 182. Repetition of av.

"Av is often used more than once in the same sentence. For

this repetition there may be two reasons.Digitized by Microsoft®




1. In a long paragraph, which is complicated by interrupt-

ing clauses, av occurs at the beginning. It thus strikes thekeynote

of the whole so to speak, and gives warning that thewhole coming statement is conditional. It occurs again later

on near the verb.

2. It may be repeated, more than once, even in a short

sentence, if any special word is to be emphasised.

Examples.I. In long paragraphs

vjxus 8' «t(us Tax' av dyOofievoi, Sxrirep ol vwTafovTEseyeipopevoi, Kpovvavrvs av p.e, ire.iQd[x.e.voi 'Kvirif, paSicus

av dTTOKTelvaire. PLAT. Apol. xviii.

But you very possibly in annoyance, just like people when they

are being roused from a nap, might listen to Anytus, and,

with a tap, put me to death, and think nothing more of it.

N.B. —Tax"., perhaps, often attaches an av to itself.

In Plat. Apol. xxxii., a good instance. The sentence beginswith eyw yap av otp.ai —then seven lines later on ot/mi av

recurs, followed by av evpetv, (all the av's belonging to evpeiv).

II. For emphasis

ovk av cwroSooyv oij8' av o/3oA.ov ovSevi. ARIST. Nub. 118.

I'll not give —no not a copper to any man.

ti Srjr' av (is Ik twvS' av ti^icAot/tt ere ; SOPH. Ai. 536.

How then, knowing what has happened, could I assist thee 1

ovt' av KeXevcrai/i' out' av, el OeXois enTrpacrcreLV, ep,ov y av ijSews Sp(pr)s fj.era. SOPH. Ant. 69.

I would not urge thee, no I nor shouldst thou nowDesire to help me, would I have thy help.

Good instances occur in Soph. Ant. 466, 680, 884; Aesch.Persae, 431.

§ 183-¥Av with Future Indicative.

"Av with the Future Indicative, Infinitive, and Participle.

Many critics have maintained that this construction doesnot occur in Attic Greek. Many instances have beenremoved by revision of texts. Mr. Riddell {Apology, p. "7,

and Digest, p. 139) regards the construction as abundanclyestablished, and cites, seven imitancesfrom Plato, e.g. Rep.



ELLIPSE OF THE APODOSIS, ETC. 205

615 d, ovx r/K«, ovS' av r/£a Sevpo. Other cases are Apol.

xvii., ,Leg- 719 E, Symp. 222 A, etc. Also Xen. An. ii.

5. 13, av KoXatrecrde. In Phaedr. 227 B, ovk av o'iu [i(.

iroirprtvOai. In Onto. XV., ovk oiei av (fraveicrOai., av withthe future infinitive occurs, av occurs with the future parti-

ciple in Plat. Apol. xvii. (end of chapter), ovk b\v Trot^aovros.

Madvig denies, Kriiger defends, the existence of this last

construction.

§ 184. Ellipse of the Apodosis, and Ellipse of

the Verb.

"Av of an Apodosis is sometimes found without its verb.

The verb however (an Indicative or an Optative) may beeasily supplied from the context.

oi 8' oiKiTai peyKovcriv dA/V ovk av irpb tov. Ar. Nub. 5.

The domestics are snorting, but they wouldn't (have been doing

so) once, ovk av (sc. eppeyKov).

Where two verbs are connected or opposed, it is enough to

use of once only, with the first, unless some lengthy com-plication of clause renders it necessary for the sake of clear-

ness to repeat it, or unless some word is to be emphasised.

ovSets av rjv 0-01 6s i/J-ov KaTe/x,apTvpi)o-ev (sc. av).

Antiph. Her. 15.

You would have found no one who would liave given evidence

against me.

ti eiroirjo-ev av ; yj 8r)\.ov oti &p.oaev (sc. av) ; DEM. 31. 9.

What would he have done i Is it not clear that he would have

taken an oath ?

§ 185. Ellipse of the Protasis.

Sometimes the Protasis, as in all languages, is whollyomitted. It can be easily supplied from the context.

ovSei/ yap av ifiXafS-qv (sc. ei €Tt/f)jo-ajinjr, from what haspreceded). Pl. Apol. xxviii.

I should liave received no harm (had I done so and so).

irav yap av Kareipydcrw. SOPH. El. 1022.• So had-A thou compassed all (sc. el toioSc fjo-9a), supplied

from a preceding wish.Digitized by Microsoft®

At IN AP0D0S1S. ao7

d roivvv touto l(T\vpov tfv av tovt(s> rtKp/qpiov, Kajxoi yevktrdm

TeKixqpiov. Observe the Apodosis in the Imperative : if this wouldhave been strong evidence for him (i.e. if he had been able to adduce

it), let it be evidence for me too. Here, as Professor Goodwin ex-

plains (p. 101), the Protasis means : if it is true that tMs wouldhave been, so that reference is really to the present, and only to

the past so far as the unexpressed Protasis requires. Dem. de

Cor. 260. 2, is another instance if d emxdp-qo-' av is read ; only

the Apodosis which follows is ti's ovk av airkKreivt ;

Note. There is no difficulty in connecting an Apodosis with

more than one Protasis referring to different times, e.g. Dem.de Cor. 274. 28, tirev^o/iat Tracrt tovtois, d dkrjdrj irpbs v/ias

cwroi/n kgu eiWov, I pray to all these, if I should speak, and did

speak the truth before you.

§ 187. Ae in Apodosis.

8k sometimes introduces an Apodosis as if it were co-

ordinate with, or followed, the Protasis. This is instructive

as showing that the logical importance of the subordinate

sentence (Protasis) may assert itself over the grammatical

importance of the Principal Sentence (the Apodosis), Suchcases, however, are very rare in Attic.

el oSv kyio yiyvwo-KO) pyfjTe ra ocria jJ^re to. StKaia, ii^ets Se

- 8i8a£aTe p.€. Xen. Hell. iv. 1. 33.

If therefore I know neither what is holy nor what is just, do

you then teach me.

Cf. Soph. 0. T. 1267 ; Suva S' fjv.

§ 188. idv seemingly Interrogative.

d is interrogative as well as conditional, but kkv is only

conditional, and must not be used in Indirect Questions.

Where it appears to be interrogative, as in two places cited

by Liddell and Scott, it comes after <tk6ttu or o-Kkfai, and

clearly means, "if by chance," e.g. Xen. Mem. iv. 4. 12.

o-K&f/ai, eav rdSe o-oi fiaWov dpko-Ky, consider if perchance you

like this better (si forte tibi placuerit).Digitized by Microsoft®

208 THE PARTICLE Sv.

§ 189- o.v with Participle seemingly in Protasis.

A Participle with av must always be in Apodosis. But

sometimes examination and explanation are necessary.

7r6XX' av e)(wv e'artlv, crtyto.

Though I have much to say, yet I hold my tongue.

e\(av is a concessive participle, and is itself an apodosis,

the sentence being equal to ex°'M' " v (" PovXoifi-qv), a-iyla 8e

(or ey£> osjre/D ttoXX' av c'xot/u). av emphasises 7roXXd.

o~v8ds r' av ovk av aXyvvais irXiov. SOPH. 0. T. 446.

If thou speed hence thou wouldst not vex me more.

Here <rv9ek is itself the Protasis followed by av, whichreally belongs to aXyvvais.

'fctXimros IIoTiSataj/ eXi)v Kal Swr/deli av awos ^X elv > €t

ifiovXTjO'i], 'OXvvOiovs 7rapeSu>K€v. DEM. 23. 107.

P. after taking Potidaea, and though he might, if he hadwished, have kept it himself, yet handed it over to the

Olynthians.

8wr)dels av is the Apodosis (rfivvqdr) av —d IfiovXijOrf), the

participle having a concessive force.

§ 190. Conditional Particles and their

combinations.

1.

dSe

fx-q, ifnot, sin minus, sin aliter,

has become sostereotyped a phrase, that it is used where idv Se prj wouldbe more correct.

eaj' <£aiv)}T0U Si/caiov, Trnpil>p.t6a. d Se p,-q kS>p.ev.

Plat. Crito ix.

If it appears right, let us make the attempt; but if not, let usabandon it.

2. lav, d, meaning " if haply " (" in case," " in the event of,"" in hope that," " thinking that "). It contains sometimes avirtual oratio obliqua (i.e. the thought of the subject). Cf. si

forte in Latin.

'diiova-ov Kal ipov, kdv croi, Tavra Sonrj. PLAT. Rep. 358.Hear me too, in case you may agree.

jrpos T^v iroXiv, d i7Tif$OT)0oiev, «x(upow. Thuc. vi. 100.They were marching on the city, on the chance of the citizens

advancing against them (thinking that they might, etc.).



EXAMPLES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 209(.

3. &o~irep av el : also written ito-irepavit. The phraseis compressed from &o-irep dv (Apodosis) el (Protasis), e.g.

&a~irep av el euroi (Plat. Apol. ix.), just as if he were to say,

SxjTrep dv ttoiolto el eisiroi.

4. ?raJs yap dv ; (sc. ei-q), with a Protasis (el with Optative)

omitted. How would it be, if it were so ? Hpw is it possible 1

How so?

5. Kav el : vvv p.01 80/cet kw dtrefleiav el Karayiyvdo-Koi tis

MeiStov to, irpoo-rJKOVTa iroieiv. DEM. 21. 51 = /cat av iroielv —£i KaTayiyvwTKoi. But Kav el comes to be used for the simple

koX el, even if.

6. Kav=KaJ lav.

§ 191. Examples of Conditional Sentences.

(1) Ordinary Present Conditions. (2) Ordinary Past Con-ditions. (3) Present and Past in combination. See

§ 177 A, 1 and 2.

Observe that the condition may be general as well as

particular.

1. Present :

ei Tt xf/evSofiaie£ecrriv e£e\ey£ai fie.

ANTIPH. deCher. 14.

If I am making any false statements, you may confute me.

el Oeol ri Spwaiv altrxpov, ovk elo-lv Qeol.

Eurip. Bell. Frag. 294.

If the gods do aught immoral they are no gods.

el oSv toiovtov 6 ddvaros etni, nepSos eyiaye Xeya.

Plat. Apol. xxxiii.

If therefore death is such a state as this, I for my part count

it gain.

2. Past:—el d-Troo-Trjvai 'Adr/vaCwv ovk rjOeX^rrafiev, ovk rjSiKov/iev.

Thuc. iii. 55.

If we refused to desert the Athenians, we were doing no wrong.

ovk because ovk l0eAa>=no!o.Digitized by Microsoft®

THE PARTICLE Sv.

el /J.ev 'AvKXrpribs deov rjv, ovk tfv alo-)(p0Kep8r)s, el 8'

alo-xpoKepSrjS, °'" K V v Geov. PLAT. Rep. iii. 408 C.

IfAsclepius toas the son

ofa god, he was not covetous ; if he

was covetous, he was not the son of a god.

el ti aXXo eyevero evriKivSwov, TravTUHv irapb. Svvap.iv

lx.eTia-xojJ.ev. ThUC. iii. 54.

If any other danger arose, we took our share in all beyond

ow strength.

(3.) <f>pa£eTe ofiv aAAijAois el TrdmoTe ti -qKoixre tis.Plat. Apol. iii.

Explain then one to another, if at any time any one heard

anything.

et irov Tt eirpa^a toiovtos cfravoup.ai. PLAT. Apol. xxi.

If ever I engaged in any business, I shall be found to be such

as I have described myself.

el Se Suo e£ Ivos dytovos yeyevrjO-Oov ovk eyio dtnos.

Antiph. de caed. Herod. 84.

If two trials have been made out of one (or instead of one), it

is not my fault.

§ 192. Ordinary Future Conditions.

See § 177 A, 3 (a).

Protasis edv (fjv, av) with the Subjunctive.

rjv dva.Trei<T(0 tovtovi, o-taO-qtroiiai. AfilST. Nub. 77.

If I (shall) persuade this person here, I shall escape.

edv ep.ol iretdrjo-de, (f>elcreo-8e p.ov. PLAT. Apol. xviii.

If you are (will be) persuaded, by me, you will spare me.

eav ep.e aTroKTeivrjTe, ovk ep.e p.et£o) /jAd^ere rj vp.as avrovs.

, Plat. Apol.

If you put me to death, you will inflict no greater injury onme than on yourselves.

kou ira.18', edvTiep Sevp' ep.ov irpoo-dev p-oXr/,

imprjyopeiTe. AeSCH. Pers. 529.

And for my son, if he return before me,Comfort ye him.

ORDINARY FUTURE CONDITIONS. 211

SiSaitr" IkuvK-rtivciv eavrbv, rpi rdSe ipevcrOy keytav.

Soph. Phil. 1342.Freely he offers himself

To the death if, speaking thus, he lie.

SiSoyari, he offers, practically means, he says that he mil, is

ready, and thus implies a future.

irapa tov dyadov deov, av Beos WeXy, avriKa Ire'ov. PLAT./ must go at once, to the good God, if God mil.

10. kovk av ye Xi^aip! eir' dyaOouri erots KaKa.

Ar. fjv psf) ye <f>evya)v ii«pvyr)S 7rpbs aldepa.

Eur. Phoen. 1215.

Yea, and I would not speak of ill close on thy happiness.

Yea, but thou shall, unless thou escape m thy flight to the

firmament.

Cf. Eur. Orest. 1593.

N.B. —A physical impossibility is here spoken of. Observethat it follows an Apodosis with Optative and av : fp/ withthe Subjunctive realises vividly the impossibility of the

situation.

Tt abv, av euxuKTiv 01 vop.01 k.t.X. PLAT. Grit. xii.

What then, if the laws say to us, etc.

A physical impossibility again is brought home as a vividargumentum ad hominem.

§ !93' Less Vivid Future Conditions.

See § 177, A 3 (b).

In English we render el with the Optative in a variety of

ways : el Tronjcrai/u, if I should do, if 1 were to do, should I do,

were I to do, if I did, supposing I were to do. etc.

ov iroXXfj av dXoyia eirj el (pofioiTO tov ddvarov 6 toiovtos.

Plat. Phaed. 68.

Would it not be the height of inconsistency if such a man were

to fear death ?

ei p.e «ri tovtois dfaone, eirroip,' av vp.iv. PLAT. Apdl. xvii.

Ifyou should dismiss me on these conditions I would reply to

you, etc.' ' Digitized by Microsoft®

MIXED EXAMPLES. 213

alpe TrXrJKTpov, el /ta^e'. ArIST. Av. 761.

Up with your spur if you mean fighting.

Cf. Akist. Ach. 316.

ij vw eytt) ju.ei> oijk dv-qp, afo-Jj 8' dVry/),

ei ravr' dvarl rfjSe KEicrerat KpaTq. SOPH. Ant. 484.

£0, yo«4 now ! I am wo man, hut she is $g man, if with impunitythese my commands are to count as naught in her eyes.

Si iacebit imperium nostrum, cf. 461.

The periphrasis with /ilAAto and Infinitive (Present or

Future) is commoner in prose. There is a life about the expression which recommends this d with the Future to poetry.

§ 195* Mixed examples illustrating the connectionbetween and interchangeability of the Sub-junctive, Optative, and Future Indicative in

Conditional Sentences.

N.B. —This section is supplementary to § 102 —§ 194.

Trois oSv av 6p6o)s SiKacraiTe irefil avT<ov ; el tovtovs edcrere

tov vojii^ofievov opKov Siop.ocra/j.evovs Karrj-yopijo-at, k.t.X.

ttcos Se lacrere ; lav vvvl diroi^r](f)i(rr](T6e p.ov.

Antiph. de Gaede Herod. 90.

How then would you rightly judge on these points ? if you

shall allow my prosecutors to take the prescribed oath andaccuse me. And how will you allow this ? if you acquit meon this present trial.

N.B. —el with the Future Indicative, and idv with Subjunc-

tive, have a modal force, " by permitting."

Plat, de Rep. 359 C (of the ring of Gyges), etrj 6" av

f) e£owta r\v Afyw TOidSe p.aAi<TTa el avrols yevonoo'iav tot! <j>a<rt, Svvap.iv T<p T^you tod A.v8ov irpoyovy

yevecrdat.

They would enjoy this liberty which I am speahing of most

completely, if they should possess _ such a power as we are

told the ancestor of Gyges the Lydian once possessed.

Compared with

PLA.T. Bep. 612 B, Troirjreov etvai airy ra. 8'iKaia, edv t' exVtov Yvyov 8aKTv\iov, idv re p,r\.

(we concluded, evpofiev) that the soul must do what is righteous,

whether it possesses the YifflFffifflkes or no.

oijSets ij/ttSl' TVtv vofiwv efiiroSdv ecrriv, edv re tis (iovXrjTai

v/iZv els airoiKiav levai, el /ir) dpecrKoifiev 17/ms re kou r)

ttoXis, edv T£ fieroiKetv aXXocre iroi eXdwv,tevou e/ceMre

ottoi av /3ovXrjTai, fyovTa ii avTov. PLAT. Grit. Xlll.

iVome 0/ our laws prevents any of you, if lie wishes to go to a

colony, supposing we and the state should not give him

satisfaction, or if he wishes to go and reside anywliere else,^

(none prevents him) from going wherever he wishes with all

his belongings.

TheOptative here, Professor Goodwin says, simply marks

a less prominent clause. But, it is to be noticed that lav with

the Subjunctive here, which is thus joined with el and the

Optative, is a general supposition

§ 196. The Optative and Indicative with av

without a Protasis.

The Optative with av is freely used without a Protasis in

a variety of modified statements. In some cases it is easy to

supply a Protasis ; in others no Protasis appears to have beenthought of. (This is Madvig's Optatims Potentialis or Dubita-

tivus, § 136.)

1. As a modified statement in present or future time, very often

drawing an inference from what Ms preceded.

&pa av rjp.iv crvarKevd^ecrdai ei'17. XEN. Gyr. iii. 1. 41.

It is time for us then to be packing up.

Of. Antiph. Tetral. b.b. 6, eXeyxOelrj.

tovt' av ei7] o eyd <j>rj[il <re alv'meo-dai. PLAT. Apol. XV.

Serein then would consist what I hold to be your riddling.

Cf. Antiph. de Chor. 15, oios t" &v eirj.

Often /3ovXoLfj,rjv av, I could wish, I wish, velim.

ovk av fie6eifj.rjV tov dpovov, p.r) vovdkra. APJST. Ran. 830.I'll not resign the- throne, don't counsel me.

Cf. Akist. Ach. 1055.

2. A modified command or prayer, sometimes put as a ques-tion.

crb fiev ko/u£chs av ereauTovjj

BeXeis. SOPH. Ant. 444.Thou mai/st betake thee where tfj,ouJikest, i.e. get- thee gone.

UNFULFILLED CONDITIONS. 215

up' o$v e&A.Tjcrcus av;

Should you feel disposed? Would you mind? Please do so

andso.

3. A wish, expressed interrogatively. An interrogation equiva-lent to a wish.

irois av 6\olfM)V ; EURIP.How could I perish? i.e. would I might perish I

Akist. Ach. 991.

Similarly, but not so freely, the Imperfect Indicative is

used. The time is past.

kf5ovk6[Li)v av.

I could have wished, vellem.

qv 8' av oStos t£v linrLKiav tis. PLAT. Apol. iv.

This man accordingly would he one of those who understandhorses.

(ijv av is Apodosis of an unfulfilled condition.)

§ 197. Unfulfilled Conditions. 1

See § 177, B 1 and 2.

1. Et with the Imperfect Indicative. The time of theImperfect Indicative is either present or a past of description,

habit, or iteration.

Kal toS', t'iirep ztrdevov,

ZSpmv av. Soph. El. 604Had I the strength,

I 'd do the deed.

The time is present (/ should now have been doing).

1 We have in English several ways of expressing an unfulfilled con-

dition in present time, some of which resemble the Greek. Thus wemay render, el raSra tTroleis ijdlKHS &v, if you were doing this (or, if youhad been doing this), you would be doing wrong (or, would have now been

doing wrong). These are not, however, the forms always used in every-day speech. E. g. A tramp, meeting me on the road, asks me for a copper.

I put my hand in my pocket, but, finding nothing there, I shake myhead and say, "Very sorry, if I had anything, I would give it" {et ti

a%ov iUSovv &v). A Shaksperean unfulfilled condition, referring to

present time, may be given. Constance says to Arthur: " If thou

that bid' st me be content, wert grim," etc., "i" would not care, I then

would be content, for then <T should not love thee," etc. "But thou art

fair. Digitized by Microsoft®

216 THE PARTICLE 3v.

£t £evos krvyxavov &v, ^vveyiyvdo-KCTe Srprov av p.01.

Plat. Apol. i.

If I happened to he a foreigner (which I am not), you wouldsurely pardon me.

The time is present.

ei prj tot' hrovovv vvv av ovk ev<f>paiv6p,r]v. PfflLEM. 159.

If I Iwd not been toiling then, I should not be rejoicing now.

The force of the Imperfect Indicative (referring to bothkinds-of time) is well

shownin the above example.

eyib odv (KaWvvoprjv Kal fjppvvoprjv av, el rjTrio-Ta.fj.rjv TavTa.

ctAA' ov yap en-10-Tap.ai. PLAT. Apol. iv.

/ anyhow should plume and pride myself if I possessed this

knowledge. But —you see, I don't possess it (or, I should

have been pluming, etc.)

The time is present, or it may refer to a habit in the past.

SijAov oSv on ovk av TrpoeXeyev et p.rj Zirlo-Tevev d\rjdevo-£iv.

Xen. Mem. i. 1. 5.

It is plain accordingly that Socrates would not have publicly

made these statements had he not felt confident that he

should speak the truth.

The Imperfect here expresses customary or habitual acts in

the past.

Similarly in Latin the Imperfect is used, and not thePluperfect. The poets are fond of it as a descriptive past.

Several instances, not much noticed, occur in Horace. Ille

non inclusus equo Minervae, etc.;

falleret aulam, etc. ; sed,

etc. ; ureret flammis ; He would not have been deceiving, but

burning. Thou hadst not seen Achilles deceiving, but burning.

Non ego hoc ferrem calidus iuventa consule Planco.Iliadnot brooked this in the heat of youth when Plancus was consul.

Sometimes av with the Aorist Indicative in Apodosis is

joined to d with the Imperfect Indicative, not to denote apast unfulfilled condition, but a single act, e.g. Plat. Euthyph.12 D, ei phi oSv av p.e ijpcoTas ti, eurov av, if you were asking

me any question I sJwuld instantly say. Here e«rov av really

refers to the present, and denotes the instantaneousness ofthesingle act in a wa y ^hich^e Jm^erf^t could not express.

OMISSION OF S.v. 217

2. Ei with the Aorist or Pluperfect Indicative. The timeis past, denoting a single act (Aorist), or a state (Pluperfect).

dweOavov av el p.rj i\ t5>v Tpidnovra dp\rj KareXvdiq.

Plat. Apol. xx.I slwuld have been put to death if the government of the

Thirty had not been overthrown.

el p.fj dve/3r] "Avvtos k&v &<j>\e xiAtas 8paxp-ds.

Plat. Apol. xxv.

If Anytus had not come into cowrt he would evei\ have

incurred afme of 1000 drachmae.

el [irj vfieis rjkOere eTropevop.eda av eirl fiatriXia.

Xen. An. ii. 1. 4.

If you had not come (fast) we should now be marchingagainst the King (or have been now marching).

Protasis a single act in Past ; Apodosis a continued act in the

Present.

el Tore efiorjOrjcrapiev ovk av ijvcuxAsi vvv 6 <l?sA.imros.

DEM. 30. 6.

If we had then given help Philip would not be annoying

us now.

Here vvv is added to mark the present.

ovk av Trapep.et.va el eXeXvpvqv. ANTIPH. Herod. 13.

I should not have stayed if I had not been set free on bail.

el, o ere ijjOWTtuv, direKpivio, luavtas av qSij ep.ep.adr)Keiv.

Plat. Euthyph. 14 c.

If you had answered my question, I should already have

finished my learning.

The pluperfect denotes a past state.

§ 198. The omission of av in Apodosis with

Indicative.

1. Sometimes a past tense of the Indicative is found in

Apodosis without civ. Such a construction is necessarily

rhetorical. A statement which would have been true if

certain conditions had happened is spoken of as actually true.

The instances are rare, and many are disputed, but someoccur both in poetryj/p^ep^w/crosoft®

2l8 THE PARTICLE S».

el Se prj ipvyuvirvpyovs Trecrovras ycr/iev 'EXAiji/wv 8opl

<f>6/3ov trapeo-j(ev ov /tarws 6'Se ktvttos. EUR. Hec. 1111.(for Trapeo")(ev av).

Had we not knownThat Phrygia's towers had fallen 'neath the spear

Of Hellas, no slight fear this din had caused.

Cf. Nee veni nisi fata locum sedemque dedissent.

Verg. A en. xi. 112.

The Imperfect by itself almost bears this meaning withoutrequiring an av. Indeed the intrinsic meaning of the Im-perfect (e.g. in the following example, " I was not by way of

sending,") is closely allied to a conditioned statement.

e.g. KaiTOL ov Srprov ye ko.t' ep.avrov p-qvvrijv hrepvirov elSds.

Antiph. de Coed. Herod. 24.

And yet I surely was not sending an informer against myselfwith my eyes open (I should not have been sending).

See especially a paragraph too long for quotation in Andokidesde Myst. 58. 59. Of. also Eur. Bacch. 1312.

The construction is commoner in Latin (cf. Liv. xxxiv. 29,Difficilior facta erat oppugnatio ni T. Quinctius supervenisset.

Tac. Ann. iii. 14, Effigies Pisonis traxerant ac divellebant niiussu principis repositae forent. Hor. Od. II. xvii., Metruncus illapsus cerebro sustulerat nisi Faunus ictum dextralevasset. Verg. Georg. ii. 132, Et, si non alium late iactaret

odorem, laurus erat.

2. This omission of av is almost the rule with the Im-perfect of verbs denoting necessity, duty, possibility, propriety,

etc. : XPV V or ^XPfyi <^ £t> *£fy, * v fy, «»<°s tfv, irpoo-rJKev, fjv or

imrjpyev (it was possible), KaXbv fjv, alo-\pbv ?jv, KaXZs eivev,

&<f>eXov, ep.eXXes, e/3ov\6p.r)v. Also with verbals in -reos, e.g.

irpoaipereov fjv (satius erat). All these phrases denote an un-fulfilled condition (present or continued past).

This construction is parallel with the Latin debebam, de-

cebat, oportebat, poteram, gerundive with eram, par, satis,

aequum erat, etc. See Madvig, L. G. § 348 E., and Obs. 1.

KaXbv fjv TOtcrSe, et kcu rjp.apTa.vop.ev, el^ai tyj rjperepa opyrj.

THUC. i. 38.'

It would have been well for them, even if we had beenwronging ihet®i$jgi@6j$DMyctesem> anger.

222 THE PARTICLE dv.

ti rives iSoiev wr/ tow o-faripovs hriKparovvra? dveddpo-qo-av

dv. THuc/vii. 71.

If any of them saw their own sidewinning in any part of the

battle, they would pluck up courage.

dvcddpcrrjo-av av, iterative. For the iterative (or indefinite)

use of dv with the Imperfect and Aorist Indicative, see §^142.

This use must be carefully distinguished from that of dv in

unfulfilled conditions. The iterative use of <xv_ may have

arisen from its being used without definite application, e.g.

e'Aefe av, he came —in any given case, whereas in an unfulfilled

condition the dv may have been of special application, e\e£e

dv, he came —in that case, i.e. he would have come.

Obs. —That here in connection with a past Apodosis, the

Optative really refers to past time. It is only when thus

used, and in the rare instances in oratio olligua where the

Optative represents a Past Indicative of the recta, that the

Optative denotes past time.

Supplementary Sections, § 200 —§ 206.

§ 200. Mixed Examples.

For Examination and Reference.

Not seldom the Protasis and Apodosis do not strictly

correspond. No one rule can be laid down for explaining

all the irregularities. Sometimes the mind really shifts its

ground in the passage between Protasis and Apodosis, makingthe conclusion depend upon a condition which the expressedProtasis only suggests. But mostly the irregularity is one ofexpression only. This is chiefly the case with the Optativewith ay in an Apodosis, connected with a Protasis in theIndicative or Subjunctive. The Optative with dv may, as wehave seen, express a modified Indicative drawing an inference,or an Imperative, or a Future. Sometimes again there aretwo Protases actually expressed (Ex. 9). Sometimes Preposi-tion and Case, or a Particle supplies the place of the Protasis(Ex. 11 and 12).

1. a [lev yap tovto Xiyoixriv, o/ioAoyoi-ijv av 4'ywye ov Karatoutohs efi/at p-qriap. PLAT. Apol. i.

If this is what they mean, I must admit that I am an orator

of afar higher order than they.Digitized by Microsoft®

MIXED EXAMPLES. 223

The Protasis, el Xiyovo-iv, refers to the present ; the Apo-dosis is partly a remote supposition, and partly an inference.

2. tovto ye pot SoKel KaXbv etvai, ei Tts o?ds t eli] iraiSevew

avOp&irovs. Plat. Apol. iv.

This does appear to me to be a grand thing —supposing one

were able to teach men.

Here, Soicei, a verb of thinking, almost makes the Apodosis

like an Optative with av.

3. /cat eyi) tov E-ujjvov epaKapiara, el (is dArjtfws e\oi rrjv

Texvrjv. Plat. Apol. iv.

Lucky Evenus, thought I, if really and truly he were to possess

the art.

el c'xoi is the Protasis to an Apodosis implied in epaKapura.

4. el rovs avaiTiovs SuaKOipev . . . Seivovs aXiTYjpiovs e£op.ev,

. . . ei/oyot re tov <povov Tots esriTt/uois eupev.

Antiph. T, A. 4.

If we should indict the innocent, we shall find dread avengers,

and we are liable to the penalties for murder.

A series of pictures more and more vividly presented,

passing from the Optative to the Future Indicative.

5. ttcos &v elv\ Seivorepa pi)\avripaTa. el vp.lv Kareipyafnai a.

ftovXeo-de; Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 16.

How could there be more terrible practices, if you have

(a present ordinary condition) achieved your object ?

6. el toIvvv peydkwv dyaOuv atria vpM$ eipyavavro eicetvoi,

pepoi ey!i) ovk av |Aa)(i(rTov StKattos Taunjs rijs airtas

e'xot/xj. Andok. de Bed. suo. 12.

If then those men accomplished what secured your great

advantages (an ordinary past Protasis), / might justly

claim not the least share of the merit (a future Apodosis,

also marking an inference).

7. el o5v Tivi, vputv yvdprj roiavrq TrapeurTfjKei -irporepov trepi

epov, o-KOTreio-de eg airdv -rZv yeyevqpevwv.

Andok. de Myst. 54.

If, therefore, any of you previously used to entertain such an

opinion of me (an ordinary past condition in the Imper-

fect), examine the case by the actual facts (ie. now in the

immediate future).Digitized by Microsoft®

8. el r)v Svoiv to erepov kXeo-dai, f) /caASs &rroXeo-8ai r) alo-)(ptos

o~u)9rjvo.i, e\oi av T69 ehrelv KaKiav eivai to, yevofieva.

Andok. de Myst. 57.

If it had been possible to choose one of two alternatives, either

an honourable death or a dishonourable escape, then you

might stigmatize my conduct as cowardice (a past unful-

filled condition, a future Apodosis with an inference).

9. iyto oSv Seiva av e'irjv elpyacrfievos, el, ore p,kv p.e ot ap^ovres

eraTTOv . . . tote fiev ov eKeivot erarrov efievov . . . tov oe

deov T(£ttovtos . . . Xliroijj.1 rfjv to.£iv. PLAT. Apol. xvil.

I accordingly should be in a position of one who is guilty offearful sin if, when your rulers were assigning me a post,

etc., if then, I say, I was remaining at the post which

they assigned me, but if, when now God is assigning me apost, I were to desert that post.

Here there is one Apodosis, av elr/v elpyao-fikvos, and twcProtases, el efievov, el Xiiroi/M. The two Protases make up the

combined conditions which produce the Apodosis.

Cf. also ch. xv.

10. ei yap oiyroi opdtos orjrecrTTjcrav, v/xas av ov xpewv ap^otre.

Thuc. iii. 40.

If they were right in revolting, then your rule is unlawful{it would follow that you are ruling).

11. Sia yeifias avrovs irdXai av djroA(uA.6tT€. DEM. de Cor. 242.So far as you yourselves were concerned, you would have been

ruined long ago.

Sid ye fyias avTovs=el ifieis avrol fxovoi yre, if you had been

left to yourselves, had it depended on you alone.

12. ovTio yap ovKeri rov Xonrov Trdo-\oi,fiev av KaKui<s.

Dem. Phil. 1. 44.For in that we should never again get into trouble.

ovr(o = el Tavra yevono.

§ 201. Examples of the Conditional Participle in

a Protasis.

oXovfiai fj.fi fiadiuv. ARIST. Nub. 792.I shall be ruined if I don't learn.

= eav fir] fia.9u>.

CONDITIONAL RELA TIVE SENTENCES. 225

Set yap Ivos 06 pfj Tv\i>v

an-oXioXa. Arist. Ach. 466.

One thing I need which, if I fail to get,

Tm a lost man.oS /irj rv)(<av=kav /if) tx>x<o . . . a7roA.wAa being a vivid future.

to aTrodavelv av xts eK<pvyoi SirXa d<f>els. PL. Apol. xxix.

A man might escape death if he were to fling away his arms.

a<j>eis=:ei d<peit].

peTayvovs yap ( = ei p,eTayvoir)) en av opdZs povkevcrano.

Antiph. de Caede Eerod. 91.For if he should repent he yet might come to a right decision.

ov yap av £/3Xrj8r) aTpe/iigwv Kal p.fj Siarpexiov (=ei iji-pe/ufe

Kal pj Sierpexe). A.NTIPH. 2 Tetral. B. B. 5.

He would not have been struck if he had been standing still,

and not ruwning across.

§ 202. Examples of Conditional Relative Sentences.

a /jlyj otSa, ouSe oto/icu eiSevai. PLAT. Apol. vi.

What I do not know I do not fancy that I know.

=et Tiva p,fj oTSa.

twv Se dkk(ov £evmv ooris irunrori rjdekujare Karao-nyo-ai

eyyvrjTas, oiSeh TrunroTe eSedr). ANTIPH. Herod. 17.

Of all the other foreigners who ever at any time chose to furnish

securities, none ever was thrown into prison.

00-T19 rj6eX.r]<re=<ii tis ?)0eAijcre, an ordinary past Condition.

a yap tis p,rj irpocreSoKrjcrev, ovSe (f>vkdâ<r6ai ky\(j>pei.

Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 19.

What one does not expect, it is not even possible to guardagainst.

An instructive instance ; wpoo-eSoicrjo-ev is a Gnomic Aorist, andso this is a General Supposition in Present time. The Aorist,

however, may here simply imply priority of time.,

ktijv ye Svvap.iv eêi 6'0-rts re av rfj x el P^ diroKTeivy dSiKtos

Kal 6'0-Tts rfj î7<£<j>- Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 92.

The effect is the same whether a man takes life with' his hand,

or with his vote.

A General Supposition again in Present time.Digitized by Microsoft®



226 THE PARTICLE Sv.

§ 203. Relative Conditional Sentences expressing

General Suppositions.(See also the last two examples in the previous section.)

I. Present Time.

o-v/jt/iaêlv tovtois ideXovo-iv airavTes, oijs &v oprno-i Traps

o-Ktvaa/xevovs. DEM. Phil. i. 42. 1.

All men are ready to be m alliance with those whom ever they

see prepared.= edv rivas=OTav, ojrprav Ttvas.

II. Past Time.

ot Se, Ka.10fj.ivov dWov, eiriftaXovTes ov cpepouv, dirqeo-av.

Tmrc/ii. 52.

Continually, while one body was burning, they kept throwing

on (the funeral pile) any one they were bearing, and then

going away.

= £i Tiva=ei irore Tivd=oTr6Te tlvou

§ 204. Examples of Infinitive in Apodosis with dv.

el Teyed o-^tcri Trpoo-ykvoiTO, ivopifav aVao-av dveyetvIl6Xo7rdvvij(rov. ThTJC. V. 32.

They thought that, if they could get in addition Tegea, theywould possess the whole Peloponnese.

dv 6)(£iv=Eôiev dv.

But in the recta they would say : Zdv fip.lv Trpoo-yevrjTai . .

.

eôixev.

ouSels dvreiire Sid to /*ij dvao-\eo-6ai. dv t»ji> tK/cAiyo-iav.

Xen. An. i. 4. -20.

No one contradicted, because the assembly would not havepermitted it.

el avreiire ovk dv T)veo-)(€TO fj eKK\r)o~ia.

dXX' ei ireTravTcu, Kapr' dv eirvêiv Sokcu SOPH. Ai. 263.Nay, if he hath ceased, methinks all may be well.

evTUYoin ay an Optatiye of inference.A rDigitized by Microsoft®



228 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE

Principal Sentence, and, as such, sets the time of the whole

Compound Conditional Sentence. 'Ecu- with the Subjunctive

(in ordinary particular conditions) isregularly accompanied

by an Apodosis in the Future Indicative, e.g. Tavra Troi-qa-m

edv ti 8%, / will do this if it is necessary; edv n Sey thus

refers to the future.

El with the Optative also refers to the future. Ei ravra

yevoiro means */ this should happen, as opposed to eav ravra

yevrjraL, if this shall happen. All scholars now seem agreed

that the difference between edv with Subjunctive and el

with Optative is the same as that between */ I shall andAf I should in English.

In opposition to long-received explanations Professor

Goodwin has shown in a series of papers (see especially

Journal of Philology, Vol. v. No. 10, and Vol. viii. No. 15)

that edv with Subjunctive and el with Optative are inter-

changeable expressions, alternating sometimes in the sameparagraph, and when referring to the same condition. Therecan thus be no fundamental distinction between them, nor, wemust add, between them and el with the Future Indicative;

-All these are variant expressions for a future condition.

The most generally received theory hitherto of edv withSubjunctive has been that of Buttmann, according to which it

denotes " an uncertain but possible case with the prospect of

speedy decision." Professor Goodwin pertinently asks how

we should turn into Greek the proverb,"

If the sky falls, weshall catch larks." Of course by edv with the Subjunctive.

But what is the " prospect of speedy decision " here ? Furtherhe asks whether Demosthenes [Phil. i. p. 43, § 11) implies

any nearer prospect of decision about Philip's death when hefirst refers to it in the words av oBtos ti irdOy, than in thevery next sentence, when he says eiti TrdOoi. Again, edv withSubjunctive has been stated (by Dr. Donaldson and others) to

denote "uncertainty with some small amount of probability."

This theory, however, is destroyed by such conditions as thefollowing, all with edv and Subjunctive. In Plat. Crito, 50,

of the laws speaking to Sokrates. In Euthyd. 299, of a manswallowing a cartload of hellebore. In Rep. 612, of the soul

wearing the ring of Gyges. In Eur. Phoen. 1216, and Or est.

1593, of a human being flying on wings to the aether.

How then do these three Future Conditions differ ? 'Eav withthe Subjunctive gives a vivkLand distinct representation of

ON 'Eok AND Ei. 229

a supposition in the future. El with the Future Indicative is

more vivid still ; a condition is brought home as of imminentand immediate interest. Ei with the Optative, on the other

hand, conjures up a future supposition less graphic, vivid, andlife-like, a supposition less distinctly conceived, more faintly

sketched, a supposition of less immediate concern, one whichmoves the mind with a more languid interest. We may com-

pare the three forms to three sketches or pictures differing in

greater or less distinctness of outline. Or we may say that dwith the Future Indicative moves the mind with the immedi-

ate interest of the next hour or minute, edv and the Subjunc-tive with the natural and lively interest of the morrow, el andthe Optative with the fainter and remoter interest of next

week. But the whole effect in each case is rhetorical, the

expression itself does not imply that the fact denoted in the

condition is to be decided, or that it is likely or unlikely ; it is

all a question of realising a conception more or less vividly,

or, as Mr. Monro in his Homeric Grammar puts it, the

difference depends on the tone assumed by the speaker.

When, therefore, is lav with the Subjunctive chosen rather

than d with the Optative 1 Professor Goodwin shows that

there may be several reasons for choosing the more vivid ex-

pression. The following instances are most instructive.

1. The speaker may have an actual case present to his mind.

In Bep. vi. 494, Sokrates is thinking of Alkibiades ; in Bep.

vii. 517, of himself. In both cases lav with the Subjunctiveis the- form employed.

2. Tlie speaker may be dreading the fulfilment of his supposition.

Dem. Aphob. i. 67 (p. 834), an adverse vote is referred to in

these terms, eav 6.iro<f>vyrj fj.e ctBtos, prj yevoiro.

3. The speaker may be treating an improbable and ridi-

culous supposition with scorn. Plat. Bep. x. 610 A, of

bodily depravity causing mental depravity (lav fiij I/mtoiij —tovto ye oijSets ttotc 8ei£ei) : Plat. Gorg. 470 c, of Polus con-

victing Sokrates of talking nonsense (lav fie eXeygys).

There may be other reasons besides the above. Sometimes

lav with the Subjunctive seems to single out a supposition for

special emphasis : sometimes an unfamiliar conception has been

introduced by el with the Optative, which, when we have

become familiarised withit, is expressed by lav with the Sub-

junctive. Or qSP*d^JjffyM&Bg/l& ^ orth further atten "

230 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTM

tion perhaps, different writers, from temperament or style,

have a habit of using one expression rather than another.

Thus Aeschylus very rarely uses kav with the Subjunctivein an ordinary future supposition. He oftener uses d withthe Future Indicative ; thrice he uses d with the Subjunctive.

But his partiality for the Optative is remarkable. Thucy-DIDES again often uses d with the Future Indicative.

In all the above cases (1) the time is future, (2) the picture

is designedly conceived and drawn in a lively graphic manner.

(3) In many cases such as the above edv with the Subjunctive

alternates with el and the Optative. Thus in the examplefrom Dem. Aphdb. the same condition is alluded to later on(ii. § 18, p. 841) by the words d ifafoaaurde, then three lines

further on by Zav 6'<£Aa>/iev, and yet again (§ 21, p. 842) by dyvtia-ecrde. Similarly in Plat. Bep. 517 A, where Sokrates is

referring to himself, the Optative is used.

The inferences from the above premises are inevitable.

(1) kav with the Subjunctive, and d with the Optative,

both refer to future time.

(2) They are interchangeable, differing only in greater

or less clearness of conception and vividness of

expression.

(3) As expressions they can in themselves imply noopinion of the writer that the fact denoted by thecondition is more or less likely to occur, the one

and only thing stated being the dependence of theconsequence upon the condition.

The interchangeability of the Subjunctive and Optative is

one of the regular and most characteristic features of GreekSyntax. "We find it constantly in Indirect Statements andQuestions, and throughout the Oratio Obligua, in Temporal,Final Sentences, in Sentences with oVcos. In all thesecases we do not hesitate to accept the explanation that oneexpression is more or less direct and vivid than the other, andthat the two varieties are interchangeable. ConditionalSentences do not stand apart by themselves : they followthe principles which rule Greek Syntax.

Two points may be added :

1. If it is asked whether the writer may not hold anopinion that the fact denoted is more or less probable, wemay reply that of course he may, and that holding such anopinion he may cho^s^on^fojm^oyxpression rather than



ON 'Edu AND Ei. 231

another. But this covers only some instances and not all.

Probability cannot be made the basis of a division, since thefact denoted varies from what is in itself natural and probableto what is physically impossible.

(2) The notion of future time is sometimes very indistinctly

marked by et with the Optative, the faintness of the con-

ception being the chief effect intended in such cases. Still el

ravra oiVtos u-q cannot (as sometimes in Homer) be past, if

this had been so ; it cannot be translated, if it were now so ; it

can only be rendered, if this were to be so, were so, should be so.

The Apodosis also must always be examined in connexionwith the Protasis.




CHAPTEE III.

§ 207. TEMPOEAL SENTENCES.

Temporal Sentences are constantly expressed in Greek

by Participles in agreement with the Subject, by the

Genitive Absolute, and by the Accusative Absolute.

When the time of the Temporal Sentence is definite the

Indicative is used ; when indefinite the Subjunctive and

Optative. 1 This is the one clew to the use of the moods

in Temporal Sentences.

See § 172, Definite and Indefinite Sentences.

Time is indefinite in three ways:

1. Indefinite Futurity, i.e. when the action will

occur in the indefinite future.

2. Indefinite Frequency, i.e. when the action mayrecur an indefinite number of times.

3. Indefinite Duration, i.e. when the action maycontinue for an indefinite period.

All Temporal Sentences in the Subjunctive and Opta-

tive will fall under one of the above three heads, the first,

1 This principle of Indefinite Time may be most usefully applied tothe Latin Subjunctive as opposed to the Indicative, e.g. —

Donee labantes consilio j>&tres firmwet (Hoe.). Indefinite Futurity.

Opperire quoad scire possis quod tibi agendum sit. IndefiniteFuturity.

Dum Priami Paridisque busto insultet armentum. Indefinite Duration.It is usual to explain many such sentences in Latin (and in Greek)

by saying that they express a purpose. So they do, but this is not con-tained in the Temporal Particle and its Sentence, but in the nature ofthe principal verb combined with the indefiniteness of time in view. Soprobably with Temporal Sentences which are described as Conditional(dum).

Indefinite Frequency is so differently treated by Latin writers thatit is not touched on here,. ... , , ... „_

„,„ Digitized by Microsoft®



" WHEN" IN DEFINITE TIME {PAST). 233

Indefinite Futurity, being the commonest, and the third,

Indefinite Duration, being the rarest. More than one

kind of Indefiniteness may be denoted by the sameexpression.

The Subjunctive is used in Primary, the Optative in

Historic sequence, though, as in other Sentences, the Sub-

junctive occurs in Historic sequence, and sometimes is

co-ordinate with the Optative.

A Temporal Particle with the Subjunctive takes av

(jrpiv av, «B? av, eweiBav, orav, etc. etc.).

Thus ews av yevrjTat.

A Temporal Particle with the Optative drops the av

(irplv, ews, 67T€t§7j, ore, etc. etc.).

e&>? yevoiTO.

For the omission of av in Subjunctive clauses see § 221.

For the retention of av with the Optative see § 222.

§ 208. " WHEN" IN DEFINITE TIME {PAST).

I. enet, ewet&j (r)vUa less common), when, after, with

Indicative Aorist (an action prior to principal sentence),

Indicative Imperfect (contemporary with principal

sentence).

Latin : cum, with Pluperfect and Imperfect Subjunc-

tive, postquam with Indicative.

eireiSr) Se oXiyapftia eyevero, 01 rpiaicovTa fj,eT6Tre'/j,-

TJravro /Lie. Plat.

When an oligarchy had been established, the Thirty

sent for me.

Cum vero paucorum dominatio constituta esset,

Triginta ifcw«»t.

234 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.

eirei r/aOevei Aapelos, efiovkero ol tw iralBe afi<f>orepa)

irapelvai. Xen. An.

WJien Darius was ill, he wished both his sons to

appear before him.

Dariu,s, cum moreretur, filios ambo ad se venire

volebat.

For ijvuca see Plat. Apol. xxxi, Soph. El. 32, 423, At. 272.

Note, ore, "when," cannot introduce a clause in Attic Greeklike CTet, eTreiSrj. Being a relative it must be connected withsome sort of antecedent, though, like all relative sentences,

the clause in which it stands may come first, rare is its strict

antecedent.

V)v irore )(povos, ore Oeol fiev ^crav, dvrjra, Se yevr) ovk rjo-av.

Plat. Prot.

There was a time once when the gods were in existence, butwhen the races of mortal creatures were not.

ore fie ol ap^ovres erarrov, Tore ov eKeivoi erarrov e/jtevov.

Plat. Apol.

When the rulers were assigning me a post, then I remained at

the post, which they assigned me.

§209. "AS SOON AS," "DIRECTLY," IN DE-FINITE TIME.

E-rrel, 67retS?j take rayiara when they mean directly,

immediately, as soon as, no sooner- —than.

&>? (Latin ut) has the same meaning even withoutrayio-Ta,, but more markedly with rayio-ra.

[Latin : ubi, ubiprimum; ut, ut primum ; simul, simulae (atque) ; postquam ; with the perfect indicative.]

ro? Ta%t.o~Ta e<M? inrefaivev, edvovro. Xen.

As soon as day began to dawn, they set about taking

the auspicehgjtjzed by Microsofm

" Whenever," etc., in indefinite time. 235

01 rpia/covra tjpeOijaav eirel Twyiara to. reiyr\

Kadypeffrj. Xen.

The Thirty were appointed directly the walls were

rased.

In poetry 6V<ds has this sense. Cf. Aesch. Pers. 200, Soph.El. 736, 749, on-ws dp$ (present indicative) ut vidit. For is(often with eidvs, evOms) see Aesch. Pers. 363, Arist. Ban.504.

§210. " whenever;' "AS OFTEN AS," IN IN-DEFINITE TIME.

The same particles, eire.1, hirei%-f\, qvlica, ore, and also

o-Kore, denoting Indefinite Futurity, or Indefinite Fre-

quency, take the Subjunctive and Optative.

[Latin : usually a Temporal Conjunction with Future

Perfect Indicative. But for Frequentative Sentences see

the caution given § 207, footnote.]

A. With Subjunctive in Primary sequence) e-n-eiSdv,

brav, oirorav (jjvuc av, e-irrp/ and eirav rarer).

N.B. —tos av is said never to be Temporal, but see Soph.Phil. 1330, Ai. 1117, with Jebb's note on the latter passage.

eireiSav Se Sunrpa^a>p.ai, a Seofiai, r]l~(o. Xen. An.

When I have (shall have) accomplished my object I

will return. (Indefinite Futurity.)

Cum vero confecero quod in animo est, redibo.

ovkovv, brav Brj p,rj (T0eva>, ireiravo-opiai. SOPH. Ant. 91.

So, when my power shall fail, I will give o'er.

(Indefinite Futurity.)

avTt) rj (fxavr), brav <yevrjTai,aei aTrorpeireL p,e. PLAT.

This inward voice, whenever it comes, ever checks me.

(Indefinite Frequency.)

fiaivo/j,e0a iravrss, oirorav opyi£a>p,eda. PHILEMON.

We are madmen all, whenever we are angry.

(IndefiniteJ^encj^^




Note. For 6W (Indefinite Futurity) Soph. El. 386, 1038,

(Indefinite Frequency) Plat. Apol. xvi., xxiii., Soph. El. 267,

293, Aesch. Pers. 602. omW (Indefinite Futurity) Soph.Phil. 146. All these part'icles may often be rendered, as soon

as, when once, but the time is still indefinite in the Future.

o7roVav (Indefinite Frequency) Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 26, al. ottov

av) : ZireiSdv (Frequency) Plat. Apol. xxxii.

For eSre av, poetical, Soph. El. 627.

With the Subjunctive expressing Indefinite Frequency com-

pare idy (rjv) with Subjunctive in General Suppositions.

B. With Optative in Historic Sequence, evei, eVetS?),

oiroTe (ore very rarely).

ol ovoi, €7ret rt? oicokoi, irpoopajxovre'i av evaTrjKeaav.

Xen.

The asses, whenever any one chased them, would gallopahead and then halt. (Indefinite Frequency.)

ottot ev irpao-aroi 7roXt?

ej(aipe, Xvirpas B' e(pepev, ei ti hvarvj^ol.

Eur. Supp. 897.

Whene'er the state fared well,

He would rejoice, and mourn if aught it suffered.

071-oTe is = d 7tot£, as much conditional as temporal. SeePLAT. Apol. xxxii., ojtote evrvxotfu IlaAa/MjSet. In Thuc. i.

99 a good instance.

Note, eird, lirei&rj, ojtot£ with the Optative appear alwaysto denote Frequency rather than Futurity, except when they

represent anejnjv,

tTreiSdv,ott6to.v,

ordv turned from Primaryto Historic sequence.

Compare d with Optative in General Suppositions.

§211. " SINCE" IN DEFINITE TIME.

e% ov (ex quo with Indicative), since, ever since, in

Definite Time witl^Indica^v^^^

" WHILST" IN INDEFINITE TIME. 237

e£ ov to, £eviKa arpareverai, row; $1X01/9 vtKa.

DEM.

Ever since mercenaries have been serving, he has been

conquering his friends.

e£ oSt6 Aesch. Pers. 761, for i>s (like ut in Latin) TfflJC. iv.

90 (Poppo), e£ Sv, acf> oC are also used.

For ut in Latin cf. Ov. Trist. v. 10. 1, ut sumus in Ponto, etc.

This may be expressed participially in the Dative, see § 118,

note.

§ 212. " WHILST" IN DEFINITE TIME.

' JEo)?, ears, ev a>, ev bam, baov ypovov, r\viKa (rarely

fteftpt), whilst, denoting Definite Duration with Indicative.

[Latin : dum, donee, quamdiu, quoad with Indicative.]

6(»s en, veos ei/il, ti\v -tyvyvjv ryv/Mva^co.

While I am still young, I train my mind.

paSiw; to eiriTriSeia kfjofiev, baov yjpovov ev 777

"TroXefiia ecroiieOa.

We shall easily find supplies so long as {during all

the time that) we are in the enemies' country.

dvrjp e/celvos, tjvik t\v ev rfj voa(p,

avTO? /lev tfSero. Soph. Ai. 271.

Ton chief, so long as he was set i' the plague,

Himself was happy.

Donee morbo versabatur.

lore with past tense, Xen. An. iii. 1. 19.

«09!£e<rTtv {dum licet), Plat. Apol. xxxi. e us I Air is ^v (past

tense) dum spes erat, Thuc. viii. 40. /^xP'i Thuc. iii. 10. 2.

§ 213. " WHILST" IN INDEFINITE TIME.

The same particles denoting Indefinite Duration take

A. Subjunctive *$^g%$g§^ ™* ™-

ecotnrep av epmveco, ov fvq iravo-co/Mai <ptko<ro<pa)v.

Plat.

Just so long as I breathe, I never will give upphilosophy.

Dum spirabo haud desinam philosophari.

Cf. Aesch. Ag. 1435.

B. Optative in Historic Sequence, without av.

^trjcro/Mv jj,rjSi7T07' av p,ei£ov yevecrOcu, «os Icrov e«j avro

lauToJ. Plat. Theaet. 155 a.

We shall admit that it never would become either greater or

less, so long as it should remain equaHo itself.

[Latin : dum, donee, quamdiu, quoad, with Future In-

dicative, or, when purpose is connoted, Subjunctive.]

§ 214. " UNTIL"

IN DEFINITE TIME.«»?, 6<7T6, /J-e^pi, axpi (p^XR 1 ov > &XP 1, ov )> un ^> denot-

ing Definite Time with Indicative.

evre poetical, fie%ptfi, a%pts before a vowel in later writers.

[Latin : donee, quoad, with past Indicative.]

ravra eiroiovv, ^XP L ctkotos eyevero. XeN.This they were doing until darkness came on.

quoad or donee nox oppressit.

Cf. Thuc. i. 109, iv. 4, /xexpt ov and fie'xpi.

iraiovai rov SwrripiSriv, ecrre rfvar/Kaaav iropeveo-Oai.

Xen.They beat Soterides till they compelled him to move on.

quoad progredi coegerunt.

Cf. Soph. Ant. 415.

i^iapovv Sid twv 26K€A5i/, etas acjiiKovro Is KaTavTiv.

Thuc. vi. 62. 3.

They marched through the country of the Sicels, till they cameto Gatane. „. . ± . , , „„. ,^

" UNTIL " IN INDEFINITE TIME. 239

7rcuowri, KpeoKOTrovcri Svo-rrjvmv /*eAij,

ecus diravTtov e^mrkÔeipav j3iov. AeSCH. Pers. 466.

They hack, hew mincemeat the poor wretches' limbs,

Till they had crushed outright the limes of all.

eirw)(ii)V av, ecus ol irXeiarroi r<av tltaOortov yvdptjv &Tre<f>rj-

vavro, k.t.X., r)(rv){iav av rjyov. DEM. Phil. i. 1.

I should have waited, until most of the regular speakers hadexpressed their views, and have been keeping quiet.

In this example the Indicative denotes Indefinite

Futurity thrown hack into the past, and consequently

now Indefinite only to the original thought of the chief

subject. This is parallel with a Final Sentence in the

Indicative (see Index).

§215. " UNTIL" IN INDEFINITE TIME.

The same Particles, denoting Indefinite Futurity, take

A. Subjunctive in Primary Sequence.

/ie'^jOt S' av 670a r\KG>, at, tnrovSal fievovTcav. XEN.

Until I return, let the armistice continue.

67Ticrês ear av icai ra Xonra •Kpo^fiaQvp. AESCH.

Pause till thou further learn what yet remains.

avdyKHj rauTa del Tapeêiv, ecos av \dpav XdfSrj.

Xen. Cyr. iv. 5. 37.

It is necessary to furnish continually the same things until he

{shall) take the country.

eSt' av Aesch. Pers. 366.

B. Optative in Historic Sequence.

Trepie/j&vofiev eKaarore, ea>s avoiyQeiri to Bea/icorripiov.

Plat.

We used to wait about on each occasion, until the

prison was (should be) opened.

Trepiep.evop.ev is Frequentative, but ?<os dvoixdelr] expresses

Indefinite Futurity, and expresses indirectly the thought of

the chief subject.Digitized by Microsoft®

airovSa<; ewoiryjavTo ea>? avrayyekdeii) ra Xey^Oevra.

Xen.

They made an armistice (to last) till the terms were(should he) announced.

Here again the thought of the chief subject is clearly seen.

Their original words would be cnrovSas Troiovp,eda ecus &v

aTrayyeXdrj. The moods in the two last examples are thus

due to Oratio Obliqua.

Note. It may be generally laid down that4'us,

etc., with theSubjunctive and Optative after Affirmative Sentences corre-

spond to irpiv with the same moods after Negative Sentences.

€(os, etc., do occur, but very exceptionally, after NegativeSentences.

ovk dvap,evop.ev, eo>s av rj r)p,erepa X ("P a KOKGrai,

Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 18.

We do not remain until owr country is being ravaged.

When Trpiv is used with any finite mood the action of its

verb will not begin until the action of trpiv with the principalverb has occurred. The difference here consists in the mean-ing of the verb dvapAvto, to continue.

§ 2l6. THE CONJUNCTION TLpiv.

TUplv with the Indicative, Subjunctive and Optative is

used after Negative Sentences where !»?, iore, pixpi, etc.,

are used after Affirmative Sentences.

JIplv r) is used like Trpiv. -rrpoTepov, irpdadev, Trdpos,

another irpiv (used as an adverb), frequently are used in

the Principal Sentence as forerunners of -Trpiv.

JJpiv differs from other Temporal Particles only in

being joined to an Infinitive as well as to other moods.

The following table will show the ordinary Attic usage.

Exceptions are given subsequently.

A. After Affirmative Prin- \ -rrplv with the Infinitive,

cipal Sentences. JDigitized by Microsoft®

B. After Negative Principal

Upiv WITH THE INFINITIVE. 241

(\. When the Time is De-

finite, irplv with the

Indicative.

2. When the Time is Inde-

Sentences. ^ finite (Indefinite Fu-

turity), irplv with the

Subjunctive and Op-

tative.

The order in time of the Principal and Subordinate

Sentences in irplv clauses should be noticed. (1) Whenirplv is used with the Infinitive, the action of the Prin-

cipal Sentence takes place before that of the Subordinate

Sentence (the irplv clause). (2) When irplv is used with

a Finite Mood (Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative) the

action of the Principal Sentence had to wait (in the past),

or has to wait (in the future) for the decisive occurrence

of the irplv clause.

§ 217. Uplv WITH THE INFINITIVE.

A. The Principal action takes place before the Sub-

ordinate action with irplv. Uplv with Infinitive always

means before. The Infinitive in itself denotes the mereverbal notion rather than a distinct fact, like the English

gerundive in -ing (before coming, going, speaking). Butthe fact is often implied. Cf. mare with Infinitive.

irpiv fiev iretvrjv e<rdlei<;, irplv Be SiTJrrjv irlveis.

You eat before being hungry, you drink before being

thirsty.

eirefiyfre irpiv ev Teyeq auros elvai. XEN.

He sent before he was himself in Tegea.

Observe the Nominative- attraction.Digitized by Mbrosoft®

2/12 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.

Trpiv ytvitrdai rjp,as i)v rjpZv r) ^pv\r\. PlAT. Phaed. 77.

Before we were created our soul was in existence.

fjpus M.eo-0-qvqv eiXopev Trpiv Hepo-as Xafjetv tyjv /3ao-iAeiai>.Isoc. Archid. 26.

We conquered Messene before the Persians took the kingdom.

6V Tfc) Trpiv yevecrdai ijjttas y^povti). PLAT. Phaed. 88.

In the days before we were born.

§ 2l8. lipiv WITH THE INDICATIVE INDEFINITE TIME {PAST).

B 1. JJplv with Aorist Indicative. (The Historic

present occurs in Thuc. i. 132, irplv rytyveTcu.)

TJplv may equally be rendered before, until.

01 AaiceBaifiovioi ov irporepov eiravaavto irpiv Mea-

a-rjviov; efe/3a\oi> etc t^s ^wpa<;. ISAETJS 12.

The Lacedaemonians did not leave off until (he/ore)

they had expelled the Messenians (and then they

did leave off).

oiJ Trpocrdev i£tveyi<dv tToA.ju.ijcrai' jiyjos ??|U.as 7r6X.ep.ov Trpiv

tovs CTpaTrjyovs f)p.dv <Tvve\a.f3ov. XEN. An. iii 2. 29.

They did not dare to make war on us until {before) they seized

our generals.

See Aesch. P. V. 481.

In Isoce. Panegyr. 19, irplv ZSiSagav where Trpiv Si8a|eiav

would be expected.

§ 219. UpCv WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVEANDOPTATIVE IN INDEFINITE TIME.

B 2. nplv av with Subjunctive in Primary Sequence,

after Negative Sentences, denotes Indefinite Futurity.

ov yfir\ yite atrekdelv irpiv av Sa> Siicrjv.

Xen. An. v. 7. 5.

I must not depart before I suffer punishment.Digitized by Microsoft®

nptV WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 243

Cf. also Aesch. P. V. 165, Eur. Heracl. 179.

ovk airoicpivovfiat irpoTepov irplv av irv0a>/uu. PLAT.

/ will not answer before {until) I hear.

trpiv alone with Optative may be described as irplv

av with Subjunctive converted into Historic Sequence byOratio Obliqua, actual or virtual.

aTrriyopeve /irjSeva fiaXKeiv, irplv Kvpos ep,irXrjcrdecrj

dijpwv. Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 14.

He forbade every one to shoot until Gyms liad had{should have had) his fill of the chase.

The recta would be prjdeh /3a\\eTio irplv av epirXrjcrdy.

eireiytipovv exarrTOv ireiOeiv pr) irporepov Ttov lavrov prjSevbs

iTTipeXel&Oai, irplv tavrov eirL[jt,e\r)deir),

Plat. Apol. xxvi.I used to try to persuade each one not to care for any of the

things belonging to himself before caring for himself.

Uplv is also used after another Optative (see Oratio

Obliqua, Assimilation of Optatives).

o\oio p,r\ira> irplv p,a6oip! ei icai iraXiv

yvcopuriv fieTot<ret<;. Soph. Phil.961.

Perish not ere I learn if yet again

Thou will repent thy purpose.

§ 220. Hpiv with the Infinitive after Negative

Sentences, and with the other Moods after

Affirmative Sentences.

As stated above, the general Attic rule -is that irplv withInfinitive follows Affirmative Sentences. But the rule is not

without exceptions. In Homer irplv with Infinitive regularly

follows either Affirmative or Negative sentences. In the

Attic poets it very rarely follows a Negative. In Attic prose,

however, several instances occur of uplv with Infinitive after

a Negative.Digitized by Microsoft®

Instances in the Attic poets occur in Aesch. Ag. 1067,Soph. Ai. 1418, Eur. H. F. 605, and Aeist. Av. 964.

In Thuc. some cases occur (i. 68, i. 39) in both of whichthe oi belongs rather to the Infinitive than to the principal

verb; in v. 10 the Negative belongs to the principal verb

clearly. In all these three cases the abstract verbal notion

rather than the fact is stated, e.g. v. 10, irplv tov<s fiorjdovs

f/KCLv, before the arrival of his allies. But in vii. 50 irplv withthe Infinitive is found after a Negative where we should

certainly look for an Optative, occurring- as it does in the

reported words of Nikias.

ouS' av SiafiovXtvcraadai en «£t;, irplv k.t.X., t/dis evvea

f/jxipa's p.eTva.1, oVcos av irporepov Ktvrjdeirj.

He declared that he would not even consider the making of amove until he had waited thrice nine days.

Recta, ovS' av 8iaf3ov\ev<ral/j.riv irplv peivai (for irplv peivaipu

orirplv

avp.eiv(aj.

Cf. also Antiph. Herod. 25, Andok. Myst. 43.

TLplv, with a Finite Mood (Indicative, Subjunctive, Opta-tive), is found when the Principal Sentence is affirmative in

farm, but virtually negative.

a<f>pwv vkoi t Jpi, irplv to. irpa.yp.aT1

Iyyij0ev

(tkottiLv IsefSov, k. t. X. EUR. I. A. 489.

where d^>pu>vz=ovK ep.cf>po)V.

Similarly in Thuc. i. 118. 2, oiire enc&Xvov, dk\' fja-vxa(ov

irplv Si) fj Svvafus twv 'AOrjvalmv ypero, where, besides the truenegative oiVe IkcoXuov, rjcrvx^ov means, they did not bestir them-selves. See also Thuc. iii. 29, Xavdavowi irplv -. viii. 105,elpyov irplv. But in Thuc. vii. 71. 4, irplv with the Indica-tive occurs after a principal sentence truly affirmativeirapairk-qa ta iiraa-yov, irplv ye Srj ol Supa/cdcriot irpetpav tovs'Adrjvalovs, they were in the same state of excitement, until at last

the Syracusans routed the Athenians (eWe Sij might have beenexpected). With the Subjunctive and Optative irplv is veryrarely found even after quasi-negative sentences :

Til av Siktjv Kpiveiev r) yvolrj \6yov,

irplv av trap' dp,<j>oiv pvudov eKp,adrj cratjficos ; EUR. Herac. 179.

Tt's av, however, is almost a real negative.' ' Digitized by Microsoft®

"A* OMITTED WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 245

ai(T)(pbv ijyoij/iat irporepov TTavo-ao-Qai irpiv av vy*eis, oti av

fHovXrjo-de, \fnj<p(o-r]o-0e. LYS. 22. 4.

Here alo-xpov is a virtually negative word, as its use before/*ij ov with an Infinitive shows. (See Negatives.)

TLplv r), irporepov rj, irpocrdtv rj, vcrrepov rj, are used like irpiv

with an Infinitive.

tov Mf}8ov avrol urp,ev Trporepov ekdovra rj ra. Trap' vjxwv

irpoairavTrjo-ai. Thuo. i. 601 (and vi. 58).

For %0-repov rj oirja-(U see vi. 4.

§ 221- "Av omitted with the Subjunctive, in Tem-poral and other Subordinate Sentences.

In all sentences with the Subjunctive (Indefinite Relative,

Conditional, Temporal), av is sometimes not used even in

Attic prose "and poetry. It seems quite a mistake to saythat av is omitted. It is much more rational to treat this

construction (like that of the Optative without av), as a

survival of the older usage, so constantly found in Homer,when the mood might or might not at pleasure be modified

by the adverb av. Instances of all the constructions are here

given, but it must be remembered that they are all- excep-

tional constructions in Attic, except, perhaps, in the case of

the Temporal Particles.

Indefinite Belative —yepovra S' opdovv (f>Xavpov os veos ireayj. SOPH. 0. C. 595.

arixutpiOv ov r)p.iv ov pev ^pa^ii<s apK&o-t p/r) iroWois

Xprjcrdai, Aoyots. THITC. iv. 17.

Of. Soph. El. 771, 225, 1059; Ai 496; Ant. 323.

Conditional: —(el with Subjunctive common in Homer,Pindar, several in Herodotus).

8ixrTaA.an/a Tap' eyw,

el o-ov o-reprjOS. SOPH. 0. C. 1441.

Cf. 509, Antig. 710, 0. T. 198 (Chorus).

Once in ThuC. vi. 21, el ^vo-tZo-w at iroAeis, according to

the best MSS. See Kriiger and Poppo.Digitized by Microsoft®

Temporal —irpiv py irporepov diroKTivvvvai 8etv irptv avayK-qv Ttva o

0eoshriirkpipy.

PLAT.Phaedo, vi.

prj <TTcva£e irplv pddys.

Soph. Phil. 917, Antig. 619 (Chorus).

p*XP l T " s o-jtovSols kcrtrewrdai. p^XP 1 °^ hvavkXQuto-iv.

Thuc. iv. 16 (also iv. 41 and i. 137), Soph. Ai. 571.

?(os ecus to yalpav ko.1 to A.u7reto"0<zi pdOys.

Soph. .M 555 (PM. 764).

«ra J?r« 8' apdpry, k.t.X. SOPH, ^wt 1025.

With these Temporal Particles dv is commonly used in prose,

but it is fairly often omitted. They seem in themselves

sufficient to mark the indefmiteness of future time without

the addition of av.

§ 222. "Av retained with the Optative.In a few places dv is found with a Relative and Optative,

and with a Temporal particle and the Optative, almost as if

the writer in changing from the Subjunctive had forgotten todrop the av. kXoyi^opyv d ravra TTpodvpos (roi o-vXXdf3oip,i,

cos oiKeios T6 o-oi e&oiprjv, kcu !£ecroiTO poi 8iaXeye<r9ai croi oirocrov

av xp6 yov povXoipyv, Xen. Cyr. vii. 5. 49. Here eitherbirotTov av f3ov\<apaL or qttoctov fiovXoip-qv would

have beenexpected. Of. Xen. Ap. i. 2. 6, Trap' &v av Xd^ouv. SoovSeis oo-Tts ovx r/yeiTO Siktjv pe XytpeaOat. 7rapa tZv kiriTp&irmv,

iireiSav Ta^'oTa dv-qp ai/cu 8oKip,a<rOel-qv, DEM. Onet. i. 865. 24.Cf. SOPH. Tr. 687, «os S.V dppoaai.pi.

§ 223. The Subjunctive instead of the Optative,

or co-ordinate with the Optative in HistoricSequence.

kftovXeva-av Secrpots avToiis 4>vXdtrcruv pexP 1 °® Tl ^/j/Jcucrt.

Thuc. iv. 41.They decided to heep them in prison till some arrangement

was come to.

Observe that av is omitted with the Subjunctive, for pexp 1 °$ti ^vp/Saicv. Cf. i. 91, irplv av Subjunctive after Historic time.

THE PARTICIPLE AS A TEMPORAL SENTENCE. 247

jraprqyytiXav IttciSij Seiirvrjcreiav iravTas ava-rravtcrdai, kcu

hr&rOai ijvuc' av Tts wapayyeWfl, XEN. An. iii. 5. 18.

They issued orders for all to rest as soon as they had dined,

and then to follow whenever any one issued orders.

This principle of the return to the Primary Sequence is so

common in Greek that it requires no further explanation here.

§ 224. The Participle as a Substitute for aTemporal Sentence.

The Participleis

aregular

substitutefor

a sentence ex-pressed by liret, ZireiSrj, rjv'iKa with Imperfect and AoristIndicative, but is used still more freely, for it is joined to

Present and Future Time, whereas these Particles go with a

past Principal Verb.

1. The Present Participle denotes an action contem-

porary with that of the Principal Verb.

afia and fieragv with the Participle bring out moreclearly the contemporary time.

aTT7]VT7](ra $i\nnrq> airiovrt.

I met Philip as he was going away.

afj,a TTpoiaiv evecrKOTreiTO. Xen.

As he was going forward he was considering.

to rov 6eov <rr]/j,e2ov iroWaj(ov 877 pe eirecT^e Xeyovra

/xeTafu. Plat. Apol. xxxi.

The sign of the god very often has checked me in the

midst of my talk —(while I have been speaking —while the words were on my lips),

enecrxt is here a gnomic aorist.-

2. The Aorist Participle denotes an action prior 1 to

that of the Principal Verb.

The Perfect Participle would express a completed state

before the action of the Principal Verb.

1 Never forgetting that the Aorist Participle does not always denote

an action prior to that of the principal Verb. See Participles. Wherethe Aorist Participle denotes a contemporary action it expresses Ch>eumstance, not Time.

tote, Tore r/Brj, elra, eirei,Ta, T7]viKavTa, ovtws often

accompany the Principal Verb, evdvs with the Participle

is like Ta^ta-ra with a Conjunction.

Tvpavvevcra<i krti rpla 'Iimta? e-^copei e? Siyeiov.

Thuc.

After ruling three years (when he had ruled),

Hippias retired to Sigeum, or he ruled and then

retired.

eicekevcre ovv Biaffavra tov EWrjcnrovTov eiretra

a-rraXkaTTetrOcu. Xen. An. vii. 1.

He induced him to accompany him over the Helles-

pont, and then withdraw {after he had accompanied

him, to withdraw).

ev6v<s yevopevoi (primo ortu), immediately after birth.

evOvs aTTo^e^irjKoTei, directly they landed, no sooner

had they landed . . . than, etc.

CHAPTER IV.

§ 225. CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.

The chief Concessive Particle in Greek is km, with or

without the enclitic irep.

Concessive Sentences are most commonly expressed by

the Participle, especially with icalirep (more rarely kui

alone). The Negative is 0x1. "Opax; (tamen) often

accompanies the Principal Verb.

tov KXewvos,Kawrep paviwBrj<; ovaa, rj inroa^eo-K

dire^rj. Thuc.

Cleon's promise, insane though it was, was fulfilled,.

Cf. Soph. Ai. 122.

ireidov yvvai^i, icanrep ov arepyeov bpcoi. AESCH.

Listen to women though thou like them not.

The o/lmus belongsto ireiQov, though it often is drawn to

the Participle.

owtos oleTal ti elSevai ovk etSw?. PlAT. Apol. vi.

This man thinks he knows something though- he knows

nothing.

Kayi} <r Invovpai, koX yvvrj irep oScr' o/i(os. EUR. Orest. 680.

I too entreat thee, woman though I oe.

Here kou and nep are separated, and opm is dislocated from

its Verb.

Note 1. ovSe, ovSe irep, pr/Se, /j.rjSe irep are also found with

Concessive Particles in Negative Concessive Sentences.

ovk av irpoS'oLrjv, ovSe Trep irpdao-oiv k<xk<3s. EUK. Phoetl. 1624.

I'd not betray, not even though in woe.

yvvauKi 7ret'0<n>, prjSe raX-qdi] kXvoiv. EUR. Hipp. Fr. 443.

Hearken to a woman, even if thou hearest not the truth.

250 CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.

ovS' d, oiS' kdv, fi,rj8' d, /«j8' kdv are used in Negative Con-

cessive sentences (ne —quidem).

[tfj flop'u/JjjoTjTe, ftr/S' kdv 86£u> ti vjj.Iv fiiya Aeyeiv.Plat. Apol. v.

Do mo< interrupt, even if you shall think that I am speaking

presumptuously.

ovft d, Apol. xvii. 29.

kyi> plkv oSv ovk dv jtot1

, oijS' €? juoi Ta <ra

/«AAot tis oitrebv 8a>p' k<j>' oiixi vw ^AiSas,

tovtois vireiKaOoi/JU. SOPH. El. 360.

Ne'er then would I, not e'en if one were like

To bring me those thy gifts, wherein thou nowArt glorying, submit to these.

Note 2. koX ravra, and that too, is also used with a participle,

and also, but very seldom, ko.Itoi. For Kai raxra, Plat. Bep.

404 b, Xen. Cyr. ii. 2. 16. For naCm, Plat. Prot. 339 o.

ky£> ovSev rovrtav iroirjcna, ko.1 ravra KivSvvtvwv.

Plat. Apol. xxiii

I will do none of these things, and that too though I am run-

ning a risk.

Note 3. The Relative occasionally is used in a concessive

sense.

For 6'o-Tis, Soph. Ai. 434, orov TruT-qp : and Arist. Ach. 57,

6'o-Tis r/0eA£ : os e£e/fyv, Antiph. Caed. Herod. 25.

Note 4. drrep, kdvrrep, bear a sort of concessive force, orperhaps rather a particularising force, that is to say, cf. if

really, Eur. Her. Fur. 1345, Lys. 12. 48; kdvwep, Plat. Apol.xii. (a General Supposition).

§ 226. Note on ei Kai, Kai el, etc.

Kai added to the Conditional particles el, kdv, r\v gives the

Conditional Sentence a concessive meaning. Kai is thusadded to any form of Conditional Sentence, which will there-fore follow the rules of Conditional Sentences. A distinctionis generally made between d Kai and koX d. Et ko.1 is said(by Hermann and Kiihner) to concede a fact, although, ko.1, da supposition, even if (a supposition). It is impossible to sup-port this theory. As /cat with d and kdv occur with everyform of conditional sentence (Indicative, Subjunctive, Opta-tive) with ordinary and general. suppositions, Kai cannot give

NOTE ON el Kai, Kai el, ETC. 251

the el or lav the power of turning any and every form of

supposition into statement of a fact. Hermann's dictum at

the most could hold good only of ei Kai and ;<ai el with theIndicative. And it is equally true here as with ordinaryconditions (without Kai) that if a fact is stated it is only byvirtue of the context. Madvig more cautiously states that

el Kai sometimes inclines more to the affirmation of the con-

dition, and that it is often only distinguished from Kai el bybeing less emphatic. This is the most we can say, the latter

part of his remark being very true. Kai in these phrases is

expletive, i.e. it emphasises theword

it precedes (as in irplv

Kai yeveo-Oai 17/ias, Plat. Phaed. 77. 6, before we came into bemgat all). It is further clear that Kai el with the Indicative

often leans to the affirmation of the condition as strongly as

ei Kai. Kai el, being more emphatic, may often mean that

even in spite of, under extreme circumstances, the Apodosis holds

good.

el Kai, with Indie, Plat. La. 182, Soph. El. 547, 0. T. 302.

Kai el, „ FjjAT.Apol. xxix., AESCH.Ars.297, Aesch.Cho. 290 (leans to the fact); Soph. Ai.

564 (do.); Soph. Ant. 234 (fut. indie.)

Plat. Apol. xix. (koi el fieXkei).

ei Kai, „ in unfulfilled conditions, Isocr. de permut.

(33), from Madvig.

Kai el, „ Plat. Polit. 276 (ApodosiseSei) ;

Dem.21.

199.

kavKaL, with Subj., Dem. 16. 24.

koi lav, „ Menand. Fr. 19 (a General Supposition);

Plat. Symp. 185, Soph. El. 25 (a General

Supposition).

Kai el, with Optat., Xen. Sell. vii. 1. 8.

ei Kai is used concessively with an ellipse of its verb in

Plat. Apol. xviii.

el Kai yeXoiorepov eforeiv.

Though the expression be ridiculous.

el Kai, in Soph. Ant. 90, is not concessive at all; Kai

emphasises the el.

ei Kai Svvrjcrei y' ' (dAA' afir\xdvu>v epq.i).

Ay, if thou wilt be able.3

FINAL SENTENCES. 253

where ws airoprjo-eis is practically a Substantival Sentence of

Indirect Statement, or <j>o/3ovp.ai dwodaveiv (to an-oOavttv), whichis the same as <j>o/3ov/j.ai 66.vo.tov.

It is not easy to give the right name to sentences of class

B. They correspond with the Latin construction euro, enitor,

efficio, with ut and the Subjunctive, which Dr. Kennedy assignsto the Indirect Petition. By an extension of the usage of

ottus, verbs of commanding and of requesting (which introducea true Indirect Petition) may take 6V<os with, a Future Indica-

tive, just as impero and poslulo, etc., take ut (or ne).

"On-cos is a Relative Modal Adverb meaning as, how, 3s

—O7r<os,

(Epic) or outos —ottojs (Attic) thus —as or how, 3s or ovrws beingthe Antecedents to 6'jnos. It is also used in Questions, /cara-

\e£oy O7r(os ^vrijo-as (Od. iii. 97), tell me how thou didst meet with.

But one of the most characteristic usages of oVcas is in ModalDeliberative Questions with the Subjunctive or Optative, after

such verbs as <f>pd£op,a.i, p.eppvr)pl{tn, e.g. cf>pd£eo-6cu oTrirtos k£

p.vi]o-T7Jpa,s KTtivgs (Od. i. 295) take counsel how thou shalt slay

the wooers. The connection between this and a Final Sentenceis obvious, e.g. Trepi(j>pa,£u>p,€6a 7ravTes voo-tov, ojtids eXdyo-i (Od.

i. 77), let us all take good counsel touching his return how (so that)

he shall reach home. The Future Indicative is used much in.

the same way as the Subjunctive, e.g. <f>pdfev oirias d\e£rjo-eLs

icaKov ijp.ap (II. ix. 251), take counsel how thou wilt avert the evil

day.

§228. FINAL SENTENCES.Final Sentences denote an end, purpose, or intention to

achieve or avert a result. They are expressed in a variety

of ways, chiefly by (1) Final Particles with the Subjunc-

tive and Optative; (2) by the Future Participle

; (3) by

Eelative Sentences; (4) in certain cases by the Infinitive.

§ 229. FINAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVEAND OPTATIVE.

The Final Particles are 'iva, &>?, and oirmi (oeppa is Epic

and Lyric only). In Negative Sentences 'iva firj, &>? prj,

oTrm m> and sometimes /«j only. In Primary Sequence

the Subjunctive is used, in Historic Sequence the Opta-Digitized by Microsoft®

254 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.

tive, but the strict Sequence is often disregarded, and the

Subjunctive used instead of the Optative.

tov kclkov Bel KoXaêiv \v dfielvcov f/.PLAT.

It is necessary to punish the criminal in order that he

may be reformed.

'ueeTevcre tovs Sucao-rd? fiera ttoWwv oaicpvwv tva

eKerjOelt). PLAT,

He entreated the jury with many tears in order that

he might be pitied.

irapaicaXels ULrpovs owo)? fit] airodavr/^. Xen.

You call in physicians in order that you may not die.

Iva ol aXKot, Tv^coan tcov Sitcaicov, ra vfierep avrcov

dvt]XlcrK€Te. DEM.

In order that the rest might obtain their rights, yon

used to spend your own resources.

For to? see Eue. Tro. 714. For p,r\ only Xen. Gyr. i.

4. 25 (Xeyerai enrelv on cnrievai fiovkoiro, fir) o Trcm)p

ti axOoiro). Mrj truly final is however rare.

Note 1. The Subjunctive and Optative are sometimes foundalternating in Historic Sequence.

to ukoWvvo.1 av6pb>7rovs ^vppd-ôv^ ttoAAous Scipov e<£cuveTo

eTvai, pr) Tiva Sia/3oAr)v o-ôlcv kcu ol o-TpariSnai Svcrvoi

&<ri. Xen. Hell. ii. 1. 2.

To put to death a number of allies was considered a dangerous

course, lest they should incur odium and the troops be

disaffected.

irapo.vXo-)(ov <f>pvKrovs jroAAovs, 6V<os acraîj to. o-rj/xtia Tots

7roAe|Utots y, (cat /mj fioriQoiev irplv o~<ftiov ol avBpes Sia-(j>vyoi.etv. THUC. ill. 22.

They were hoisting many beacons, in order that the enemies'

signals might be unintelligible to them, and that they mightnot bring aid before their own men escaped (slwuld escape).

Dr. Arnold in his well-known note on this passage explains

that the Subjunctive expresses. the immediate, and the Optativethe remote, consequence (? purpose), the second (Optative) beinga consequence upon the first (Subjunctive). Such an explana-H L

Digitized bj> Microsoft® 'r



FINAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 255

tion, however, clearly cannot apply, as Dr. Arnold thought, to

all cases, e.g. to passages where the Optative precedes the Sub-junctive (see Xen. Hell. ii. 1. 2, above, and Thuc. vi. 96).

This interchange of moods, of the graphic Subjunctive and theremoter Optative, is allowable in every variety of Greek sub-

ordinate construction.

For other instances cf. Hdt. i. 185 ; viii. 76 ; ix. 51 ; THUC.vii. 17. 4; vii. 70. 1.

Note 2. &v is sometimes joined to cos and ottws with the

Subjunctive (oc/>pa «e Epic). It adds little, if any, meaning

Possibly av may refer to an implied condition, like our Englishso (in order that so).

av is not found with the Subjunctive in Negative Final

Sentences.

"Iva av, when it occurs, is not final but indefinitely local

r).

7rctTj0is yap lore- iracr' tv' av irpdrry tls ri?.

AEIST. Plut. 1151.

The fatherland is any land where'er a man is prospering.

Examples of &>s av with Subjunctive.

cos av add-Q's, avroLKOva-ov. XEN. An. ii. 5.

Idsten in return, that you may know.

\copei 8' evdairep KareKTaves

irarepa rbv djxov, (is av kv ravrcji ddvrjv. SOPH. El. 1496.

On to the spot ev'n where thou slew'st my father,That so on that same spot thou mmfst be slain.

Cf. Aesch. P. V. 10 ; Soph. Phil. 825 ; Plat. Rep. 567 A,

Symp. 189 A.

Note 3. When av is found with cos or cm-cos and the Optative

in a Final Sentence, cos and on-cos are Modal, and the Optative

with av is an Apodosis.

cos JU.6V av CMi-ocre SiKaiovs \6yovs aueivov QiXlwirov irap-

etrKevacrOe, cos Se KioXvcran' av avrov djoycos e^£T6.

Dem. Phil. ii. 66.

As to the means by which you might express just sentiments

you are better prepared than Philip, but as to means of

checking him you are doing nothing.

/3ov\eixr6ue6a ottcos av dpuna ayiavi^olaeda. XEN. Cyr. ii. 1. 4.

Cf. Cvr. i. 2. 5. Plat. Symp. 187, d.Digitized by Microsoft®

In XEN. Hell. iv. 8. 16, o?ra>s av, ir\r]pa>6evTos vavriKov K.r.k.,

irposSloivTo, we must either explain that on-ws av wposSeoivi-o

is the Apodosis (m order that they might want), and irXripwdkvTos

the Protasis, =ei Trki)pdeiri (if the fleet were manned) : or wemust consider that Xenophon is using an Epic construction (<os

oct-us av or Kiv in Final Sentences with the Optative, e.g.

Old. ii. 53, xvii. 362).

The Optative with /*ij av occurs in Soph. Track 631,

Thuc. ii. 93.

Note 4. In a few places 6Va>s with a Future Indicative is

strictly final rather than modal And as the verb of striving,or taking precaution, does not precede in these passages, they

are noticed here under Final Sentences. The Future Indica-

tive may be regarded as a vivid form of the Subjunctive.

ov8e 8t' 'iv d'AA.o T/oI<£ovt<u rj ojnos p.a\ovvTai.

Xen. Gyr. ii. 1. 21.

And they are maintained for no other single purpose except

for fighting (lit. how they shall fight).

e<prj xprjvai dva/3i/3d^€LV e7rl rbv rpo\bv tovs airoypafavras,

cnrcos firj Trporepov vv£ ecrrai irplv 7rvdecr0ai tous avSpas

airavras. Andok. de Myst. 43.

He said that those who had been informed against ought to be

put upon the wheel (to the torture), in order to discover all

the perpetrators before night-fall.

Cf. Soph. El. 955 ; Akist. Ecc. 495.

It is doubtful whether the Future Optative, as the Obliquaof the above, ever occurs. The MSS. appear to favour other

constructions where it has hitherto been read. In Plat.Rep. 393 E, /xij ovk kirapuko-oi occurs as a virtual, rather thanliteral, obliqua of pit] ov xpalo-py : cf. H. i. 25. See Goodwin,Moods and Tenses, p. 40.

Note 5. In a few places the Optative is found in a Primary

Sequence. The Optative carries back the purpose to itsoriginal conception in the past ; the action, though still con-

tinuing in the present, was begun in the past.

TOVTOV &' 0^(0

tVa p,rj TaXamuypoiTo. ArIST. Man. 23.

I'm carrying him,

that he mayn't be inconvenienced.

i.e. I took him on my back (and am carrying him\ that he might

not be, etc.

Digitized by Microsoft® '

FINAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 257

tovtov e'xei rbv Tpowov 6 vd/ios, 'tva p,r]8k ireicrdfjvai p,rj8' e£a-

TraTrjOrjvai, yivon' €7ri T<j> S^/x«y, DEM. 22. 11 (ANDEOT. 596, 17),i.e. the original intention of the law when first made was, etc.

Cf. Xen. Cyr. iv. 2. 45 (tVa, e? ttotc Seoi, 8wa.ip.zQa, in Primarysequence).

In the same way Cicero uses the Imperfect Subjunctive to

recall the original intention : —Homines sunt hac lege generati

qui tuerentur ilium globum . . . quae terra dicitur, Oic.

Rep. vi. 15. Sic mihi perspicere videor ita natos esse nos utinter omnes esset societas quaedam, Cic. Lael. 5. Of. de Off. i.

§ 152, ii. § 1.

Cf. Eur. El. 58, and Eec. 1138 (Subjunctive followed byOptative in Primary sequence).

§ 230. Final Sentences with Past Tenses of

the Indicative.

A Final Sentence with ha (less commonly ois and 07nus)

and a Past Tense of the Indicative expresses a purpose unful-filled either in the Present (Imperfect Indicative), or in the

Past (Aorist Indicative). The Principal Sentence is either anunfulfilled Wish, or an unfulfilled Apodosis.

et yap &cf>e\ov oloi re etvtu Tot peyL&Ta Ka«a epydfecrdai, iVa

0106 Te ^crav Kal dyada ra pkyuna. PLAT. Crito, iii.

Would they had been able to do the greatest evil, in order that

they might be able (or might have now been able) to do alsothe greatest good (which they are not able to do).

icai piqv aj-wv y' tfv aKovcrai. ti Sr/ ; iv' rj/couonxs dvSptav ol

crotpwTaTot, e«ru PLAT. Euthyd. 304 E.

Well, I assure you it would have been worth hearing. Whyso ? In order that you might have heard the ablest men.

&£iov ijv of course =a£iov av fjv, similarly we should say,

It was worth hearing.

a>9 axpeXov Trdpoidev IkAhtciv fttov, k.t.A.

orrtos davibv e/cewo T# rod' r/pepa. SOPH. El. 1134,

Would God that I had first forsaken life, etc.

That death had laid thee low on that far day.

Other well-known examples are Aesch. P. V. 152 (after a

"wish) : ib. 766 (after a question equivalent to a wish) : Soph.

0. T. 1387, 1391 ; Dem. Aph. ii. 837. 11 ; iii. 849. 24.Digitized by Microsoft®

§ 231. FINAL SENTENCES WITH THE FUTUREPARTICIPLE.

A Final Sentence is often expressed by a Future

Participle : <a? is often added, denoting the thought, or the

presumed intention in the mind of the Subject of the

principal verb.

7rpeV/3et9 e? AcuceSalpova eirefiyfrav ravTa re epovvras

kcu Avaavhpovalr^o-ovTa*;. XEN.

They sent envoys to Laeedaemon to say this, and to

ask for Ly sander.

TrapecrKevd^oVTO a>s irposfiaXovvTe'; ra> Tester pari.

Thuo.

They were making preparations for an attack on the

fort (with the intention of attacking).

Note. Such a Participle is especially common after a verb

of motion.

rjSij &pa rnnivai, l/xol fiikv airoda.vovp.ivif, ip.lv Se fiiaxrofie-

vois. Plat. Apol. xxxii.

It is high time to be going, for me that I may die, for youthat you may live.

§ 232. RELATIVE FINAL SENTENCES.

A Final Sentence is expressed by oo-Tt? (less frequently

o?) with the Future Indicative. In Historic Sequence

the Future Optative would strictly be used, but the

Future Indicative (the vivid construction) is generally

\etained. The negative is pj\.

vpecrfieiav nre/VKere ^Tt? towt epel teat irdpecrTai

rots irpar/paaiv. Dem.

Send a deputation to tear this message, and to be

present at the operations.

Legatos mittite qui haec nuntient rebusque se immi3-

ecant.Digitized by Microsoft®

FINAL SENTENCES WITH THE INFINITIVE. 259

eSoge To 817/ip rpiaKovTa avhpas i\ea6ai, ol vo/m>vs

^vyiypayfrovai,. Xen.

The assembly resolved to appoint thirty men who were

to compile laws.

Cf. Xen. Cyr. viii. 6. 3 ; An. ii. 3. 6. (oi agovcriv). In

Thuc. vii. 25, the Subjunctive occurs, olmep cppaa-eoai (in

Historic sequence).

§ 233- Final Sentences with the Infinitive.

A Final Sentence is expressed by the Infinitive, chiefly after

verbs of choosing, appointing, or assigning.

ISlevo(f>(av to fjp.io'v tov o-rpaTev/MiTOs KarkXiirs <j>v\dTT£tv rb

o-rpaTOTreSov. XEN.Xenophon left half his force behind to guard the camp.

ol apxpvTes ovs e'iXeo-de apxew p.ov. PLAT. Apol. xvii.

The rulers whom you chose to rule me.

Cf. THUC. vi. 50, TrXewral re, k.t.X.

Note 1. As the Infinitive is, in its origin, a Verbal Dative,

we have a natural explanation of this use of it : jtvXarr nv, for

the guarding. We may, of course, say that the Infinitive is

explanatory (epexegetical).

Note 2. For tov with the Infinitive in a Final Sense, see

Index.

§ 234. "Ottos, ottos pvr\, MODAL WITH THEFUTURE INDICATIVE, ETC.

Ottos, 07T0)? pr) are used with the Future Indicative

(usually the 2d person) after Verbs of taking means to an

end {considering, striving, and contriving). In Primary

Sequence the Future Indicative is used; in Historic

Sequence the Future Optative may be used, but the

Future Indicative (the vivid construction) is much com-

moner.Digitized by Microsoft®

Such Verbs are :

/3ovXev<a peXet (/tot) wpdcrcrto

opca peXerht pyq-âvSpai

(TKOiro} (o-K07ro{!/ittt) tvXaSovpai irapaa-Kevafo

4>povTi^(i) irpodvp.ovp.o.1 <rirov8d£ia

itnp.iXovp.ai (pvXdo-<ra> d>vovp.ai (I manage by bribery),

Dem. de Cor. 236. 12.

And periphrases such as trpovoiav e^m, fiâv-fi ean, etc.

Cf. Latin euro, (curam, operam, negotium) do, studeo, id ago,

enitor, efficio, impetro with ut (me) and Subjunctive.

(ppovriê 077(09 fiTjBev ava^Lov cravrov Trpatjei?. ISOC.

See that thou do nothing unworthy of thyself.

Vide ne quid te indignum agas.

6Tn/j,eXrjTeov oira><; t»? apiari] o~oi earai rj ifrvyn.

Plat.

You must strive that your soul may be as good as

possible.

Enitendum est ut tibi quam optimus sit animus tuus.

eire/jbeXeiro 07ra>? firjTe aavroi fir^re aTroroi, eaotvro.

Xen.He was taking precautions that they should be neither

without food nor drink.

eirpaa-crov 0Tra><; Tt? Boydeia tfjjei. THtTC.

They were arranging for the arrival of reinforcements.

Note 1. The 1st and 3d person are very rare. In Dem.Chers. 99. 14 (oVus id^X-qo-ovo-i) ; in Ar. Eccl. (ottuk KadeSov-p.e9a).

Note 2. Instead of the Future Indicative the Subjunctiveand Optative (Present and Aorist) less often occur, thoughnot uncommonly.

bpa oVcos prj irapo. 6o£av op.oXoyfjs. PLAT. Grit.

See that you are not surprised into making an admission.

kp,tpiXr)K€i aijTOts oirios o hnray pk-nys dSurj ovs Scot, Trepwciv.

Xen. Hell, iii 3. 9.

They had taken care that the Cavalry-Commissioner shouldknots who shovfflgkitSWtfy Microsoft®

Omar, Sjray pi,, WITH FUTURE INDICATIVE. 261

In Lys. 12. 44 an Aorist Optative is followed by a FutureIndicative (eTrefiovXevea-Oe ojnos pr^re rj/rj^ia-aicrde, iroWZv reevSeeis eaeo-de).

Note 3. Variants, of rare occurrence for oVais with theFuture Indicative are 6V17 (Thuo. i. 65, yevrjo-erai.) ; 6Y<j> rpoinp

(THUC. iv. 128, ^vfj./3-tja-eTai) ; eg otov rpoirov (DEM. Megal. 207).(is is found instead of fo-cos with a Subjunctive or Optative

(Xen. Oec. xx. 8, Aesoh. P. K 203), but seldom with a FutureIndicative (Xen. Cyr. iii. 2. 13).

Note 4. ai/ is sometimes found with oVcos and the Subjunc-tive, cf. PLAT. Gorg. 481 A (prjxavrjreov oVcos av Siacpvyrj), butnever with 6V«os and the Future Indicative. The Optative(Present or Aorist) with av in this construction is an Apodosis.Cf. XEN. Oec. ii. 9 (eTripeXeurOai 6V(os av yevoiTo).

Note 5. M-q is found, instead of oVws pr,, with the Subjunc-tive (rarely with the Future Indicative) after o-kottu, 6pS>,

evXa/3ovpai, <pvXdo-o-opai, just as after Verbs of Fearing.

Conversely oVcos pr,, instead of the simple pr,, is used after

Verbs of Fearing. Cf. the next section, page 265. Cf. Soph.PHI. (opa pr. Trapes), 0. C. 1180 ; Plat. Symp. 213 d. In Xen.Cyr. iv. 1. 18 (opa pr, Serjo-ei), evXafieio-dai prj, PLAT. Prot. 321 A;evXa/3eicrdai to p.r), PLAT. Rep. 539 A; tf>v\aj-<recr6a.i pr, is fairly

common.Note 6. kinp.eXovp.ai is found with an Infinitive in Thuc. vi.

54. 6, Xen. Comm. iv. 7. 1, Appian, Civ. v. 73. So cwo occurs

with the Infinitive in Cic. de Fin. iii. 19. 62 (natura . . . diligi

procreatos non curaret). Poppo, Thtjc. vi. 54. So also <f>vXao--

crop.a.1. pr) iroielv, to pr, Troielv, I guard against doing, Dem. 773.

1, 313. 6.

Note 7. o-kottZ is followed by el interrogative (Soph. Ant. 41).

See similar construction with Verbs of Fearing, Note, p. 266.

Note 8. In one or two places Sei precedes oVws with the

Fut. Indicative, e.g. Soph. Ai. 556, Set o-e oVws 8et'£eis : Phil. 55,

o-e SeT oVus eKKXexj/eis. Jebb (note to Soph. Ai.556)

quotes

Ckatinus (apud Athenaeum), Set o-' 6Va>s dXeKrpvovo's pr,8ev

8io«ras tous Tpoirovs. There seems to be a confusion betweentwo constructions ; Set with the Infinitive, and some verb like

opa, a-Koitei with 6Vios and the Future Indicative. In Aeist.

Eq. 926 we have o-irevarw o-e 6V<os av eyypa<t>rjs, which howevermay be regarded simply as an instance of Antiptosis, i.e. o-e,

the Subject to eyypa<f>fjs, is made the Object to anrevo-o>, which

is a Verb just like on-ouSaftu or jrpaWu.Digitized by Microsoft®

§ 235. ELLIPTICAL USE OF onus, 6Vws fiij, WITHTHE FUTURE INDICATIVE.

"Ottco<;, 07t<b9 /j-v are used with the Future Indicative

in exhortations and prohibitions, when no principal

sentence has preceded. All three persons are found,

though the second is commonest.

aXK 07T&)? avrjp ecrei. Eue. Gycl. 595.

Come, be a man

oVco? Se tovto /j/r) StSafet? /jbr/Sevl. Ae. Nub.

Mind you don't tell this to anybody.

<jf>epe hi) 6V(os /Jbe/J.vrja-6/j.eda ravra. PLAT. Gorg. 495 D.

Well, then, let us be swre to remember this.

07T(l)S TCHJTOt, |«.)jS£tS dv6p(O7r0>V 7T£lJO"eT0U, LYS. i. 21.

See that not a soul hears of this.

Observe that this construction is generally introduced by aword, d\\d, oBv, Se, sometimes by aye vw (Ae. Nub. 490).

Note. The Subjunctive occasionally is found :

on-tos ye jui) e^om-oiTTjOTj qfia.'S. PLAT. Prot. 313 C.

Mind he does not deceive us.

§236."O77-WS, oVtus fJLT]

WITH VERBS OF COM-MANDING AND FORBIDDING.For this Construction, see Indirect Petition. It is, of

course, the same as oVa? after Verbs of taking means to

an end, although an extension of it. There is a natural

connexion between, " Take care to do so," and " I bid you

do so." But for the sake of convenience the rule andexamples are given elsewhere.

§ 237. VERBS OF FEARING WITH ju/jy, ANDjXTj OV.

Verbs and phrases denoting fear are followed by /j,rj

and /m) ov with the Subjunctive (in Primary Sequence),Digitized by Microsoft®

VERBS OF FEARING WITH pij AND tf oi. 263

and the Optative (in Historic Sequence). The Subjunc-

tive may, by the graphic construction, of course be sub-

stituted for the Optative.

Se'Souca fjuq ravra yevr/rai.

I fear this will happen.

Vereor ne haec fiant.

SeSoiKa fir) ov ravra yevi)rai.

I fear this will not happen.

Vereor ut (ne non) haec fiant.

e&eSoliceiv fvq (prj ov) ravra yevoiro or yevrjrai.

Verebar ne (ut) haec fierent.

Observe that yj\ does not negative, the verb ; it expresses

a surmise that the result will occur. Ov on the otherhand is privative and negatives the verb.

Se&oiKa fvq ov% bcnov y.

I fear it will not be righteous (i.e. unrighteous).

For firj, fjuri ov and the Subjunctive, etc., without a

principal verb see the Chapter onNegatives.

Verbs of fearing are :

(f>o@odfiai, Seo? earl rrifypLica (mostly poet.)

SeSotKa, Seivdv ecrri rpe'eo (mostly poet.)

SeSouca fir) hnXadafieOa rr}<; o'Uahe 6Bov. Xen.

I fear we shall forget the way home.

omen eirerWevro $eSoiicore<; fir] arrorfM]6elr)o-av. Xen.

They were no longer attacking from fear of being

cut off.

S&ifiev firi ov fiefiaioi r\re. ThUC.

We fear you are not trustworthy.Digitized by Microsoft®

6^>o/3etTO to a-Tparevfia fir) eiri ttjv avrov j^rnpav

(TTparevTjTai. Xen.

He was afraid that the army would march against

his own country.

ovSev Seivov pr) kv epol o-rr\. PLAT. Apol. xv.

There is no fear (likelihood) of the rule breaking downin my case.

Obs. In Xen. Mem. i. 2. 7, we have Wavpafc d tjs <f>ofioLTo

pr) 6 yevopevos /caAos Kayadbs pr) X™/Hv *£°h instead of pr) ovXapiv e£oi, an abnormal construction not found elsewhere.

Note 1. As these Verbs of Fearing denote doubt and appre-

hension as much as downright fear, their construction is

followed by many Verbs which in other senses take other con-

structions, but which when denoting apprehension, anxiety,

suspicion lest or whether, are followed by pr\ and pr) ov.

Suchverbs

are verbs of caution in the sense of anxiety((f>povTc£a>, evvoio, 6pm, o~kott&, ev\af3ovp.a.i, <f>v\d<T<T<i) (-0/j.ai)

6kvZ, I hesitate or scruple (from fear, or pity, or shame)viroTneuis), I suspect, cMricrTft) (a7rixrTiav e'x a > Trape^i) in the senseof suspecting rather than disbelieving, kivSwos lo-n.

wroiTTevopev pr) ov koivoI airo[3rJTe. ThTJC. iii. 53.

We suspect that you will not prove impartial.

okvo) pr) pot 6 Awtas rajreivos 4" XVV- PLAT. Pol. 368.

cfrpovTifo fir) KparuTTOvfj

poi cnyav, XEN. Mem. iv. 2. 39.

I am thinking that it may be best for me to say nothing.

Cf. PLAT. Phaed. 70 A (aTria-Tiav 7rap£)(ei pi) ovSapov) PLAT.Theaet. 183 E (alo-xwopevos pr), a very rare construction withthis verb) ; SOPH. Tr. 1129 (evX.a/3eur6ai pr) (j>avfj<s) ; Thuc. iv.

11 (<j>v\.do-o-eo-6ai pr) ^vvrptipaxriv).

Consult the Index for other meanings and constructions of

these verbs.Note 2. Instead of the Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing

the tenses of the Indicative are used.

(1) The Future Indicative as a graphic substitute for theSubjunctive.

(j>o/3ovpai, prj Ttvas ijSovas r)8ovais evprjaopev evavrt'as.

Plat. Phileb. 13 a.

I apprehend that we shall find some pleasures opposite topleasures. Digitized by Microsoft®

VERBS OF FEARING WITH pf, AND pi, ov. 265

Cf. PLAT. Rep. 451 A (cpofiepov re /cat o-<paXepbv fifj Kelcrofiai).

In Aesch. Pers. 112, the Subjunctive and Future Indicative

are co-ordinate, p-q irvdrp-cu koX eWeron, ireo-fl (Se). See Ghoeph.257. So Eur. H. F. 1054, Ar. Ecc. 493.

(2) ojriDs fx-fj with the Future Indicative, Subjunctive, or

Optative, as after verbs of taking means to an end in the pre-

vious section.

drap tov Saipovos

SeSoi^' 07T(os pfj rev^Ofjuu Ka.Ko8aip.ovos. Ar. Eg. 112.

But Im afraidThis genius will turn out my evil genius —(Frere).

SeSoix' 07TO)S p) dvdyKrj yevr/Tat. DEM. Phil. ill. 130. 14.

I fear that a necessity may arise.

(3) cos with the Future Indicative. o>s does not (like ott<os)

appear to have a modal force, but to introduce an Indirect

Statement, as if SeSoiKa or <po/3ovpai meant I fear, thinking that.

dvSpbs prj <po/3ov d>s <Mroj0ij(7«s dglov. Xen. Cyr. v. 2. 12.

Do not fear that you will be at a loss for a worthy man.

Cf. Soph. El. 1309, Xen. Cyr. vi. 2. 30, Dem. PhU.

iv. 1. 141.

In Eur. Herod. 248 (o7ra>s, as on-cus is occasionally used in

Indirect Discourse).

When on follows a Verb of Fearing it seems to introduce

an ordinary causal (or rather explanatory) sentence.

OTi 8e ttoXXZv dpx ovo ~i py <j>o[3r]8r)Te. Xen. Sell. iii. 5. 10.

Do not be afraid because they rule many.

Though we jnight translate, do not be afraid thinking that.

Note 3. The Infinitive, Future, Present or Aorist is also used.

ov tpofSovpeda eAao-owecrflcu. THUC. V. 105.

We are not afraid that we shall be beaten.

The Future Infinitive is here = the more usual p; with

Subjunctive.

(po/3ovp.<u SieXiyx^v ere pj wroXa/Bys. PLAT. Gorg. 457 E.

I am afraid to refute you lest you should suppose.

The latter construction (with the Present or Aorist) is

common enough, andis the ordinary objective construction

common to verbs oMearing.with mara of the verbs mentioned

in Note 1, e.g. <j>of3ovfj,a.t. dSiKttv, I fear to do wrong ; aio-\vvoixai

dSiKeiv, I am ashamed to do wrong ; KivSwevui dSinetv, I rim a

risk of doing wrong ; <t>v\do-trw /trjSlva dSiKeiv, I take care that noone does wrong. Cf. Latin, culpari metuit fides; penna metuente

solvi, etc., in Hokace.

Note 4. Observe the following distinctions :

1. $ofSovjj.a.i, dSiKeiv.

I fear to do wrong (and so refrain).

2. <f>of3ovp.ai p/q olSlkZ.

I fear I shall do wrong.

3. <j>o/3ovp.ai aStKTjcreti'.

I fear I shall do wrong (very rare for 2).

4. <fiof3ovjji.ai to aSiKeiv.

I fear wrong-doing (generally, by myself, or by another.)

Note 5. Verbs of Fearing are also followed by tl interroga-

tive.

ov SeSoiKa el 3>tA.nr7ros £y. Dem. Fals. Leg. 434. 6.

I have no fear whether Philip is alive (i.e. I have no fear as

to that question).

Cf. Eur. Herac. 791, Xen. Hell. xi. 1. 4 (&roi).

Note 6. av is not used with the Subjunctive after Verbs ol

Fearing. Whenthe Optative is found with av it

is anApodosis.

§ 238. Verbs of Fearing, etc., with the Indicative.

When the result has actually occurred, or is occurring, theverb with /«j is in the Indicative.

Thus : SeSoiKa fxr/ dpuxprdvys (or dp,dpTr)s).

I fear you will make a mistake.

But SeSoiKa pvr) afiaprdveis.

I fear you (actually) are making a mistake.

SeSoiKa /at] ^jxapTTr/Kas.

I fear you have made a mistake.

So SeSoiKa firj rjfidpTaves (you were making a mistake); /mj

riuapTss, that you made a mistake.lr r'

3Digitized by Microsoft®

VERBS OF FEARING, ETC., WITH INDICATIVE. 267

1. The Present Indicative :

<t>o/3ei<rde fir) SwrKoXdyrepov ti Sta/ca/tat. PLAT. Phaed. XXXV.You are afraid that I am

masomewhat more fretful state

ofmmd.eiria-\es, ws av Trpov£epevvrj<rio oti/Sov,

fir] Tts TroXirlov kv rpifiip ^avTaferot,

Ka.fi.01 fiev eXdy, k.t.X. EUR. Phoen. 92.

Yet stay, that first I may explore the path,

Lest any citizen now is visible

Upon the road, and one shall come to me.

Cf. Ion, 1523, Soph. El. 580. Similarly opZfiev fir) NWasoterai, PLAT. Loch. 179 B. elo-6fieo-8a fir) KaXvirrei, SOPH.Antig. 1253. Surrd^ofiev fir) rvyx^vei, Plat. Soph. 235 A.

(TK£JJ/(Ofie6a fir) Xavddvei, PLAT. Ly. 216 C.

2. The Imperfect Indicative :

opa fir) rraifov eXeyev. PLAT. Theaet. 145 B.

Have a care that he was not speaking in jest.

3. The Perfect Indicative :

<j>of3ovfiai fir) dfn,(f>OTGpo>v afia rjfiapTrJKafiev. ThUC. iii. 53.

I fear that we have missed both objects at once.

Cf. Plat. Lys. 218 r>, Dem. 19. 26 (Fate. Leg. 372. 1).

4. The Aorist Indicative does not appear to occur in Attic.

See Hom. Od. v. 300.

5. The Future indicative may be regarded as a graphic

substitute for the Subjunctive {supra). 1

§ 239. Note on Dawes's Canon.

Dawes laid down the rule that after mrws fir] and ov fit], the

First Aorist Passive, and the SecondAorist

Active, Middle,and Passive may be used, but not the First Aorist Active or

Middle. Instead of the First Aorist Active and Middle, he

said that the Future Indicative must be used. Subsequent

1 So at least in Attic. But if the original force of the Subjunctive

was imperative (denoting will) rather than future (a point on which it

is impossible to speak dogmatically), the Subjunctive in the oldest

Greek would mean shall rather than will, and would be more direct and

vivid than the Future. See Monro's Homeric Grammar, pp. 231 and 238.

critics extended Dawes's Canon to oVws (without /«j), and set

about changing a First Aorist Active and Middle, wherever

they were found in a text, to a Future Indicative. The sole

ground for this arbitrary rule of Dawes is the resemblance in

form between the First Aorist Active and Middle and the

Future Indicative, e.g. KATOKNHCHIC (kch-okv^s, Soph.

El. 956) and KATOKNHCEIC (kotokv^is) ; SYAAESHTAIl&XXkfrrai) and KYAAESETAI (£v\\%ertu).

_Naturally

this resemblance of form might incline a Greek writer to avoid

confusion by using a second Aorist (if it existed) rather than

a First Aorist. Dawes made no objection to a First AoristSubjunctive Passive, because it bears no resemblance in formto a Future Indicative. But Dawes's Canon rests on no solid

foundation of grammar, and breaks down completely onexamination. Instances of the First Aorist Subjunctive

Active and Middle in which all the MSS. agree are oVcos /*i)

iiriPor]6r)<r(jxTi (THUC. iv. 66) ; otto>s /mj /3ov\6vo"r)<r6e (THUC. i.

73); 07rws firj Ipyda-rjcrde, Lys. 138. Secondly, in some cases

the First Aorist Active does not resemble in form the FutureIndicative, and therefore cannot possibly be changed. E.g.

Soph. Phil. 381, ou ft») eKn-Aeuo-gs : the Future is eKTrXeva-ovfiai,

and the second person would be l/orAcuo-et not Iktt Aeixras. SoPlat. Rep. x. 609, an-oAeo-g, the Future is a-rroXZ -. Soph. El.

1122, kAohjo-g), First Aorist Active, where the Future wouldbe KXavo-ovftai. And, lastly, the change made would in somecases spoil the metre.

270 CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE SENTENCES.

§ 241. wcrre with Indicative and Infinitive.

A. wore with the Indicative is parallel with 6'ti and the

Indicative, that is to say, it introduces the Indicative as

a statement almost, sometimes quite, independent of. the

Principal Sentence.

Thus : roaovrov <ri> i[iov iro^xoTepos «, (Sore <ru p.ev eyvu>Kas —eya) Se dyvoai. Pl. ^4po?. xiii.

So much wiser are you than J, that (and so) you have

discovered, while I am ignorant, etc.

This introductory force of wo-te is best shown by its

familiar usage at the beginning of a sentence where it is a

synonym for oSv, roti/uv, and may be rendered and so, conse-

quently, therefore.

els rrjv vo-repaiav ovx fJKev 1 urcracfaepvrjs' &crd' ol EAA/qves

e<f>p6vTi£ov. Xen. An. ii. 3. 25.

On the morrow Tissaphernes did not appear. Consequently

the Greeks began to consider, etc.

So with an Imperative.

dvrjTos 8' 'O/oamjs' Sxrre p.rj Xtav oreve. SOPH. El. 1172.

Orestes was but mortal Therefore grieve not too sore.

Occasionally this introductory force of (Sore is seen evenwith an Infinitive.

&t' e/te epavrbv dveptnTav (after a colon or full stop).

Plat. Apol. viii.

And so I was questioning myself.

As wore, like on, is merely introductory, it can be followed

by any construction which an independent sentence can take,

e.g. Imperative (supra) : wore p-rj a.iroKap.-Q%, Plat. Crit. 45.

wore av with Optative, wore av SiSdcrKoiTc, Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 35.

wore dv krokpiqo-ev, Lys. 7. 28.

B. Stare with Infinitive. *

Sxrre with the Infinitive is epexegetical, i.e. explanatory ofthe Principal Verb. It is doubly so, for Sio-re is an explanatoryparticle, and the Infinitive is in its own nature explanatory.

Indeed wore with the Infinitive, as will be seen below, often

takes the place of the simple Infinitive. The consecutive useof Stare with the Infinitive is only one among several of these

explanatory usages. The result contemplated, i.e. the purpose.c J ° Digitized by Microsoft®? * r'

fl<rr£ WITH INDICATIVE AND INFINITIVE. 271

may be denoted ; the condition or limitation; the command or

advice. The character of the explanation or definition will

depend upon the nature of the Principal Verb or Sentence.

1. A Purpose, or Contemplated Result.

x&v iroiovcriv iScrre /jlyj Sikjjv SiSovai.

Plat. Gorg. 479 c.

They do anything to avoid punishment.

Cf. Plat. Phaed. 114, <2ore fierao-xetv.

2. Limitation or Condition (cf. e<j>' $, «<£'

$Te).

^v/ifiaxiav iTroirj<ravTO kin. ToicrSe, <S(rT£ /tij o-Tpareijciv

£5ri nEA.o7rovvijo-ioi;s. THUC. hi. 14.

They made an alliance on these conditions, that they were

not to serve against the Peloponnesians.

3. A Petition or Command.

irelOovcriv fixne "Apyei tTrixup^o-ai. THUC. iii. 103.

They try to induce them to attack Argos.

The Infinitive alone would be more usual here.

Cf. THUC. viii. 45, Sxrre diroKTeivai. SOPH. 0. C. 969, <3ore

6aveiv, ordaining, requiring, to the effect, that he should die.

4. The definitive force (denoting the character, degree, or

extent) is well shown in the following :

ireurofini yap ov

roo~evTov ov&ev &o~Te p.r) ov koASs davtiv.

Soph. Ant. 97.

I shall suffer naught

So great as not to die a noble death (i.e. nothing which

will prevent my dying, etc.).

For fifj ov see chapter on the Negatives.

5. wore is freely used with the Infinitive, where the Infini-

tive alone might be used.

jravu p,oi 1/ieAijtrev <5crre ciSevat. XEN. Cyr. VL 3. 19.

i" was greatly concerned to know.

irorepa fl-atSes «crt <f>povt,ji,WTtpoi wore p.a6dv rj avSpts

Xen. Cyr. iv, 3. 11.

Are boys more sensible at learning than mm?

272 CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE SENTENCES.

p,ei£ov rj (Sore <f>epeiv.

Too great to bear.

Maius quam quod tolerari possit.

ipvxpbv vStap (Sore kovcrcurdai. XEN. An. iii. 13. 3.

The water is cold for bathing.

p.rj)(aval 7rohXai t'uriv wore Siacfrevyew Odvarov.

Plat. Apol. xxix.

There are many shifts for escaping death.

<is is more rarely so used, cf. Xen. Cyr. iv. 5. 15, & lyrcpcn-eis

iivai.

Note 1. Can &a-re with the Infinitive state a fact? The Infini-

tive, of course, denoting as it does the abstract verbal notion,

cannot, like the Indicative, definitely state a fact. &o-re, withthe Infinitive, is parallel with irpiv and the Infinitive, Sid withthe Infinitive, or any similar substantival use of the Infinitive.

The fact, though not stated, is not excluded. More than this,

the expression may evidently be a variant for &cne with theIndicative, open for a writer to use. This occurs when there

is no demonstrative in the Principal Sentence requiring defini-

tion. In this way irplv ainivai avrov, before his departure, maypractically mean, before he departed; Sta to pjSeva irapeivai,

because of the presence of no one, may mean, because no one waspresent.

i K\£ap)(os -ijXavvev eirl roiis Mevtovos, wore eicelvovs Ik-

TreK\rjydo.i.XEN. An. i. 5. 13.

Glearchus was marching against Menon's men, so that they

were in a state of amazement.

dp,<f>l Se

kvkXovvto irdo~av vfjcrov, &(tt' dp.rj\aveiv

envoi rpdwoLVTO. Aesch. Pers. 460.

They round aboutEncircled the whole isle, so that the foe

Knew not which way to turn them.

Cf. Euk. Hec. 730.

Note 2. wore with av and the Infinitive, wore with theInfinitive may be an (oblique) Apodosis, and therefore av will

go with the Infinitive.

kyio €7T4 tcwctSc iX(a acrre av dvayiutirOyjvai,, k.t.X.

Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 20.

For Sore ov with the Infinitive, see Negatives.Digitized by Microsoft®

274 CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITA TIVE SENTENCES.

TOiavra erarovres om koi toiis trapovTai a\ue<r6ai..

Plat. Gorg. 457.

Saying such things that even the company was annoyed.

"Oarii (more rarely 6?), with the Indicative, is Con-

secutive (parallel to wore with Indicative). Negative ov.

t/s owTta? evrjdrjs earlv Vjxmv barns ajvoei ravra ;

Dem.

Who of you is so simple that he is ignorant of this ?

Quis vostrum tam stultus est ut (qui) haec ignoret?

ouSels av yevoiro owtos dSa/jLavrivo's 6's av fieiveiev.

Plat. Rep. ii. 360 B.

No one would prove so steeled against temptation as to remain

firm.

av puveiev is, of course, an Apodosis. For 6's see Soph. Phil.

409, 444, Ai. 471.

§ 244. LIMITATIVE OR RESTRICTIVESENTENCES.- 1

ware (oycrre fir]), e<f> a>, e<f> are (jirj).

On condition that, on the understanding that.

ao-re (mo-re /*ij) with Infinitive.

e<j> a>, e<j> mre with Infinitive (Negative /mj), or Future

Indicative (Negative ov or firj).

egrjp avTois ra>v aWcov ap%eiv EWyvav w<tt avTovs

viraicoveiv tw fiaaiXei. Dem. 6. 11.It was in their power to rule the rest of the Greeks if

they themselves would obey the King.

1 With &<ne Limitative compare the use of ut in Latin :

Bonis viris ita fides habetur ut nulla sit iis fraudis suspitio.

Cic. Off. ii. 33.

Good men are trusted only when there is no suspicion of disJionestyagainst them.

D/g/feed by Microsofm

LIMITATIVE OR RESTRICTIVE SENTENCES. 275

aw^ie/AeV ae ern tovt one fiTjKen <pi\ocro<f>ei,v.

Plat.

We acquit you, on the understanding that you na

longer pursue philosophy (ita ut philosophari

desinas).

'BiVvefSriaav ecjb aire efyaatv etc Ue\.oTrovvr\aov inro-

airovSoL (/cat n^heiroTe eTTi^Tja-ovrai avTr/i).

Thuo.

They surrendered on the condition that they should

leave the Peloponnese under truce (and never again

set foot on it).

Observe that the Future Indicative is used in Historic

Sequence.

Note. The Nominative Attraction is observed :

us av oiStos kdkXoi tol dXXorpia ajroo-Teptlv i<f>' $ KaKo8o£os

thai,. Xen. Ag. 4. 1.

CHAPTEE VII.

§245. CAUSAL SENTENCES. *

Causal sentences are expressed in a variety of ways.

A. By Causal Particles and a Finite Mood.

B. By Belative Sentences.

C. By Participles.

D. In various miscellaneous ways.

A. Causal Particles.

The common Causal Particles are also the Temporal

Particles, e-rrel, eweihri, <»? (cf. Latin cum). The negative

is ov, and the Indicative is the Mood.

TidTjfii ere 6fj,o"KojovvTa eirebhr] ovk airoKpivei. Pl. Ap.

I assume that you consent, since you do not answer.

e-ireo ovk ehvvavro ~Xafi{3aveiv to %a>ptov airievat rjSrj

eireyeipovv. Xen. Anab. v. 2. 5.

As they were not able to take the place they were nowtrying to go away.

Eor eVet&j with Imperfect, Thtjc. i. 102. For lirel, see

Xen. An. v. 2. 5. For «?, Soph. Phil. 46, 914.

Note 1. When, however, the sentence is explanatory of whathas preceded, 6'rt, Si<m, Stcnr^p are used. These particles

cannot introduce a Causal Sentence like «r«', etc. (cf. ore

Temporal).

t/>«7P?js fie a-^a-ayixkvi] a.vdpu>iru>v Sid rt aAAo <f>o/3epov otti

7] on Taxy 7rA.ef; 81a Se Tt aAAo aXvTrot, dXX-jXoi'; ot

cpirXeovTes tj Sloti kv ra£« KdOrjvTai ; XEN. Oec. viii. 8.

For what other reason is a trireme full of men dangerous,except because it sails fast i And for what other reason dothose who are on board occasion no alarm to one another,

except because they sit still in their ranks ?

27a Digitized by Microsoft®

CAUSAL SENTENCES. 27}

Note 2. A Causal Sentence in Historic Sequence is foundin the Optative when it expresses the indirect words or

thoughts (virtual oratio obliqua).

tov IleptK-Aia Ikixki^ov, oti (TTparqyb<s &v ovk tiri^ayoi.

Thuc. ii. 21.

They were abusing Pericles, because, though general, he did not

lead them out into the field.

on ovk hregrjyev would have been the simple explanation of

the historian.

In Periclem invehebantur quod, cum praetor esset, noneduceret.

Of. Lrv. ii. 7. Matronae annum ut parentem Brutumluxerunt, quod tam acer ultor violatae pudicitiae fuisset.

is occurs similarly in Xen. Symp. iv. 6, oTo-6a erraiveo-avTa.

avrbv tov 'Ayap.ep.vova, ois ftao-iXevs elrj dyaOos, because (as hesaid) he was. Both oti and ws may, however, be regarded as

introducing an Oblique Statement, the verb of saying beingimplied in eicaKtfov and ewaiveo-avTa. But in Xen. Mem. i. 4.

19, we have eirctirep fjytjo-aivTo, which must be causal or ex-

planatory. And in Xen. Hell. vii. 1. 34, we have e?x € Aeyeiv

J)S Sua tovto irokeprfjo-eiav, oti ovk kOeXrjO-aiev, where we have a

real blending of on causal and oVt of the Oblique Statement.

Note 3. oVe (just like cum in Latin) besides being Temporal,

is also Causal.

6Ve Toivvv tovQ' oijtcds ex e'i

^poo"fjKsi irpodvfims ediXeiv

aKOveiv. DEM. 01. i. 9. 3.

Since then this is so, it behoves you to be heartily willing to

listen. Quae cum ita sint, etc.

Observe that this Causal 6t£, unlike the Temporal 6Ve, can

begin a sentence.

6V o$v ToiovSe xpr)o-p,bv elo-qKovcrapxv.

Soph. El. 38, Phil. 428, Ant. 170, Ai. 1231.

Cum vero huiusmodi oraculum accepissemus.

Observe that oti cannot be elided.

ottots is similarly used. Thuc. ii. 60, Pl. Leg. 895 b.

eSre causal is poetical (Soph. Ai. 715) : ottov, causal only in

Ionic.

oOovveKo. (otov evtKa) in a causal sense occurs in Soph. Ai123 153. Digitized by Microsoft®

278 CAUSAL SENTENCES.

B. Causal sentences are also expressed by relatives

09,6?

ye, ooTt?, 00-7-49 ye, with the Indicative.

Latin qui or quippe qui with Subjunctive.

7raj? cj>epei<; yap 69 76 auTos oj(el ; Ae.

Why how d'ye hear, when you're being carried yourself?

OavfjLaaTov 7rotet9 09 rjfuv ovBev §(.oa>9. XEN.

You are acting strangely in giving us nothing.

= on ovSev 818009.

Mirum facis qui nobis nihil des.

7r(0S 01J KaKKTTOS OOTtS 7T£pi ffAttOVOS 7T0t£l TOUS Ka/COUpyoUSJ

Jfwstf you not be a scoundrel since you are making much of

evildoers? Dem. 24. 107.

os ye, Soph. El. 911. 6'o-tis, Soph. 4wi!. 696.

iVbte. Other relatives (pronouns and adverbs) are similarly

used.

•njv [irjrepa ipaKapi^ov, otW T6KV0)V eKvpr)(re. HDT. i. 31.

They were counting the mother happy in having been blest

with such children.

—on TOiovTtav eKvpyarev.

evSaipwv pot iffyaivero, (lis dSeus ereAeura. PLAT. Phaed. ii

I deemed him happy, so fearlessly did he meet death.

= oti oiVeos dSews, not an uncommon use of (is.

C. Participles are frequently used in a Causal Sense. TheNegative is ov. are (are Sij), olov, ofa 8rj often accompany theParticiples in this use (also Sunt in Herodotus).

6 Kvpos, are ttcus &v, t^Seto tjj <TTo\.rj. XEN. Cyr. i. 3. 3.

Cyrus, boy-like, was charmed with the dress.

01J8' av evi vireiK&Ooipt. Sewras davarov. PLAT. Apol. XX.There is not a man to whom I would yield through fear of

death.

Kkyia Se tovB' eWca, /3ovX6pevoi oo£ou o-oi oVep kpoi.

Plat. Phaed. 102 d.

/ speak for the following reason, because I want you to think

just as I do.

See also Genitive /a^zA*6pgwJ3#feo&J>solute.

CHAPTER VIII.

§ 246. EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH.

I. A Wish that refers to the Future, and which there-

fore may be fulfilled, is expressed

A. Bythe Simple Optative.

B. By the Optative with elde, el yap (el and w?, 7tg>s

av ; in poetry).

The Negative is always p,r\.

w iral, yevoio irarpo's evTV^ecrrepo<;,

to, 8' a\X' o/ioto9, Kai yevoi av ov icaicos. SOPH.

Boy, may si thou prove more fortunate than thy father,

Like in all else, so shouldst thou prove not vile.

Observe that yevoio alone expresses a wish, yevoi av is

an Apodosis.

/XT] £00971/ p,er afiovcrias. EUE.

May I not live without culture !

el yap yevoiprjv, t&kvov, olvtI <rov veKpos. EUK. Hipp. 1410.

Would to God, my child, I were dead in thy stead.

eW vp.lv ap<f>otv vovs yevoiro crwcjipoveiv. SOPH. Ai. 1264,

Would that to you twain judgment were granted for discretion

el poi ykvono <fi06yyos iv fipayioo-i. EUR. Hec. 836.

Oh, that a voice were given me m these arms.

cos 6 rd.Se iropiav oXono. SOPH. El. 126.Ah, that he who contrived this might perish.

Cf. Euk. Hipp. 407.

7TC0S av dvT epov rpe<f>oiTe TijVSe ttjv vocrov

Soph. Phil. 794.

Would that in my stead ye might hug this plague.

prj 7rcos ey(a Tocravras SiKas <j>vyoipi. PLAT. Apol. iii.

May not I be indicted on charges so serious 1

289 Digitized by Microsoft®

EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH. , , H. 281.

) ' J

/' -* -"• j -

"• -

II. A Wish which refers to the Past, and which there-

fore can no longer be fulfilled, is expressed — yjv <

{Imperfect Indicative (of pre-

sent time, continued or ha-

bitual actions).

Aorist Indicative (of single

acts).

B. m<pe\ov (Aorist), sometimes wfyeKkov (Imperfect),

from o<pei\as, I owe, with the Infinitive (Present or Aorist).

e'l0e, el yap (p,rj) may accompany w<j>e\ov, sometimes min poetry.

e'bd' et^e?, w reicovcra, /SeXTtous <f>peva<;.

EUK. El. 1061.

Would that thou hadst, mother, better judgment (but

thou hast not).

e'ide (TO(,, m Hepi/ckeis, Tore crvve<yevofi-r}v.

Xen. Mem. i. 2. 46.

I wish I had been with you then, Pericles.

to? w<f>e\ov irdpoidev e/cKnrelv fiiov. SOPH. El. 1131.

Ah, would that I had first forsaken life.

effi &<f>e\es roidSe ttjv yviapvqv warpos

OvrjcrKOVTOs eivai. SOPH. El. 1021.

Would thou hadst been thus mmded on the day thy father

(irfTOT d>cj>e\eLV Xvmivttjv 2/cijpov. Soph. Phil. 969.

Would that I ne'er had left

My Scyros !

(09 irplv SiSa£cu y' (3<£eA.es fiea-os Siappayrjvai.

Akist. Ban. 955.

Pity, ere ymitaught 'em, that you didn't burst asunder m

the midst. Dj g j t/zed by Microsoft®

282 EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH.

Note 1. A wish may be made to depend on a condition whichis expressed by ovtw. Instead of the sentence which logically

should follow " so may I . . . as," an Indicative or an Impera-tive is substituted.

ovrta viK-f)0-aip,i r' eyib kcu vop,i£oip.r]V cro<£6s,

(is v/ias rjyovfiai etvai Oearas Serious. Ar. Nub. 520.

So may I win and be considered wise, as I hold you to be a

clever audience.

oiircos ovalpvqv twv renviav, jxtsxm tov avSp' enelvov.

Ar. Th. 469.

So may I be blest in my children . . . I do hate that fellovj.

ovto)<$ ovaia-de tovtuiv, firj TrepuSrjTe p*c. DEM. Aph. ii. 842. 9.

So may you enjoy this . . . do not neglect me.

Instead of saying on this condition, namely, that you do not

neglect me.

This is exactly like the well-known Latin idiom :—

Sic te diva potens Cypri

Ventorumque regat paterNavis . . .

Finibus Atticis

Beddas incolumem precor. Hor. Od. 1. hi. 1.

Sic venias hodierne . . . tibi dem turis honores.

Tibull. 1. vii. 33.

Note 2. Explanation of expressions of a wish.

(1) Optatives and Indicatives with el, el ydp, effie are clearly

Protases with suppressed Apodoses.

el yap Tavra yevono (sc. koAws av eitj).

el yap ravra eyevero (sc. »caX5s av 7jv).

Latin is parallel

si haec ita fiant, fierent, facta essent.

With cus compare ut, utinam in Wishes.

(2) t&<£eXov (/ ought, or had ought), on the other hand, is an

Apodosis with a suppressed Protasis; used like XPV V> «8«without an av.



EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH. 283

Latin again supplies a parallel

(Eum) si ulla in te pietas esset, colere debebas.

Cic. Phil. ii. 38.

Tunc ego debuercm capienda ad Pergama mitti

Tunc poteram magni, si non superare, morariHectoris arma meis. Ov. Met. xii. 445.




RELATIVE SENTENCES. 285

Definite Eelative sentences present no difficulty. In-

definite Eelative sentences freely form Subordinate sen-

tences of every kind, —Conditional, Temporal, Modal,Consecutive, etc., and will be found under these several

heads. Some Eelative Particles denote Place (oiroi, 'tva,

etc.), but a special chapter on Local Sentences is un-

necessary.

Other uses of the Eelative will be seen by reference to

the Index. Especial attention should be paid to thesyntax of the Negatives with Eelatives ; see chapter on

the Negatives, Part IIL


PART TIL

PREPOSITIONS, NEGATIVES, ORATIO

OBLIQUA, AND FIGURES.

CHAPTER I.

§248. PREPOSITIONS.

Prepositions in Attic are particles which have a doubleuse. Either (1) they are joined in Composition with

Verbs; or (2) they serve as links between the oblique

case of Nouns or Pronouns and other words, especially

Verbs, in the sentence. As such links they denote Place,

Time, and various figurative relations, Agency, Cause,

Means, etc., more distinctly than could be done by theoblique cases alone. Prepositions also help to form com-

pound adjectives and substantives. Philology and Epic

Poetry, however, enable us to trace the origin and usage

of Prepositions further back than their Attic uses, and to

account for those uses.

§ 249- Introductory Note to Prepositions.

1. Prepositions appear to have been originally case-forms. Thus wo (Ep. wrou) was Locative, meaning on the

wider side ; inrep (Sanskrit upari), on the upper side ; Si<£ (Ep.and Poet. Stat), in the space between; dirt is Locative, ai/ra

Accusative (cf. avTr/v, coram) ; irepi Locative ; wpos (trporl)

Locative ; mxoa Itraoai) Locative ; vpo is Ablative. As cases286 Digitized by Microsoft®

INTRODUCTORY NOTE TO PREPOSITIONS. 287

they must all have been capable of taking a Genitive. 1

Thus viral x@°v°s, on the wnder side of the earth; nap 71-0805

(rrapai), Pindar, P. 10. 97, on the newr side of the foot; dvr\

epelo, II. xxi. 481, on the opposite side of me. This is con-

firmed by the fact that all the quasi-prepositions, which arecases of nouns, are joined to a Genitive, e.g. dvpafa Euk.Bacch. 331. This stage, however, is previous to all writtenliterature, and belongs to Philology rather than Syntax.

2. They were used as Adverbs 2 independently of Verb or

Noun. Instances still occur frequently in Homer, e.g. /teXaves

8' avb. fioTpves fjo-av, black clusters were throughout, II. xviii. 512irepl Trpb yap eyx et Ovev, around in front he was raging with his

spe&r, II. xi. 180 : d/z<£i 8e ol fipdxe Ttvx €a > on either side for

him (or near him) clashedjiis arms : nepl rfpi faXeeo-Ke, exceeding

much at heart he loved him. The Adverb qualifies the Verb,

but stands apart from it.

3. A transitional period, that of the Homeric poems, suc-

ceeds. Originally the Noun went straight with the Verb;the relation between the two might be more particularly

defined by an Adverb. Thus ayaye.iv 86p,ov, to lead home;dyayetv So/iov, to lead from home (Genitive of separation or

Ablative) : <op.ois /3dX' alylSa, on his shoulders (Locative) he cast

his shield. Compare these with dsfjyov detov SSfiov, Od. iv. 43tK 8' ayayc kXktltjs, II. i. 346 : r\yzv is kAio-iijv, II. i. 89 : ap.<j>l

Se x a ? ral w/iotsdura-ovTai.

In thefirst

two of theselast four

examples the Adverbs ek and e/c further define the direction of

the Verb, and form Compound Verbs which " govern " respec-

tively theAccusative and Genitive. But in the last two the

Adverb serves as a link between Noun and Verb, and becomes

a Preposition.

4. Prepositions thus come to furnish new analytic cases,

the old cases with their blunted and confused suffixes being

1 This is Curtius' view (Elucidations, Ch. xvii. ) It must apply to

Prepositions only when they do not denote separation (in which case

they would be joined to an Ablative). Such a connection between

Prepositions and. the Genitive is said not to exist in Sanskrit, and on

this ground Delbruck (Syntaktische Forschungen, iv. ch. ix. p. 134)

only partially accepts Curtius' theory.

3 No distinction is here intended in speaking of Prepositions as case-

forms and as Adverbs. Alloblique cases are, of course, adverbial,

except the true Genitive^hich^s jjjjjeog^ or attributive.

288 PREPOSITIONS.

insufficient to express all the new relations between Nounand Verb which were suggested by the expansion of Greek

thought and knowledge. When a Preposition links a case toany other word but a Verb, to an Adjective or Noun, a verbal

meaning is readily understood. In determining the force of

a Preposition we must carefully consider three points : the

meaning (1.) of the Preposition, (2.) of the Case, (3.) of the

Verb (or verbal word). In the stereotyped phrases with

Prepositions which have practically become Adverbs or Adjec-

tives, it will be easy enough to supply the verbal notion whichthe phrase requires to complete it logically.

5. A few instances may elucidate the foregoing remarks.

a. The noun linked by a preposition to its case has a

verbal meaning.SiaWayal irpos Tiva, reconciliation with any one, Isocr. 60 B,

compared with SiaWaxQqvai irpos two., to be reconciled with

any one.

toôtjjs d<j>' imrov, compare with roêieiv defy' Ittttov.

b. The Preposition with its Case is a fuller expansion of

the Simple Case.

Thus we may say, xprjo-Tov irpbs dvoôs eori, or xpijorouavSpos Ion', it is the part of a good man.

Lysias writes nvTjo-Oijvau twos : Thucydides, fivqo-Orjvai irepi

twos : Demosthenes, p,vrjo-6rjvai bwip twos.

So we may say, elprjo-eTai irpbs fyras, or vpXv, f/ aXrjdeia, the

truth shall be told you; paêo-dai t$ Xipjf ko.1 tQ Stya, Xen.,to fight with hunger and thirst; p.dxeo-6ai irpbs eiridvplas, Plat.,to fight against desires.

Similarly, rj irap' ep.ov evvoia=fj «vvoio p.ov, my goodwill(Subjective Gen.); to Trap' epMv dSUrjjxa=Tb dSiK7]p,d fwv, the

wrong done by me (Objective).

6. Improper or Spurious Prepositions are those which canbe joined with Cases, e.g. avev, eveKa with Genitive, <5>s withAccusative, but which are not compounded with Verbs.

7. Tmesis is a late Grammarians' term to denote theseparation between Preposition and Verb. The term is

unnecessary, for, as we have seen, in early Greek it is not theseparation, but the combination, which has to be accounted

for. Tmesis in Attic is but a survival of the earlier usage :

it is practically confinejypj fyp&fcioswd a few colloquialisms,

290 PREPOSITIONS

xpos (in poetry and Ionic prose) with Gen.3

irapa, (the agent as the source) with Gen.d?ro (in some special prose uses) with Gen.

Sid (the intermediate agent) with Gen.

2. Means by

Sod with Gen. (the regular expression to

denote the Means; the others are special).

euro.

Ik with Gen.Iv with Dat.£vv with Dat.

3. The usages of certain Prepositions are closely parallel :

a/Ko — e/c

6.VTI — irpo

£vv — p.erd

dvd — Karavirep — Trept (in certain senses).

ap,cj)i — TrepC

«ri — wpos (in certain senses).

4. The usages of certain Prepositions are sharply contrasted :

€is — Ik — ev

wrep — vtto

dvd — Kara, etc.

5. Synonymous phrases are formed by different Preposi-tions with Cases, e.g. :

Ka6' q/iipav, p.kd' rjfi.epav, Trap' rjfxkpav.

ol dp,<j>l ITAaTtoVa, ol Trepl IIXaTtuva.

6._ Verbs of rest are used with Prepositions expressingmotion. ^This is known as the Constructio Praegnans. Seediro, i£, els, ev.

7. Prepositions are used, (1) in their literal sense denotingplace, or time, (2) in a figurative sense denoting various moralrelations.

The Attic use of Prepositions is marked off from the Epicchiefly in two ways : (1) by the disuse of the adverbial senses(2) by the developm^Y&fe#gpj»tregoH®anings.



PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 291

§ 252. PREPOSITIONS AND THE CASES,

I. Prepositions with one Case.

a. Accusative : dvd, e« (Is), «? (d/ttfrt practically in

prose).

6. Genitive : avrt, airo, etj (e«), irpd (avev, eveica,

etcan, ywpLi, &XP l > P-eXP )'

c.

Dative: ev,

aw{a/ia,

6fiov).

II. Prepositions with two Cases.

Accusative and Genitive : Sid, /card, virip, p,erd.

III. Prepositions with all three Cases.

a/icpi, eiri, irapa, irepi, wpos, vtto.

I.— PREPOSITIONS WITH ONE CASE ONLY,

(a.) WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY.

§ 253. 'Avd.

'Avd, up to, through, opposed to Kara (compare the twothroughout), Eng. on, Gothic ana, Germ. an. 'Avd related

to evl (ev) as on and in.

Lat. an-helo, I breathe up, CURT. Etymol. L 381.

Up along

ra ifKola ava tov iroTafiov ov Svvavrai 7r\eeiv.

Herod.

The boats cannot sail up the stream (cf. Kara).

Throughout or Among

dolSi/ios dvd rrjv 'EWaSa eyevero. HEROD.

He became famousin song throughout all Greece.

oiKciv dva to. opiftidSiEStL htf.'MiaiiAs&mlG, to live m the hills.

293 PREPOSITIONS.

Distributively

eiropevQriaav ava irevre irapacadyyas rrj<; rj/j,epa<;.

Xen.

They marched at the rate of five parasangs a day.

So ava eKarov, m bodies of a hundred, in centuries. Cf.

S. Luke ix. 14, S. Matth. xx. 10.

Phrases :

dva. Kpdros (<f>evyeiv), with all one's might (cf. Kara. (cpdVos :

dva. XSyov (4>vop.eva SevSpa), Plat. Phaed. lix. trees

growing) in proportion ; dva. crrd/aa e'xetv, to have in one's

mouth, at the tip of the tongue.

N.B. ava has the sense of dvda-rrjdi, up/ arise/ sursum!Cf. Soph. Ai. dXX' aW !£ eSpdvav, come, up from thy seat /

Note, dvd is also used in Homer, in Lyric poetry (Pindar),

and in Choruses of the Tragedians with the Dative (e.g.

Eur. I. A. 754).

In Composition :

(1.) Up, dvaf3\iir<a, I look up. (2.) Reverse action, lack,

dvavevo), I throw the head back (3.) Again, dVa/8A«ra>,

I recover sight.

§ 254. Eis or e*s.

Eh or 6?, into, to, opposed to e'£ out of. Original formperhaps evs, from ivi-s. In Pindar iv means in and into.

Cf. Latin in and inter with Accusative.

(1) Of Place:—

Motion to, into, for

SV/eeXot ef lTaXla<; Siefirjaav e? HiiceXiav. ThucThe Steels crossed over out of Italy into Sicily (or for

Sicily).

With verbs of rest

KaraicXeUiv h tjjv vrjvov. THUC. i. 109.To shut up in tbigMmehy Mt&owffluctio praegnans.)

PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 293

{To speak) before :

Xeyew eis to irXtjOos.

To speak before the people.

Of. elcrievcu, dTrjvat Is.

Looking towards : .

to Is Ua,XXrjvr]v T6ix°S- Thuc. i. 56.

The wall facing Pallene.

Phrases :

els dicovTiov, els Soparos rrXrjyfjv (d<j!«KV£io-0ai).

To get within javelin's throw, spear thrust.

Opposed to eg.

(2) Of Time :—

Up to, until

eU ttjv ea>, till dawn ; es efie, up to my time.

At such a time, by such a date

els ecnrepav, els Tpivqv (with or without fjiikpav), Is rijv

vtrrepaiav {fjKuv), to come at even, on the third day (or

m three days), on the morrow.

Phrases :

Is Kaipov, in season ; els avpiov, on the morrow ; els etreira,

henceforward ; els an-a£ (or e«raira£), once for all, etc.

(3) With Numbers :

Denoting limit, up to, amounting to

vav<; e? ras TerpaKoaiw;. THUC.

Shipsto the number

of fourhundred.

e? hpavfui]v BiaSovvat. THUC.

To pay each man up to (i.e. as much as) a drachma.

Phrases :

els eva, els 8i5o, els reo-uapas.

One, two,, four deep.

els Svvafuv, to the extent of one's ability ; els mrep^oXrjv, inexcess. Digitized by Microsoft®

294 PREPOSITIONS.

(4) Of Belation to :

d/iapTciveiv els riva, to do wrong to any one.

Purpose

Is rdSe 7]KOjj.ev, for this purpose we are come.

eh KaAAos ffiv, Xen., to live for show.

(5) Special Phrases :

«s avSpas ("EXXrjvas, etc.) rcAetv, to come to mom's estate

(to be enrolled among, belong to Greeks). Of. lyypd<f>(i>.

?s n (tv vto) TeXevTav, to end in a certain way.

h wav d<f>LKea-0ai, to come to everything, i.e. to try every

means.

as 'AttoXX.wvos, Ai6w<tov, to Apollo's, Dionysus' temple, adApollinis, ad Bacchi. So ets SiSaa-icdXov, as kpavrov

(<poiTav), sc. oTkov or some such word.

N.B. cts is not used in Attic of motion to individual per-

sons ; jrpds or (is must be employed.

In Composition :

Into. Examples unnecessary.

§ 255.J a s .

cos, to, with Persons only, not with things,

with 7rp6<s, els, eirl, and alone.

«o? Ayiv eTrpecrftevaavTO. THUC.

They sent an embassy to Agis.

(b.) WITH GENITIVE ONLY.§ 256. 'AvtL

dvri (original sense, over against, opposite to), instead of,

in exchange for ; avra, Epic adv. and prep, over against,

face to face ; avrr/v, Ep. adv. over against. Cf. ev-avri-o?

dvTi-Kpv. In Homer dvrl is still an adverb rather than a

preposition. Lat. Mfetefl^rtftcf. Germ, ant-wort.

PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONLY. 295

(1) Of Place, opposite to

This sense is Epic.

(2) Instead of:

icaica irpaTTei avr aya9a>v. PLAT.

He does evil instead of good.

So /ietfov, ir\eov, dvri, instead of Comparative and SimpleGenitive, Soph. Ant. 182, Tr. 577.

(3)In return

forSel ra jiev avTt apyvpiov dXXa^aadat. PLAT.

We must exchange some things for money,

avd' &v, wherefore (also because, cf. Soph. Antig. 1068).Rarely like 717)05, for the sake of (lit. over against, in the

presence of), with verbs of entreaty, see Soph. 0. C. 1326.

In Composition :

Many meanings, (1) Against, i.e. opposite or in opposition,

avTifiaivw, I plant the foot against, also I resist. (2)Reciprocity, substitution, or equality, <xvt<,/3oij0w, I help in

twrn ; avOvrraroi, proconsul ; avriTviros, struck, or striking

back, corresponding ; avTideos, godlike.

§ 257. 'A.TTO.

' Anro, away, off, from. Sansk. apa, away, Lat. ab, Germ.

ah, Eng. off, of. 'A-iro (Sansk. apa) connected with art

(Sansk. api, further, after).

(1) Of Place :

Away from

airo ttj<; avrcovopfiwvrai.

Thuc.

They advance from their own country.

With verbs of rest {from the observer's point of view)

ej36axrev airo 7rerpas a-radds. EUR.Shouted from the rock, standing (on it).

Hence many phrases : ol dirb tw irvpyutv, the men on the

towers ; dirb vcZv, d<f> hnruiv ixd-^^Gai, to fight on board ship,

on horseback. _. ... ..... „~Digitized by Microsoft®

296 PREPOSITIONS.

Phrases :

dirb dko-Kov, Kaipov, wide of the mark (cf. diib yvu>pvq%

Soph. Tr. 389); dwb rpoirov(Plat.), unsuitably,

opposed to 7rpos rpoirov, Kara rpoirov.

6.T70 ShSpwv KaraSelv (Xen.), to tie to trees.

(2) Of Time :—

After, since

airo ra>v (titwv SiairovelaOai. Xen.

To work after meals.

Phrases :

to dirb rovSe, henceforth ; d<£' oS, ex quo, since , dirb

iraXaiov, dp^aCov, of old ; dcj> eo-7r£/oas (ThUC. vii. 29),

at even.

(3) Origin :

ol fJLevairo

6eavtyeyovores, ol

&el; avrmv tcov 0ea>v

Isoc.

Some descended (remotely) from gods, others begotten

(directly) by the gods themselves.

Material :

K/oao-ts <liro re T5js rjSovrjs 0-vyKeKpap.kvr} 6p.ov ko.1 dirb rijs

A,i5?njs. Plat. Phaed. ii.

A combination consisting partly of pleasure and partly of

Means

fijv dirb iroXijxov (yew/Dy^as). THUC. and XENTo live by war (husbandry).

IleptKArjs euro SiaKOcrioyv veSiv KareiroXefirjo-ev rr]V "Zdfiov.

IS. 15. 11.Pericles with 200 ships reduced Santos.

Cf. THUC. i. 91, dirb irapiwK£V7jS.

Cause, in consequence of or for

O7ro Ttvos 6avp,d^£cr6ai, eircuveio-Qcu, 8iaf3dXXeo-8ai.

To be admired, praised, slandered in consequence of anything,

dir airiov rZv tpywv o-Koiretre.

THUC.i.

17.Judge from >&J»fefc rosoft@

Agent, less direct than inrd :

iirpdy^dt] air' clvtZv ovSev. THUC. i. 17.

Nothing was achieved by them.

See Poppo's note.

diro with a case is often a periphrasis for a case alone, e.g.

o mrb rwv Boporpopmv (jbd/Jos, fear of the body guard, Xen. Hier.

x. 3; t<3v dirb tSjv &r)p.ov Tts, one of the people, Thuc. iv. 130.

Thucydides's partiality for a free use of dn-6 is remarkable.

(4) Pheases:

oi wiro TLvdayopov, JlXarwi/os, the school of Pythagoras,

Plato.

ol a7ro -njs 'Ai<a.$r]fieias, Sroas, the Academics, Stoics (the

Academy, the Porch)'.

oi cwro 0-Kijvijs, actors.

<X7ro cnrov&rjs, earnestly ; dirb toG i<tov (tjjs "irr)<s), air' tOTjs,

equally; dirb toC Trpo<f>avovs, openly; diro yXuxra-rj's

tnrilv, to state by word of mouth (Thuc. vii. 10), to

repeat by heart (Xen. Symp. iii. 5), from hearsay (Aesch.

Ag. 813); 6p.p.dn>v diro (Eue. Med. 216), with one's

own eyes; dirb tov avTop-drov (Tavrofidrov), spontaneously,

sponte, casu quodam ; dirb <rr}p.dov, at a given signal.

In Compqsition :

(1)Separation, hence completion, and ceasing, diroXovm, I

wash off; direpydfrfiai, I finish off, i.e. I complete;

aTroXrjyu), I leave off, desist. (2) Restoration, djroSiSaj/ti,

I give back.

Separation also becomes practically privative, e.g.

dimyopevta, I forbid ; dn-ox/cj/iaTos, without money.

§ 258. 'E/c, *E£

'Ek, 'Elj, out of; opposed to eh, into. Ik and a-ird run

parallel throughout. Lat. ex, e (ec).

(1) Of Place :

Out of

eK ^Trdprris (pewyei.

He is banishedj^^^j^arta.

298 PREPOSITIONS.

Denoting change ; (cf. dvri).

TToXlV €K 7T0A,e0>? GtXkaTTeiV. Plat.

To change city after city.

With verbs of rest

£k SevSpoiv dirdyf^crOai. THUC. iii. 8.1.

To hang themselves on trees.

Phrases :

Hence many phrases (observe that the first three orfour are instances of Constructio Praegnans) : tows Ik tj/s

vavfiaxta-s (ovk dveXo/*6vovs), Plat. Apol. xx., those in the sea-

fight ; 06 Ik vrfT<ov Kaxovpyoi, Thtjc. i. 8, the evil-doers in (of) the

islands ; ol £k tGiv irvpyav, those on the towers, Thuc. iii. 22to e^'Ia-9/Mov Tetxos (opposed to to Is IIaA.Aijv5jv), Thuc. i. 64,

the wall on the side of the Isthmus ; h< 8e£tas, on the right ; l£

dpurTepas, on the left; Ik v6p,u>v, in accordance with the laws ;

opObi !£ 6pQG>v Stypwv, Soph. El. 742, erect in chariot erect

en rrjs ^vx'ijs (ex dvfiov, Hom.) with all one's heart ; Ik o-avrrjs

(Alyeis), self -prompted, Soph. El. 344, cf. ora-d ; eK jtoAAoC, at

a long distance, Xen. ; kn rogov pvp,a,Tos, Xen., at bow-shot ;

tK x e P°s f-d-x^v TToUurdai, Xen., to fight hand to hand.

(2) Of Time :—

Since, after:

ef °v (XP° V0V )> S4Mce > ex 1 uJ e« tov apiarav, after

breakfast. (So d-iro.)

Ik toijtov, after this (£k tovtwv gen. in consequence of this).

Ik tov Xoarov (t£v Aoinw) for the future, Xen. and Plat.

After, denoting change

ex SaKpvmv yeXav. Xen.

To laugh after tears (weeping).

td</>Aos ck SeSo/DKOTOS Kai 7tto>xos dvrl irXovcriov.

Soph. 0. T. 454.Blind after seeing, and poor instead of (being) rich.

Ever since:

U v kov,.U v^dlWbflMbhJM 1 childhood.

(3) Origin :

aya6ot icai elj aya&mv.

Plat. (Of. Soph. Ant. 466.)

Good, and born 0/ good parents.

Material

to ayKtcrrpov kg a8d/j,a.VT0S. PLAT. Rep. 616.

The hook is of adamant.

Agent (Heeodot. and poetry, rare in Attic) :

6« tu>i/6" S.pxofj.ai. Soph. El. 264.

By them am 1 ruled.

Cf. Soph. Ant. 957. 973, Thuc. iii. 69, Xen. Hell. iii. 96.

Cause, Consequence, or Means :

€K iroXe/xov eiprjvrj f3ej3aiovTO.i. THUC. i. 120.Peace is secured by means of war. (Cf. Sta.)

Dependence upon

Trapprjaria kg dXrjdelas r\pTi)Tai. DEM. 1397. 1.

Plain speaking depends on truth (comes of).

Cf. aTrayx<xr6a.i Ik, above.

Mixed Phrases :

01 kg 'AKaSrjjuetas, Ik tov TLepnr&Tov (cf. o.tto).

The Academics, the Peripatetics.

So N. Test, ol in irto-Tctos, the adherents of the Faith.

6 kg vp.iov 7rd0os, Soph. Tr. 631, your desire (like a gen.),

so vp.vos kg 'Epivvwv, the song of the Ermyes. Aesch

Eum. 344.

Adverbial Phrases :

Ik /Sias, by force ; sk tov $avepov (irpo<fiavovs), openly (cf.

ex improviso, ex consulto, etc., Latin) ; «k tou cikotos,

Thuc. iv. 17, in all likelihood; &>s Ik t«3v irapovrtov,

Thuc. iv. 17, so far as present circumstances allow ; kg

uroiv (tov 10-ov) equally ; *k tou avrofidrov, by chance, or

accident, Xejst. Jegs^monjum d*6).



366 PREPOSITIONS.

Periphrasis for a case :

at !£ 'AdrjvSv irapdivoi, the maids of Athens.

In Composition :

(1) Separation, removal, completion (cf. mro), Ik/3cuvo), i" go

out ; iiar'epdm, I sack utterly, out and out.

§ 259. UP 6.

JJpo, before, in front of. Cf. irpos. Lat. prod, pro.

(1) Of Pla.ce :—Before, in front of:

M.ivwa r\ vrjaos Keirat irpo Meyapoov. ThUC.

The island of Minoa lies off {in front of) Megara.

Hence in defence of, for the sake of. (Cf. virip)

ijOeXe Oavelv irpo Keivov. EUR. Ale. 18.

She willed to die for him.

Phrase.irpo 6Sov, forwards, onwards.

(2) Of Time :—

01 irpo rjpbwv yeyovores. ISOC.

Those who were born before us {our forefathers).

6 wpb tov xpovos, the former time, aforetime.

(3) Of Eelation :

In preference to, cf. dvro, -rrepl

irpo twv fieXricTTav ra fipayyTepa alpeladai. PLAT.

To choose more unimportant things in preference to

the highest things.

irpo iroXXov 7roi€icr#at {ripacrdai).

To esteem highly, (lit. in preference to much).

In Composition :

(1) Forth, forward, in front, of place and so of pre-eminence,of substitution or defence, 7rpofid\\a>, I put forward;xpodvpov, front door; irpoeSpos, president; Trp6p.axos,champion.

(2)Before, of time, Trpoaurdavop.o.1,

I learnbeforehand.

Digitized by Microsofm




§ 260. "Avev.

"Avev, without, opposed to aw.

(1) Without the help of, or order of: ti fipoToU avev Aios teA-

£tra6 ; Aesch. Ag. 1487, what comes to pass among men without

the will of Zeus ? (miussu Iovis, love nolente). Cf. Thuc. viii. 52.

In Plat. Gorg. 518 D, without reference to. (2) Except, besides

(like x o, / HS) : nav™ &vev XP vcr °v, Plat. Grit. 112 c, all things

except gold, omnia praeter aurum.

In Soph. 0. C. 502 avev comes after its case.

§ 26l. "EveKa, eveicev.

"Eveica, eveicev (Ion. eiveica; eiveicev), Poet, o'vveita.

Generally after its case, sometimes separated from its case

(Ar. Ecc. 105-6). Lat. gratia, causa.

(1) For the sake of: KoXaiceveiv eveica jjiia-dov, Xen. Hell. v. 1.

17, to flatter for the sake of {in order to get) a reward. (2) So faras concerns : epov ye eveica, so far as I am concerned ; eWa twv

o^daXfimv, Plat., so far as depends on the eyes.

Note. Sometimes pleonastically with other Prepositions:

dm /Joijs eveKa, THUC. vii. 92 ; dp^l crov eveKa, SOPH. Phil.

534 ; rti/09 Sij x°-P tv « V£Ka > I" 1^ 1 - Le 9- 701 D-

§ 262. "E/cari.

"Ekciti (Ep. with the help of).

(1) Because of, on account of: dperrjs enan, Soph. Phil. 670,

on account of (i.e. as a reward for) valour. (2) So far as concerns

(like eveica) : irXrjOovs eWi, Aesch. Pers. 337, so far as num-

§ 263. Xw/HS.

Xcopfc, without.

(1) Without help of: irovov roi x">/hs oiSev evTVxe?, SOPH.

El. 945 ; without toil nothing prospers. (2) Far from : x"V"s

dvdpilnnov trriBov, Soph. Phil. 487, far from track of men. (3)

Without considering, besides : x«V>''s s6 ^ MPari f rom -reputation

Plat. Apol. xxiv. (4) Different from, Plat. Lack 195 ANote, Y «v>fe is alsfiêdÂdêrbia^.

302 PREPOSITIONS.

§ 264. Besides the Prepositions, a greater number of

old Cases, which have become Adverbial, are used like

Prepositions with a Genitive.

I. piyjti and axP l> as f ar as -

(1) Of Place : ^XP 1 T ^ s ™\em, Thuc, as far as the city.

(2) Of Time : ^XP L tovovtov, tovtov, so far, up to this time.

(3) p.^xP l T0 ^ SiKatoi; (Swarov), so far as is right (possible).

II. \api,v. (1) For the sake of : tov x&P lv i=T , ov evera; /or

the sake of what, 01 wherefore? (2) Because of: x°-P LV x^" s==xAtSas ?KaTt, because of pride, Soph. 0. T. 888. (3) So far as

concerns: 8a,Kpv<ov x^P ivt if tears could avail, Soph. JV. 501.

iVbfo. e/xijv x™P' v)

<r ^" X°-P lv> f 01 " my sa ke, thy sake, not x <

ty>tv

1/ioC, o-ov, mea, fea cawsa, gratia.

wpb's x<^P iv is also redundantly used, with reference to, for the

sake of, Soph. Ant. 30, 908.

III. Several old Accusatives adverbially used, meaning like,

after the fashion of: Slktjv (lit. usage) ; rpoirov (way) ; Se/xas

(Epic only, form or body). Of. Lat. instar.

IV. oiA.is, 3.8tjv, enough/ Stx a > opart; \ddpa, Kpv^a, secretly.

V. Many old local cases.

lyytis, near (also takes Dative); eicr, Ivtos, within; €'£a>,

Iktos, ivithout; fiira^v, between; Trpocrio, iroppui, airoOev, farfrom ; irpocrOev, ep.Trpocrdev, in front of ; OTri<r6ev, kutoiuv, be-

hind ; dp.<j>OTepoi6ev, eKaTepudev, 'ivdev Kai 'ivdev, on both sides

of; 7repa, irkpav, beyond, across ; dvTLTnpas, KaravrtTrepas, dvriKpv,KaravTiKpv, opposite.

(c.) WITH DATIVE ONLY.

§ 265. TSv.

'Ev (poet, eiv, evi, elvi), in, within, opposed to eh, into,

and ef, out of. Lat. in, Eng. in, Germ. in. Cf. dvd.

[The old Adverbial usage of ev still continues in the phraseiv 81, and among, and therein, and besides. Several instancesoccur in Sophocles.]



PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE ONLY. 303

(1) Of Place (see Dative of Place) :

At, near, by, on :

Aemrv^iSrji; rjyelTo twv ev MvicaXr) 'EWrjvmv. ThuC.

Leoty chides commanded the Greeks at Mycale.

Tpaire&vs oucelrai ev t«5 Ev^etvm TrovTtp. Xen.

Trapezus is built on the Euxine sea.

Amongvofioi kv 7rao-tv evSoKi/ioi xois "EAAijcriv. PLATLaws famous among all the Greeks.

Elliptically (supply o'Um, or some such word), mostly

with proper names in Attic. Cf. ety.

iv M8ov, in Hades.h'Aoitppovo's, Plat. Trot. 320 a, in the house of Ariphron ;

kv Aiovia-ov, m the temple of Dionysus, Dem. 21. 8.

Iv TraiSorpifiov, kv KiOapurrov, at (the school) of the gym-nastic -master, the cithara-player.

Also an Epic use (the complete construction sometimes

occurs, e.g. elv AiSao So/holo-i, Od. iv. 834).

With Verbs of Motion (Constructio Praegnans). Cf.

el?, converse construction.

01 ev t£ 'Hpai(j> KaraTefavyoTes. XEN. Hell. iv. 5. 5.

Those who had fled to (and were in) the chapel of Hera.

(2) Of Time (see Dative of Time) :—

Within a space of, during :

ev rah (nrovSah, during the armistice, Xen.

ev Tovjm, meanwhile ; ev a>, ev oata, whilst.

(3) Of Eelation :

Occupation, Condition

oi ev T015 irparfjxaai, ol ev reXei. THUC.

Those who are engaged in public affairs, those who are

in office, i.e. ministers of state, the authorities, the

govemmen^g^ by Microsofm

PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE ONLY. 305

§ 266. %vv.

Svv (£w, old Attic form), with, together with, opposedto avev. Lat. cum. Compare throughout with fierd.

Together with

eiraiSevero aw tw a$e\<pw. Xen.

He was being educated with his brother.

Conformity with (opp. to irapa), with the help of:

aw Tffl vofitp yfrrjcpov rtdevai. XEN.

To vote in accordance with the law (irapa, top vofiov,

contrary to law).

Phrases :

avv 6e$, with God's blessing, or help, please God (deo

favente). (avv, Oey diretv, Plat., Arist.)

01 avv tivi, one's friends, party, followers. Xen.avv Ttvi p,d\ea9ai (etVat, yiyveadai), to fight on One's side

(pera tivos more usual). Xen.

Accompanying circumstances :

avv vavai ?rposirAetv, Xen. Hell. ii. 2. 7, to sail with ships

(commoner in Epic than Attic).

Expletive use. Cf. Dative :

avv to at* dyadio, to yowr advantage, cum tuo commodo,

Xen. Gyr. iii. 1. 15. Cp. Soph. Ant. 172.

avv ttj yStji, with violence (cf. 71-jods /?tav, /Jtaicos).

avv r$ XP° VV> ai length, Xen. Gyr. viii. 6.

Old Adverbial use :

/j/rj f-iiv Ka/caJs iroiew avTovs. ThUC. 1U. 13.

Not jointly (i.e. together with the Athenians) to mjwe them.

Cf. Soph. Ai. 960, Aesch. Ag. 586 (—fwthermore),

Soph. Ant. 85 (moreover), El. 299.

In Composition :

(1.) Together with, awayopevw, I speak with another. (2o.

Completely, avpirXrjpQ, I Jill completely, cf. complegr.

With numerals, a distributive force is given, e.)

avvrpets, thresj^kmifigtMmeim three apiece.

306 PREPOSITIONS.

§ 267. Note on crvv and pera.

crvv, together with, denotes mere addition,juera, together with, m the midst of, in the company of, denotes

participation with, community of action.

Thus (in Homer)

/tei-a S/itocov itiv£ /cat fjcrdie. Od. x. 140.

He was drinking and eating in the company of the slaves.

rjkvde crvv Sio) M£veA.a<o. II. iii. 206.

He came with god-like Menelaus (i.e. both came).

Of. Soph. Antig. 115, 116.

So cri)AAa/*/3av(o, I take or get together (tovs o-TparMoras, the

soldiers).

/teTaAa/i/Javw, I take together with others, i.e. I share.

ow6x&>, I hold together, comprise, contain.

/*£T6xto, I have with others, partake, share,

'imo-dai fiera' nvtov, to follow in the midst of others,

eireo-dai <r,vv tuti, to follow with (as well as) others.

In Attic, it is to be observed, that uvv with the Dative is

used in Poetry where ^rd with the Genitive is used in Prose.

Xenophon, however, apparently following poetical, i.e. earlier

or Homeric, usage, is the one Attic prose writer who uses crvv

with the Dative.

§ 268. One or two old Adverbial Gases, apa and 6(iov,

are joined like Prepositions to the Dative.

I. a/jux, mostly Temporal : apa tip, afia 6<p yiyvofievri, at

dawn, daybreak; but also of accompaniment, ol apa Qoavn,Hdt. vi. 138, those who were with Thoas. Cf. Thuc. vii. 57.

II. o^toC, together with ; vSwp 6p.ov t<£ TrqXtp, Thuc. vii. 84,

water together with the mud; deols 6[wv=crvv deois, SOPH. Ai.767, with the help of the gods.

III. ey-yus (see Genitive), near. 1. When used of Place is

chiefly Epic, and takes a Genitive, but, in Eur. Herac. 37, aDative. 2. Of Time or Numbers, iyyvs hiavrov, Xen. Hell.iii. 1. 28, near a year. In Thuc. vi. 5, eVeo-i lyyvs tiKoo-i, neartwenty

^years ; iyyv% is Adverbial, as post may be in Latin,

viginti post annis.

IV. e<£e£j}s: to. TO^y^i^E-^,^ what follows.

PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 307

II.— PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES.

WITH ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE.§ 269. Ata.

Aid (old and poetical form Siat), between, apart, through.

Of. Svo, 81$, Siâ.

A. With Genitive.

1. Oe Place :

Through (right through, and out of)

eTTopevdrjaav Bia XaXvfimv. Xen.

They marched through the country of the Ghalybes.

A II through, along :

dopvftov rjKOVae Sta tcov Taf-ea>v iovtos. XEN.

He heard a din passing all along the ranks.

Distributively, intervals of space

hid Se/ca eirdxêtov Trvpyot rjaav. Thuc.

At every ten battlements were towers.

So Sia ttoXXov, 81a irXila-Tov, 8t' lAao-o-ovos, at a great dis-

tance, greatest distance, short distance.

Cf. Eur. Andr. 1251 (S.XXov Si' S,XXov).

2. Or Time :

Throughout, cf. tvapd with Accusative

ravra 8t oXov tov aiu>vo<; /jboÔovai. THUC.

Thus throughout their whole life they labour.

So 8ict vuktos, St' rjnepas, etc., Sia Travrds, Sia reXovs,

continually ; Si1 oXiyov, for a little while.

Of intervals after

eoace Bid ttoXXov ^pdvov a icopaicevai. AEIST.

It seems that it is a long while since he has seen you.

Cf. Soph. Phil. 285 {j(p6vo^ Bid ^povov, of succession in

* me ) Digitized by Microsoft®

308 PREPOSITIONS.

Distributively

Sia Tj-e/xjrrou erovs, or Sid irivre erwv, every fifth year,

quinto quoque anno ; Si' erovs, Si' iviavTov, every year,

yew by year.

3. Causal :

The notion is that of a coining between or intervening.

The intermediate agent, through the medium of, by the

agency of:

e\e<ye St eppirjveu)^. XEN.

He was speaking by means of an interpreter.

Si' eavrov iroiziv tl, to do a thing by oneself, all alone, i.e.

without the intervention of another.

Of. cra-o, !£.

Means or instrument. Cf. the Dative (which denotes

more direct means)

fj Sid tZv 6fj.fia.Tuiv a-nk-ipis. Plat. Phaed. 83.

Examination by means of the eyesight.

Sid x^/dos *X UV ! ^• a /? £ " / ", to hold, to take m the hand.

Adverbial Phrases :

A great number of Adverbial phrases are formed with Sia

and the Genitive. In these Sid appears to be used sometimesin its local, sometimes in its causal sense.

Siot fiaxys levai, epxtvQa-i (nvi), to go to, engage in battle

with ; St.' e'x0pas yiyveadai (tivi), to be hostile to; Sib.

<£iA.i'aslevai

(tivi), tobe friendly with ; Sid Xoytav ikvai

(tivi), to converse with ; Si' amas '^x elvt «y«v (riva), to

hold guilty ; Si' opyrfs, <f>v\a.Krjs, oiktou %xelv ("vo, ti),

to be angry with, keep in prison, feel pity for.

Sia o-To/taTos «x € ' v> A""?/"'? 5

)o"rkpvmv, to have on one's lips,

in one's memory, in the breast.

Si' opyfjs, angrily ; Sid ottovStjs, hastily ; Sid Ppa\kmv,shortly; Sid paKpmv, at

length (e.g. toi>s AoyousxoufaOai, io^^cf b^%^mb i^okly, shortly.

B. With Accusative —generally denotes close con-

tiguity.

1. Of Place and Time :

Throughout, during :

Epic and poetical only. Cf. Aesch. Swpp. 15, Soph. 0. T.

867.

2. Causal :

Of the Antecedent, not the Final Cause. Of the person

or thing whose intervention helps towards a result.

Owing to, because of, on account of, with the help of (see

note).

04 A07jvaioi 81 aperr/v, aW ov Bta tvyrfv evitcijaav.

Isae.The Athenians conquered through valour, not through

chance.

Sia Tovs £$ p,a\op,evovs at p,d)^ai Kpivovrai.

Xen. Cyr. v. 2. 35.

Battles are decided by (owmg to the conduct of) those who

fight well.

Cf. Soph. 0. C 1129 (8id<re).

Through the fault of:

Sia tovs aSifcus TroXiTevofievovs Iv T§ SXiyapxlty ij Srjfio-

Kparta yiyverai,. LYS. 25. 27.

Owing to the unjust administration of rulers m an oligarchy,

democracy sprmgs up.

el fir) Sid, had it not been for, but for :

u juij 810 tov Ii.pvra.viv ev«reo-ei> av. PLAT. Gorg. 516 E.

Had it not been for the President he would have been thrown

into prison. Cf. Thuc. ii. 18.

Phrases :

Si' ivSeiav, because of, owing to poverty (Xen. An. viii. 6)

Si' a-yvoiav, Sia Kavpa, Sia x^'/""'"*, because of ignorance,heat, winter piiitk^tfyffipmxem «"<«, because they were

3io PREPOSITIONS.

allies. Similarly the common expressions Sta ri, why 1

wherefore ? Sta ravra, on this account, because of this ;

St' o, St' a, on which account.

Note. For the sake of this, denoting a final cause or purpose,

would be rovrov eVe/ca, not Sta ravra.

For the sake of, in order to :

A very rare use of St a with the Accusative. It occurs

seemingly four times in Thucydides, iv. 40, St' dx0»j-

86va, in order to vex ; ii. 40, Sta rr/v crtfierepav 8o|ai>,

for their own glory ; iv. 102, Sta. to irepiix^v avrrjv, im

order to enclose the city; v. 103, Sta rov 6vp.aros rfvhnpa^iv, in order to exact the sacrifice.

Note. It is difficult sometimes to distinguish between thecausal uses of Sta with Genitive and Sta with Accusative. It

is extremely difficult to account for the causal use of Sta with

Accusative. Consult Riddell's Digest of Platonic Idioms forinstances of Sta with Accusative in Plato and the Orators,meaning with the help of.

In Composition :

(1) Through, and so throughly or thoroughly, 8ta/3atvw, Igo through ; Sta<£eify<o, I escape thoroughly. (2) Apart,Stao-KeSaVvu/u, I scatter asunder.

§ 270. Kara.

Kara, down, opposed to dvd. Old form Karat, cf. Karai-

fiarrjs.

A. With Genitive.

Note, firjvai Kara, jrerpijs originally may have meant " to godownwards with regard to the rock," i.e. either down from, ordown upon.

1. Of Place :

Down from

dkofievoi Kara rfjs vrerpa?. Xen.Leaping down frmSgyWRifosofm

Down, upon or over :

fyipe rral ra%e'<o<; Kara %e<.po9 i/Scop. ArIST.

Gome boy, quickly, pour water on my hand.

Cf. LuciAN'S late use, Kara Koppys irardgai, to box on the head,

for the earlier Itti Koppys.

Cf. Plat. Rep. 398 A. In Soph. El. 1433 (war' dvndvpuv,

towards the vestibule).

Down into, and under :

rj 'ATAavris vtJo-os Kara t>)s 6a\drrr)S Svcra rifavicrdrj.

Plat. Tim. 25.

The isle of Atlantis sank under the sea and disappeared.

2. FIGURATIVELY :

Against

ol icaO' ri/jLtov Xoyoi, Dem. 15. 25, arguments against

us. Cf. Soph. Phil. 65.

Cf. Karriyoptt), Karayiyvma-KW twos, yjrevSofiat Kara

TWOS.

Concerning, with respect to :

rovro eiprjTai KarairaoSiv rlov ttoXituZv. Ar. Pol. V. 7. 11.

This has been asserted of all governments.

So a-KOireiv, Xeyuv, fijTetv, Kara, twos, often in PLATO (see

Eiddell, Digest, 163).Phrases :

/car' a/cpas, utterly (Ep. /car' a/cpijs, a culmine) ; Kara

te/cvcuv 6p.vvva.i, Dem., to swear by one's children; ko.6'

6'Aov (later KadoXov, see Lexicon), on the whole.

B. With the Accusative, Kara denotes close

proximity.

1. Oe Place :

Motion down upon or after

ol 'Adyvaioi Kara, 7r68a<s eirKeov ra>v AaKeSaifiovitov.

Xen.

The Athenians were sailing in the wake of the Lacedae-

monians.

icara. poov, down stream (cf. ava poov).r Digitized b? Microsoft®

312 PREPOSITIONS.

After, in search of

ecrKe8acr/Mevoi icad' dpirayrfv. XEN.

Scattered in quest of plunder.

Over against, opposite

61 'AOtjvaloi, Kara Aa/ceSaifioviovs eyevovro. XEN.

The Athenians were posted opposite the Lacedae-

monians.

Extension throughout

rj evKafieia gkotov 'ij(ei Ka& 'EWaSa. EtTK.

Discretion is under a cloud throughout Hellas.

Kara yfjv /ecu Kara. ddXaao-av, by land and sea.

In, connected with, belonging to :

Kar' dyopdv, in the market ; cu KGtTot to <ru>p.a (rr)v ^X 1 ?")

tTridv/iCai, bodily (menial) desires; rd Kara rijv iroXiv,

public affairs, politics ; ia Kara tov iroX^ov, military

matters.

2. Hence Figukatively :

Of fitness, according to ;

Kara vovv \e<yei<z. PLAT.

You speak to my liking.

Cf. Aesch. Ag., Kar' dvSpa crioffapova, like a discreet man(with a man's discretion) ; Ar. Av. 1001, Kara irvtyea,

like an oven ; Kara. $>vo-iv, agreeably to nature (opposedto irapd <j>vcrt,v) ; Kara tov aKpifir) Xoyov, in strict state-

ment ; Plat. Ap. i., ov Kara tovtovs pijTUjO, an oratorof a different stamp from these men ; Kara £vp,p.aylav, byvirtue of an alliance.

Especially with Comparatives

eiBev veicpov fieo^a rj Kar avOpanrov. PLAT.

He saw a corpse of superhuman size.

Cf. ThUC. vii. 75, /ietfw r) Kara. Sdicpva TrexovdoTas.Digitized by Microsoft®

3. Of Time :

Contemporary with

Bep,urroK\rjs 6 rZv Kad' eavrbv aTravroiv evSogoraros.

Dem. 20. 73.

Themistocles, the most illustrious man of all his con-

temporaries.

ol Kara. UXdrtDva, Plato and his age; /car' dpxqv,originally ; koit' elprjvrjv, in time of peace.

4. DlSTRIBUTIVELY :

Of Place, Time, Money, etc., a common use

KaroiKovvTat ol MrjSoi Kara Kcofias. Heeod.The Medes live in separate villages.

Kad' eva, one by One ; Kara piav ko.1 Kara. Svo Xa/Selv, DEM.20. 77, to take (ships) one and two at a time; kwt 1

avSpa, man by man.

ko.6' fjpkpav (in dies), day by day ; Kara. pr\va, KarkviCLVTOV.

Kara, ra<s irevre nal eiKocri yuvas TrevraKoo-las Spa^/ias

dsfeptiv. Dem. 815. 11.

To contribute 500 drachmas on every 25 minae.

5. Miscellaneous Pheases, many adverbial

Kad' lavrov, Kad' avrovs, left to themselves, Le. alone or

singly ; Kara. pAvas, alone ; Kara, pixpov, Kar' oXlyov,

little by little ; Kara. 8vvap.iv, to the best of one's

ability; rb Kar €//!, so far as concerns me ; Kara, ravrd,

in the same way ; Kar' AicrxvXov, as Aeschylus has it ;

Kara, \iopav, in statu quo, " as you were."

Kara, raxos, quickly ; Kara, xparos (per vim), by force ;

Kara tnrovSrjv, hastily ; Kad' rja-v^lav, quietly.

Karatovto,

onthis

ground; Kara, rt ; on what ground,

wherefore ? Kara, rrjv da-deveiav, on the ground of, by

reason of, weakness.

In Composition :

(1) Down, Kara/3atv(o, I go down. (2) Of isolation or

abandonment, KaraXi'mia, I leave behind or abandon. (3)

Against, KarrjyopZ, I accuse ; Karayiyvwo-KO), I condemn.

(4)All over, i.e. completely, KaraK&rrrm, I chop up in

314 PREPOSITIONS.

§ 271. "iWp.

'Tirep (poet, vireip), above, over, beyond. Sansk. upari

(above), Latin super, English over, German uber. 'Tirep

for virept is a Comparative of vird.

A. With the Genitive.

1. Of Place :

Over, above

Beos ed'rjKe tov rjXiov virep 777s. PLAT.

God placed the sun above the earth.

Motion over

eK/cv/3i<TTav virep roiv %i,($>a>v. Xen.

To turn a somersault over the swords.

In the interior of a country :

rjp^aro ei; AiBioiria<i t?}? virep Avyvwrov. ThTJC.

It began in Aethiopia which is beyond Aegypt, i.e.

higher up, further inland.

2. Figuratively:

To protect, in defence of, cf. irpo

vvv virep iravrwv aycov. Aesch.

Now is the contest in defence of our all.

Joined with 71700, Eur. Ale. 690.

In the interest of

01 virep tov /JcAtmjtov Xeyovres. DeM. 9. 63.

Those who speak in, the cause of what is best.

On account of

KXavpara /fyaSvrijTos virep. SOPH. Ant. 932.Tears as a punishment for slowness.

Instead of:

diroKpiveo-dai virep twos, Plat. Rep.590, to answer forone. Cf. Th^^wJ^toC.

With a view to

virep tou prj irpdrreiv to irposraTTopevov, ISOO. 152 D, in

order not to do what was bidden. Cf. Riddell, Digest,

p. 167.

B. With Accusative. Chief signification figurative,

beyond, i.e. in excess of.

1. Of Place :

Beyond

t&v ovpemv r&v xnrep Me/i<fnv iroKcv Keipevav to

fiera^v. Hdt.

The space between the hills which lie beyond the city

of Memphis.

2. Figuratively :

In excess of:

ovk ecxTiv inrep avQpwirov rovro. Plat.

This is not beyond the power of man.

wrlp eXirtSa, past, beyond hope; xnrep 17/ms, beyond our

power ; wrlp Svvap.iv, beyond one's ability.

More than

«retrov imp Teo-vepaKOvro. avSpas. HEROD. V. 64.There fell over more than 40 men.

3. Oe Time :

Before

6 Trpbs tov klyivtjTWV virep ra MijStKa Tro\ep,ov.

Thuc. i. 41.

The war with the Aegmetms before the Persian wars.

As an adverb

Very rarely; cf. Euk. Med. 627, St. Paul ad Cor. 11. xi.

26, inrep eyai.

In Composition :

(1) Across or beyond, hence of excess or transgression,

virepl3aiva>, I go beyond, I transgress, omit, surpass. (2)

For, m defence of, wrepaXyio, I grieve for(also

exceedingly)as by (1) ; -^s^ffi^fo/

" " '

Other usages of fierd with the Accusative, going among,going in quest or search of, according to, are chiefly Epic. For

themthe

Lexiconshould

be consulted.Note 1. With the Accusative /^era denotes either (1) motion

to the midst of, or (2) extension- over the midst of. The idiomaticphrases with /jcto and Accusative will fall under one of these

two heads. Thus (1) fiera ravra, next to, after this (lit. goinginto the midst of, and so succeeding, or coming next to); (2) fiWvmipav, interdiu, in the daytime {during, extending over the day);jiterci x"/°as ex etv

> f° have *** hand.

Note. 2. In Homer and in poetry perd is also used with theDative to denote presence among, one among others, withoutthe close connexion denoted by the Genitive.

fitTa 8e Tpirdrouriv avacrcrev, II. i. 252, he was ruler among(in the presence of) the third generation.

Cf. Eur. Erechth. 26.

As an adverbAmong, amid, next, afterwards, often in Homer.In Herod, also afterwards, pera Se, &rX«re k.t.X., i. 128.

In Composition :

(1) Together with, /ueT«x* ) , I have together with or share.

(2) Going- to, among, or extending over, or in the midst of:/teraix/ttov, the space between armies ; /j,e8ir)/ju, 1 let loose

(among). (3) Of succession, alternation, change, juctuSo/o-

7rios, after dinner ; peTayiyvwo-KO), I change my mind;perdvota, repentance.

N.B, Coming among implies following some, and so suc-

cession and alternation. Thus if a bead is put amongor between others in a necklace, it comes after, andalternates with, other beads.

III.— PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

§ 273. 'A/t#.

'Afi(j>l, on loth sides (about, around). Cf. a/icpca, dfupo-

reoo?. Sansk. abhi, Lat. amb, (am-, an-), amb-o, amb-io.

'AfMpi related in form to dfi<f>i<: as e'/e to e'£. Compare

throughout With ^itized by Microsoft®

318 PREPOSITIONS.

Note. In Attic Prose dp.<$>L is practically used with the

Accusative only.

A. With Accusative.

About the time of, cf. ire pi:

77S77 rjv dfMJH ayopav irXTjdovaav. XEN.

It was now already about full market time {forenoon).

dpcj>l TrevTrjKovTa 6x57, about 50 years.

(Employed) about

aaKovai tcl afi<f>t tov irohepbov. XEN.

They practise the arts of war.

dp<f>l ti (e.g. cttttovs, dppara, Sewrvov, etc.) ex e ' v >e ' Vl TLpuTayopav (IIAaTajva), the school of Protagoms

(of Plato). The phrase (especially in later writers)

is a periphrasis for Pythagoras himself.

So 01 dpcju S<!/o£ea;

the army of Xerxes, Herod., but ol

dp.<j>l Meyapeas kgu <f>Xia<Tiovs (HDT. ix. 69) the

Megarians and Phliasians.

Less common uses

(Epic and poetical) fj\9e<s a/ufA AaSwvrjv, Aesch. P. V.,

830, thou earnest nigh (about) Dodona, cf. 419 ;pepipva. 8'

d/x(f>l ttoXlv, Aesch. Sept. c. Iheb. 843 (care about the

city).

B. With Genitive (the uses are very rare and wholly

Epic, Ionic, and Poetic).

Concerning, cf. irepi

dp<f>l o-ijs Aeyw iratSds, Eur. Hec. 580 (7 tell thee of thy

child). Cf. Soph. Phil. 554. Aesch. Ag. 67, dp<j>l

yvvaiKos (in the cause of).

Round about

Hdt. viii. ISl^^te&^r").

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 319

C. With Dative (wholly Epic, Ionic, and Poetic).

Among :

(dfKJil KXaSots efo/tera, Euk. Phoen. 1518 (seated amongbranches).

Concerning :

a/KJi 6/mh o-TEveis, Soph. El. 1180 (thou sighest for, aboutme).

PHKASES,cf. vepi:

dfi<j>l T<ip/3ei (<£o/3^>), prae pavore, for fear. In poetry.

As an adverb, on either side. Homeric use.

§ 274. 'Em.

'Eirl, on the surface of, upon, by, to. Cf. en-el, then.

Sansk. api, further, after, Lat. ob. See anro.

A. With Genitive.

1. Of Place =

Upon, with verbs of rest

ira<{ o t €tti 777? icai vtto 777? ftpvcro?. PLAT.

All the gold on earth and under the earth.

So£(f>'

i7r7rov, very often.

With verbs of motion :

eire/iyfrav avrovs em rpi^pov;. XeN.

They sent them away on board a trireme.

And in Gonstructio Praegnans, dvafirjvai em wvpymv,

Xen., to climb up, and be on towers.

Towards (a common use)

ol jjvfjL/Aa'Xpt, ave%a>pr}crav eir olkov. THUO.

The allies returned homewards.

Cf. i. 60, em Qpa/fvi- „„. ^Digitized by Microsoft®

320 PREPOSITIONS.

In, by, near, at

£7ri v-fja-ov, in the island ; 77/5 cti fays (Soph. 0. C), in a

foreign land ; iv ayopq. «ri t!ov rpairetfUv, Plat. Ap. 1,

m the market at (by) the tables of the banks; kin 81-

Kcwrripiov, ISAE., in COwt.

to eirt Bp$Kys, Thuc. (see Poppo and Kriiger) (the parts

in) the neigh.be/wrhood or the district of Thrace or Thraoe-

wards. So «u t^s AaKcovc/djs, v. 34. lirl rfj's auroJi'

fiivnv, to remain in their own country, Thuc iv. 118.

In presence of, coram. Cf. irapa.

k^eXkyyea-Oai eirl wavrutv. DEM. 781. 4.

To be convicted in presence of all.

2. Of Time (very common)

e7rt Kvpov fiacriXevovTO*;, in the reign of Cyrus ; eiri

@'e/MaToicKeov<; apypvTos, in the archonshipof

Themistocles ; e-rri twv -Trare'pcov, in the time of our

fathers ; eir e/xov, in my time ; to? eirt, kivBvvov,

as in time of danger (Thuc. vi. 34).

3. Figuratively:

Set over, engaged in

e/j,€vev ewi Trj<; ap^r)<;. XEN.

He was continuing in command.

Phrases :

So peveiv eiri tivos, to abide by a thing ; liri tZv irpa.yp.6^

t(i>v (tov iroA.6/*ov) etvai, to be engaged in business,

in war ; hn, yv&pvqs ytyvarOai, to come to an opinion,

Dem. 42. 4.

o e-irl raiv ojtAitcov (ottXwv), eirl rmv lirrrkw, the commanderof the infantry, cavalry ; 6 iirl rrjs Skhktjo-ews, the con-

troller of the treasury, paymaster-general.

Resting, dependent upon, e<js iavrov, etc.

ifi eavTov, of or by oneself, independently or separately,spontaneously, is a common phrase; ifi lavi-oS xAetv,Thuc, to sail by oneself or alone; id>' eavrov otVeiv

Digitized by Microsoft® '

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. yi\

Xen., to live apart, separately; ifi vp,!ov avr&v /3aA-

\eo-6ai, Hdt., to consider by yourselves ; i<j>' IwvtZv Sia-

Xiyovrai, Hdt., they speak a language or dialect of theirown, a distinct dialect; hr' dyKvpeaw, at anchor, Hdt.i. 188.

In the case of

With \eyai, alo-ddvofiai, o-kottS) (I examine or consider),

Kpivw, I decide or judge.

a £ttI rav aXkatv Spare, ravr' e<j>' vp.G>v avTW ayvoeire.

Is. viii. 114.

What you see in (the case of) others, that you are ignorant

of in your own case.

So or' ipov keyuv, Plat. Rep. 475, to speak in my own

case, to take myself as an instance ; iirl iravToiv 6p.o'w>%

in all cases i

"

Galled after

KCKAijcrflat, 6vop.a<r8rjviU hrl Ttvos (HDT.), to be

after a person ; f/ dp-fjvq rj eiri 'AvtoAkiSov, Dem., the

peace of Antalcidas.

hrl wd/jaTos eTvai, to bear a name, Dem. 1000. 21.

Military phrases

tTa\6r](7av iirl Terrdpiov. XEN. An. i. 2. 15.

They were drawn up four deep.

Generally of the depth, sometimes of the length, of a line.

hrl irivrriKOvra ao-7rl8(ov crvveo-Tpa.p.p.evoi.

Xen. Hell. vi. 4. 12.

Massed in column fifty shields deep.

to jaeTQ)7rov hrl TpiaKocriwv, to Se /3a#os £</>' ckcltov.

Xen. Cyr. ii. 4. 2.

The length of the line was four hundred, its depth one hundred.

ity evds, m single file ; hr 6Xly<av Tao-o-eo-0<u, to be drawn

up in a long lime (or a shallow column) (Xen. and

Thoc).

vXslv «ri Keptos (cf. Accus.), to sail in column (towardsthe

wimg), (KardDi^mbk^yiimmsMvo.u. 19, m single file).

322 PREPOSITIONS.

Miscellaneous phrases :

arl tov eiiavv/Aov, iirl rov TrXevpuiv, on the left, on the

flanks.

tTrl irdvTwv, Dem., on all occasions; i<t>' eKao-nov, Plat.,

on each occasion.

fort TeXevrrjs, at last; «ri <rxoA??s, at leisure, leisurely;

«?r' tVijs, equally (Soph. El. 1061); evl irpo<£ao-ios,

Hdt., as a pretext ; eirl SpKov, on oath (Hdt. ix. 11)€7rl TTposTroXov jUias, dependent on one handmaid, Soph.

0. C. 746.

B. With the Dative.

[The uses should be compared with those of the Genitive.

They often run closely parallel. 'E7ri with Dative, meaningupon, is commoner in Prose than with the Genitive; the poets

use both cases indifferently. 'E-n-l with the Dative implies

closer connection than iiri with Genitive.]

1. Of Place :

Over, on

oi QpaKes akwrreiuhas stti, rals /cecpa\ai<; (fcopovai.

Xen.The Thracians wear fox-shin caps (fitted to) on their

heads. Of. Eue. Bacch. 757.

N.B. ifi tWoi must not be used for e^>' mi/.

toxis OTrAtTas ore vavcrlv 6X.tya.is evdvs TrefXTvovcriv.

Thug. ii. 80 (cf. iv. 10).They at once despatch the hoplites in (on board) a few ships.

Against :

ai vrjes £<f>'ij^iv Terdxarai. ThUC. iii. 13 (cf. iv. 70).

The ships are drawn up against us.

Cf. Soph. Ai. 51, «r' Sfifiaa-t fidXXeiv (Constr. Praegn.).

In, at, near, by :

oi/ce'ovres eirl Hrpvpovi, Hdt., living on the shores

of, or near, the Strymon.Digitized by Microsoft®

of twv dpitTTtav IIepcr<3v irafSes eVt rats fia(ri\eu>s Ovpais

TraiSevovrai. XEN. An. i. 9. 3.

The sons of the noblest Persians are brought up at (close by)the king's gate (at the " Sublime Porte ").

Of. Soph. Tr. 1100, Phil. 353.

Next after

to, em tovtok, the next step.

Of. Hom. Od. vii. 216, ov yap ri arvyepr) eiri yaa-repi

Kvvrepov aWo, naught more blatant next to (than)the belly.

ot IttI irao-tV, the rear ; oAiyoi ™v hrl 7racriv vwb tSiv

\pi\Qv airidavov, few of the rear were slain by the light-

armed, Xen. Hell. i. 1. 34.

2. Of Time (rarely)

Generally of succession, after, or following :

eKTfi hrl SeKary or rrj e/crg hrl 8h«x.

Dem. 279. 18, 288. 29.

On the lbth of the month (sixth after the tenth).

Near, about (very rare in Attic)

fjv fjXios hrl Sw/ious. Xen. An. vii. 3. 34.

It was near sunset (the sun was at his setting).

3. FIGURATIVELY :

Set over and actively engaged in :

Toils hrl rots trpa.ypjo.o-iv ovtos airilavTai. DEM.

They accuse those who are engaged in public affairs.

So oi hrl reus /i5jx ava ' si

*""' T0 ' s Ka A"7^-°'Sj XEN., thcte in

guard of the engines, the camels, etc.

Generally at, in, of circumstances ;

hrl t<£> irapovn, Thxtc. ii. 36, on the present occasion (to

speak) ; hrl t<JS SetVv<j>, Xen., at supper.

With : (by no means an infrequent use).

Of. Eur. Bacch., hr' evdo-pao-i, with joyous shouts (cf. 1368).

Of. also Soph. Ant. 556, hr' app^ols Aoyois, with words

unspoken, kir' kfyupyo.o-p.kv.01% when a deed is done and

over, Aesch. Ag.1379, Soph. Ai. 377, Eue. Bacch.

1039. Digitized by Microsoft®

324 PREPOSITIONS.

In reference to, in case of, connected with :

vd/tov ridkvai iirl tlvi, Plat., to make a law for, in the

case of, a person (for or against him) ; so vo/j.os kcitm

hri tlvi, DEM.

to i-n-l t$ o-w/mTi kclXXo?, Plat., beauty of person.

Upon, i.e. accumulated on, added to :

•TrrjfiaTa em irrniaariv nrlirrovTO. SOPH. Ant. 595.

Woes falling on woes.

So itrl Tovroif, , thereupon, on. this, very frequently

in Attic.

Hence probably phrases connected with meals : «ri t<j>

<riT<p irlveiv vSuip, Xen., to drink water with one's food.

Dependent upon, in power of, with el/u and rylypo/Mai,

ei eirii toi<; 7ro\e/Mot? eyevovro Tt av eiraQov ;

Xen. An. v. 8. 17.

If they had fallen into the hands of the enemy, what

would have been their fate ?

to «r' '4fioi, to eirl o-oi, so far as in my, thy, power.

Cf. Ace. to €iri o-<j!>as etvai.

(Be named) after, on the ground of

eirl rrj e'xfyp o-rao-ts K£/cA?jTai, Plat. Bep. 470, see Stall-

baum and references there, sedition is so called from(intestine) hatred.

Causal, with words of emotion, at, for, because of:

eiru tovi fiaXHTTa ayaWrj ; Xen.In what do you most take delight ?

So with x a V") I rejoice ; o-e/H/wo/mt, I pride myselfoWxepcuvw, I am.mxed, etc., and corresponding adjec-tives, and substantives such as eiraivos, <£tAoTi/ua, etc.

So fr/uofotfat %fg^^ 6ro %Jfe fmed for a thing.

Condition

eirl rovTip irwefyorapai Trjs ap^ryi. HeeOD.

On this condition I resign my command.

So very often «ri tovtq, ihri toijtois, k(f> $ (tc), «r* ovSevt,

kirl rots (ifyrjfitvoi's, on the conditions expressed.

Motive

ifrevSerat re icah eiri tt} efirj SiafioXfj Xeyet.

Plat. Apol. v.

He is lying, and is speaking with a view to prejudice

you against me.

eirl KaKovpyiif, Thuc. i. 37, for knavish purposes ; ovk «ri

vfipitjzcrOai aXX' eiri t£ rjyepoves elvai, THTJC. i. 38, not

m order to be insulted, but m order to be rulers ; hrl t£icepSei, Xen. for gain ; eirl vcxptq., to get wisdom, Plat.

N.B. In Plat. Prot. 358b,

withGen., IttI rov aAwws

0Jv, with a view to living a painless life ; Liddell and

Scott.

The reward or price

tvyyeve&datL

Opr)pZ «rt ir6<T(f (sc. purdSy) av tis Se£<uto ;

Plat. Apol. xxxii.

For what price would any of you be willing to meet Homer?

So eiri Spa\py Savdfav, DEM. 816. 12.To lend money at twelve per cent. See Diet, of Antiq.

iirl dvSpaTroSois Savetfeiv. DEM. 822. 8.

To lend money on the security of slaves (i.e. to hold a mort-

gage on the slaves).

Phrases :

Xkyew eVt rtvt, to speak in any one's praise (perhaps over

the body of). Aesch. Ag. 1400.

C. With Accusative (1) Direction to, or (2) Extension,

over.

Direction :

Upon

Set dvafirjvai eirl rov Ittttov. XeN.

He must mu^n) jhisjiorse^

326 PREPOSITIONS.

To:TrpoTpeirtTe toiis veaiTepovs iir' dperrjv. IS. 3. 57.

Urge the younger to (the pursuit of) virtue.

As far as :

rj a-px^) V 'OSpvuwv IttI OaXacrcrav Kadr/Kei. THUC. II. 97.

The kingdom of the Oolrysae stretches as far as the sea.

(See Phrases.)

Against :

ovk eucos apj(r\v eiri ap^tjv arparevaai. THUC.It is not likely that empire will advance against

empire.

For, for purpose of:

eifkeov ov-% <o<; €7ri vavp,ayiav. THUC.

They were sailing not as though for the purpose

of a sea-fight.

To fetch:

Trepyirovcriv eirl Atjfiotrdevqv kcu oti tos eiKocri vavs.

Thuc. iii. 105,

They send for Demosthenes and for the twenty ships.

So KaAetv J7rt Sewrvov, to summon to supper.

Extension :

Over, in space or time :

to ojxp,a Svvarai, emTroWa cnahia e^iKvelcrdai. XEN.

The eye (sight) can reach over many stades.

e0v£TO eirt, Tjoets' rjfiipw;. XEN.

He was sacrificing for the space of three days.

Phrases : (1) Direction.€7ti 77av iXBiiv, to come to an extremity, try every means

eirl to p.d^ov Koir/jbetv, to exaggerate (be extravagant inembellishing), Thuc. i. 21. (Cf. viii. 74.)

To produce (of a purpose) :

«r( to. yeXoiorepa, Plat., to raise a laugh. So Zirl to.

aurxiova (i<a\Xloi, to fSeXnov, to aptivov), changingto, resulting iih

i §jmffifMHmSfi(k etter , etc).



328 PREPOSITIONS.

§ 275. Ilapd.

Ilapd (wapai, Trap), by the side of, to the side of (the

primitive notion being that of going through or crossing).

Sansk. parti, away and towards, Lat. per, Eng. from (Goth.

fra, fram). Ilapd and irepi are related forms from the

root PAR, to fare or go through.

A. With Genitive, 1 coming or proceeding from (but

originally aside, at the side, or sideways from).

Coming from

e%e~k6elv vapd twos, to come from a person's house,

or country, or court.

yiyvso-Oai irapa twos, Pl. Symp. 179 B, to be lorn of or

sprung from.e'xetv wapd rtvos (DEM.), to receive from ; ixavddvciv irapa

(Eur.), to learn from.

The Agent with passive verbs :

irapa twos Sl8oo-8ai, \iyeo~6ai, o-vp.f$ov\.ev€0-Qai, to be given,

said, advised by any one.

Periphrastically for the Genitive, etc.

at irapa tmv Stj/jwv Scopccu. DEM. 20. 15.

The gifts of democracies.

So 17 srapa rtvos evvorn, to Trap' e/jx>v dBbeq/ui (the wrongdone by me), Xen.

Phrases :

oi irapa twos, one's friends, dependants, messengers, etc.,

Thug, and Xen. ; to. irapa Ttvos, one's commands,purposes, opinions ; trap' iavrov SiSovai, to give of one's

resources, or spontaneously; Trap' Zpov, Pl. Prot. 322 D,by my advice.

1 The Genitive with irapa appears to represent the Ablative ; thusirapax^pew tou fSrlfiaros would first have meant to

move sideways fromthe tribune. „ „. „„Digitized by Microsoft®

B. With Dative, by the side of, near, by, with. (Of

persons, seldom of places, wapd aoi, at your side.)

Among, with

trap vp.lv eTpd(f)7]v, AESCHIN., I was brought up amongyou.

KardXveiv trapa nvi, Dem., to lodge with any one,

chez quelqu'un.

Belonging to :

to p,ev xpvtriov Trapa tovtw, ot 8e kivSvvoi Trap' vp.tv.

Aeschin. iii. 240.

This man gets the gold, you the dangers.

In presence of:

eis Kpimv Kadta-rdvai riva Trapa, tivi. THUC, DEM.To bring any one to trial before another.

In the judgment of:

Trapa. rots (ppovovo-iv ei8oKipuv. Is. 9. 74.

To be in good repute with sensible people.

So Trap' ipot, me iudice. Trapa o-avT$, PLAT.

Phrases :

01 Trap' Ipoi (rjptv), my own people; to. Trap' kp.01, myaffairs.

1. Motion to (with per-

sons, irapa ere, to your

side), with verbs of

motion.

2. Motion or extension

alongside, with verbs of

rest.

3. Parallelism and com-

parison, side by side,

figuratively.Digitized by Microsoft®

c J

C. With the Accusative : <

330 PREPOSITIONS.

I. Of Place :

1. Motion to

ewefl^rav Trap' 'ABrjvalow; 7rpe«7/3et9. XHUC

They sent envoys to the Athenians.

ekriivai, </>oitoV napd rtva, to enter, go to any one's house.

Cf. Genitive and Dative.

2. Extension along or beside :

7] Trapa daXacraav MaiceSovia. ThTJC.

The seaboard of Macedonia. Cf. Xen. An. iii. 5. 1,

Soph. El. 183.

3. Parallelism and Comparison :

Side by side (with verbs of examining)

irap' aKkrfka ecrrai (paveparaTa. DEM.

Set side by side they will be most conspicuous.Trap' oppa, before one's eyes, Eur. Supp. 484.

Compared with (often implying superiority) :

peyaXt) pOTrfj ij t v XV va P a ira.VTa to. twv avnpanrwv

it pay para. DEM. 2. 22.

Fortune is a mighty makeweight compared with all humaninfluences. Cf. Xen. Apol. i. 4. 14 (so used especially

with comparatives).

Beyond and contrary to, opposed to /card :

Many phrases : irapa. hvvapiv, beyond one's strength.

Trapa to Sikoiiov, ras (nroi/Sas, tovs vopovs, <f>vcriv, yvu>pr)v,

S6£av (Adyov), contrary to, or in violation of ',justice, the

treaty, the laws, nature, opinion, expectation (praeter

opinionem, spem).

Note. Several peculiar and much debated constructions

occur with jrapa and the Accusative.

Causal :

Owing to, in consequence of, cf. Bid with Accusative.

€Ka<rTO? ov 7rapd tyjv tavrov dpeXelav (Herat /3Aa^av tyjv

tt6Xi.v, Thuc. i. 141, each man imagines that he will not

in consequence ofhis

ownneglect

injure the state. Cf.Dem. Phil. iDfelttmpfflWokm™ P'W-

Besides, in addition to

ovk co-Tt irapa ravr' aXXa, ARIST. Nub, 698, there's

nothing else besides this; irapa ravra irdvra hepov ti,

Pl. Phaed. xix., besides all this something quite different

irXriyfj irapa irXrjyrjv, Ar. Ban. 643, blow for blow (im-plying alternation).

II. Of Time :

During ;

tov SoXtov avopa <f>ev<ye irap oXov tov ftiov.

Menand.Avoid a cunning man thy whole life long.

So irapa. iravra tov xpovov, irapa. ttotov, AESCHIN., inter

potandum. Cf. Lat. per totam vitam.

At the moment of :

irapa. toiovtov Kaipov, DEM., at such a moment ; irap' avra.

TaSiKrjfiaTa, Dem. 21. 26, at the wry moment of the

wrong-doing, flagrante delicto. Of. Zir' avTocjxipw, in

the very act.

Note 1. trap' fjp.kpav is generally taken to mean on each alternate

day. See Soph. Ai. 475. Lobeck and Jebb consider that it

rather means day by day, as each day comes. The phrase occursin Dem. viii. 70. In Soph. 0. C. 1455, irap' fjp.ap a3#ts appearsto mean on the following day. irapa. pjva t/mtov, Aristot., every

third month.

Note 2. irapa. (motion to), in certain phrases denoting the limit

reached, is used of excess or defect, and so describes the differ-

ence of two things.

irapa to(tovtov 17 MutiAijvjj ^X9e klvSvvov. ThUC. iii. 49.Mitylene came within such a distance of danger.

Cf. THUC. vii. 2, vi. 37 (irapa. TotrovTov yiyvwa-Kio, so muchwithm the mark is my opinion); iv. 106, irapa. vvi<ra iyevero

XajBeiv, came within a night of taking, i.e. one night only stood in

the way of taking.

To this construction belong a great many phrases, e.g. irapa.

p,iKpov, iroXv, oXiyov, f3pa)(y eXdeuv,yevktrdai, diro(pevyeiv, viKav,

to come within, a Uttie^i^^i^'Mffa'iBl^- esca P e>

io w^ n a narrow



333 PREPOSITIONS.

or a hollow victory. Similarly Trap' oiSev, pinpov, oXlyov iroieurOai,

ayeiv, dicrdai, eTvai, to hold of no, little, account, be of little account.

In Composition :

(1) Alongside, Trapto-Tripi, / set alongside; irapa/3dXXop,ai,

I expose or stake ; 7rapd\Xr]X.os, beside one another. Hence(2) of alternation, TrapaXXdo-o-o), I make alternate. (3)

Aside, beside the mark, amiss, irapa/3aiva>, / transgress.

§ 276. Tlepi.

Ilepi, round about, beyond, over, very (cf. adverbial use).

Cf. nrept-^, round about; mpto-a-os, excessive ;—Trap, how-

ever much. Sansk. pari, round about, Lat. per(magnus).

See irapa.

Compare throughout with dp.cf>L

A. With Genitive.

In prose the meanings are figurative : the local use is Epicand poetical (cf. Eur. Tro. 818).

The Object for or about which :

aytovi^eade iravres irept aperr}*;. Xen.

Strive all of you after excellence.

So o dywv (6 kivSvvos, etc.) rrepl foxV* ("" e P' tSv peyicmov)Zo-tl, the struggle is for life (for the highest objects).

With verbs of caring, thinking, fearing, etc.

peXei poi, {SovXevofiai, 4>of3ovpat rrepl tivos, I care etc. fora thing.

Also of saying and hearing .

dyy£XXu>, Xeyw, aKOVto, pep.vrjp.ai rrept Ttvos.

The use of these verbs with Trepj. should be comparedwith the use of the simple Genitive in Epic and in Poetry.

Phrases :

iprrdpm ?xav mpi tivos, Aeschin., to beexperienced in athing. (Cf. ^^vy^L^enitive without ™P L)

PREPOSniOtfS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 333

Periphrastically

at irepl 'HpaicXeovs irp&geis, Plat., the deeds of Heracles.

iroieuroai, fiyeicrdai ri irepl ttoXXov ((r/juKpov, ovSevos,

iravros), to esteem a thmg highly, etc. irepl here contains

the old meaning beyond, cf. irepiyiyvopai, I get beyond,

i.e. 1

B. With Dative.

Comparatively rare in Prose : in a local sense the Dative

denotes a closer connexion than the Genitive, cf. hri withGenitive and Dative.

Close round, around and upon ; the literal meaning leads

on to the figurative

elSe irepl rij X^P 1 T0 " venpov %pvcrovv SaicTvXiov.

Plat.

He saw round the finger of the corpse a golden ring.

A good example in Xen. An. vii. 4. 4, irepl rots cn'epvois, etc.

Keirai Be i/e/cpos irepl veKpui. SOPH. Ant. 1244.

Be lieth dead, clasping close the dead.

Transfixed by a weapon :

Common in Homer (so dp,<j>i, Od. xii. 395).

ireTrrwra rQSe irepl veoppdvrtp £t<f>ei. SOPH. Ai. 828.

Fallen upon this new-reeking sword.

The Object about which, very rare in Prose (cf. Gen.)

irepl tq SifcsAip &TTai 6 dydv. THUG. VI. 34.

The struggle will be for Sicily.

See Poppo.

irepl T<j> X"¥"V ^eurav. THUC. i. 67.

They feared for (about) the place.

Cf. Plat. Prot. 314 a, wept rots faX-rdms -. Phaed. 114d,.

irepl t$ crw/xcm.

The cause (poetical). Cf . dfi<f>l

irepl 4>6fi(j>,irepl rap/Sei, irepl xa/ytart. (In Poetry.)

F<»f m>f W%%£U%cro S om

334 PREPOSITIONS.

C. With Accusative.

[Motion round about, Epic]

1. Of Place, the literal meaning sometimesrunning into

the Figurative

Rest round about, near, at, by, in :

ol ecj>j]/3oi Koi/j,a>vrat irepi ra ap%e2a. Xen.

The Ephebi sleep by (in the neighbourhood of) the

town-hall.

. KaX t»js Ke<£<xA,ijs Kareaye Kepi, XiOov xe<ru>v.

Ar. Aeh. 1180.

And he fell on a stone and lias cracked his crown.

Cf. DEM. 21. 4, irepi avrd Karappeiv.

Fall in ruins (lit. about themselves).

So THUC. vii. 23, irepi dAA.77A.as Tapa,\deura.L.

Cf. the Dative, irepi, £i<£et, etc.

rj irepi Aevjiov vavpa.\ia. XEN. Sell. iL 3. 22.The sea-fight off Lesbos.

2. Time:

About or near, with numbers :

rj&r) tjv Trepi irKr]dovcrav ar/opav. Xen.It was now near full-market hour.

So irepc tovtovs toijs XP° V0V? - THUC.About this period, or time.

irepi ej38ofi.riKovTa, Thuc. i. 54, about seventy.

3. Figuratively :

Be busied aboiot, engaged in. Cf. d/j,<f>l :

With eTvcu, yiyvecrOai, Siarpifieiv, <Tirov8d£eii

oi<ti auT(j) irepi ravra o J£vpvp.eS<ov diravrq. THUC. vii. 31.While he was engaged in this Eurymedon met him.

See Phrases below.

Towards, i.e. with reference to

irepi tov debv dcre/3ov<riv. ANTIPH.They are impious with regard to (in their dealings with, or

duty towards) the god.

336 PREPOSITIONS.

§ 277. II/30S.

U/30? (Ep. and Dor. 77730™, ttotl), towards, to, in front

of, before, opposite, beside. Sansk. prati, towards, Eng.forth-with. IIpo-Ti is formed from 77700'.

Cf. irp6cr-9ev, in front.

A. With Genitive,1

generally of direction towards, or

with reference to, without implied motion.

Towards

In presence or in sight of

o tl hUatov ea-rt km 77730? 6ewv ical 717309 avdpayrrcov

Xen.

Whatever is right in the sight of gods and men.

to 777309 Hacv5)vo<; rel^ps e^erei^iaav. XEN.

They completed the wall which faced Sicyon.

A very common usage in prose and poetry (the verb, such

as iivai or Kelo-dai, is readily understood).

So in entreaties :

V / II 19'71730? vvv <re iraTpo<s, 777309 re (irjTpos, 10 Teicvov.

mc6t»7? licvovfuu. Soph.

Now by thy father, by thy mother, boy,

Suppliant I supplicate thee.

Note. A very common use. Observe (1) that ere is often

inserted thus, 717)09 o-e Trarpos, cf. per te deos oro; (2) the

verb is often omitted, 717)05 Aids, 71-pos deSv, pr) 71706$ ytvelov,

jLiij Trpos tre yovvmv.

On the side of

A\iuj3i,aS'r]<; \eyerai 71730? irarpo^ A\Kp,aioiBa>v

elvai. Dem.Alcibiades is said to have been descended from the

Alcmaeonidae on the father's side.

1 Observe that the Genitive with irp6s is a genuine Genitive and nota representative of the lost Ablative, —connection, not separation, beingdenoted.

Cf. Soph. Ai. 1305, tovs npos aiâro's, blood relations. Cf.

Soph. El. 1125 and 1075 (ra irpos t£kv<ov).

Belonging to (periphrastically for Genitive alone) :

ov 7rpo? tarpov cro<fiov

8pi)veZv eTr(pBa<; irpo'i rofi&VTt irijfiaTi. SOPH.

'Tis not a wise physician's part

To mumble spells o'er sore that needs the knife.

So 7rpos yvvai«6<s, like a woman, etc.

And with qualities, 71750s Suojs, in accordance -with justice.

SOPH. 0. T. 1014; ov 71730s T>js fyt£T6/)(Xs So'îjg, Thuc. iii.

59, it does not accord with your reputation.

In favour of:

7T/30S t&v ej(pvT(ov <5ot/3e TOV VOflOV Ttdrjv. Eur.

Thou makest this law in favour of the rich, Phoebus.

On the part of, at the hand of:

hraivov revêrai 717305 yovv e/iov. SOPH.

He shall meet with praise at least from me.

The agent with Verbs and Adjectives (very common in Ionic

and in poetry)

KCpos ofi.oXoye.lTai irpos iravTiov KpaTto-ros yeveo~9ai.Xen. An. i. ix. 20.

Cyrus is admitted by all to have been most excellent.

Cf. Aesgh. P. V. 650, Soph. An. 919 (ep^/tos 71-pos 4>i\a>v).

Cf. El. 562 (with a Substantive).

In poetry also, rarely, of things. Soph. El. 1236.

B. With Dative.

Near or beside, in rest

ol Trora/Mol 7T/30? rats irrjr/al'; ov jj,etya\oi eiaiv. XENRivers near their sources are not big.

Soph. 0. T. 1169, 7rpos t£> oWco, on the brink of horror.

In presence of :

In Demosthenes : -pds tois ;<p<,tc«s, in the presence of the

jurymen: Trpos «fr ^gSg^'feygfej^T"")-

338 PREPOSITIONS.

Engaged in

Plat. Phaed. xxxv. 84 0.

Socrates was absorbed in the conversation held.

Cf. totus erat in sermone. Hoe. Sat. i. 9. 2.

Note. A frequent prose usage : thai, ylyveo-6ai, Sia.rpv/3eiv,

ttjv yvwp/qv e'x £ ' v ""P^s tivi.

In addition to

7rpo? toZ? itapovcnv aWa irposXafielv 8e\eK.

Aesch.In addition to thy present woes thou wouldst add

other woes.

77/30? Tot? aWof?, in addition to the rest.

So constantly 77730? toutoi?, praeterea, in addition

to, besides this, seldom 777305 tovtco.

C. With Accusative:

1. (i) Direction towards, or to, implying motion,

(ii) Kelation to or connection with (a very free

and post-Epic usage).

Tmvards, to, literally and figuratively

ecpvyov 777305 ttjv yr\v. Xen.

They fled to the shore.

r] <f)ikoTi[ua Trapofjvvet, 77730? rh Ka\a. Xen.

Ambition spurs to noble aims.

With verbs of speaking

eiprjaerai 77730? u/i£? waaa rj aXrjBeia. DEM.The whole truth shall be told you (spoken out

beforeyou).

Very commonly, cnre.lv, \kyeiv, <f>pdfciv, airoKpiveo-dai 71-pos

nva. Soph. El. 640, irpbs <j!><3s (to proclaim), publidy, in

broad daylight, in luce.

Xkyuv irpos nva, to speak in reply, advorsus aliquem.Aiyeiv Kara tivos, to speak against (in accusation of), in

aliquem.Digitized by Microsoft®

With verbs of considering

"koylaaade 77730? vfia<; avrov<i n avfi^aerai. Dem.

Consider with yourselves what will happen.

So evdvpeTcrOai, dva,p.vr)<r9rjvai irepl twos. Cf. SOPH. El. 285.

avrrj irpbs avT'qv, alone by myself.

Of dealings with

oirov8a<} (ffvvdqiatsi) iroiovfiat 71730? nva, I make atruce, treaty with.

So ^vftfiaxta, tpiXia, i\8pa, aTrunia, TroAe/Jos irpds Tiva.

tt/309 to-us SiKacrrd's, in the presence of the jwry.

Against :

7T/30S toiis MijSovs kyivovro dyadot. THUC. i. 86.

They proved themselves brave men against the Medes.

Cf. Xen. Cyr. ii. 3. 13.

jrpos Kevrpa firj Xanrifr. Prov. —Kick not against the pricks.

Generally, with reference to

ovftlv avrif jrpos ttjv iroXvv cart. DEM. 528. 16.

Re has nothing to do with the city.

ao-^aAoJs ex € ' v ""pos Tt > Xen., to feel safe or comfortable

about.

Miscellaneous Phrases:

With a purpose:

ypr) 777309 to irapbv uet fiovkeveaOat,. Isoc.

We should ever deliberate with an eye to the present.

So eroi/jos, xPV <TllJL0 '

s > 'Ka^s ""pos ts, ready, etc., for a purpose.

According to

irpbs aXXov tfiv, Dem., to live according to the standard

of another,

wpos rrjv 5vva.jj.iv, according to one's ability (pro viribus).

irpbs rets tux«s (Eur. Hipp. 701), suited to one's fortunes.

In consequence of, on hearing :

yakeiraiveiv 777309 ri. THUC. To be annoyed on hearing.

a0vfia><! exeiv 77730'? Tt. To be despondent.

77-po? Tavrriv *hv <bwr\v. Hdt. Ad hanc famam.r Digitized by Microsoft®

34° PREPOSITIONS.

irpos Tavra :

irpo*; t/; wherefore? 717)09 Tavra, therefore.

Sometimes introducing a defiance or challenge, so then

e.g. Soph. 0. T. 455.

Compared, with

iroXXfj av eh) diritTTia t»}s Svva/jecos 7rpos to kAIos oiutwi'.

THUC. i. 10.

There would be a strong disbelief in their power as comparedwith their reputation.

Of. Hdt. iii. 34 : also iii. 94 (implying superiority), andiii. 94 (to jxko-ov Trpds, the mean between),

irivre irpbs Tpia, Aristot. Five to three.

Exchange :

rjSovas irpbs ijSovds kch Ai;7ras irpbs Xviras Kal (f>6{3ov irpbs

<$>6j3ov KO.Ta\\aTTe<rdai. Plat. Phaed. xiii. 69 A.

To exchange pleasures with pleasures, pains with pains, andfear with fear.

Of. Hom. II. vi. 235.

2. Of Time (a rare use), towards, near, about :

irpbs ko-rripav, drawing towards evening : irpbs ijw, towardsdaybreak. Plat, and Xen.

Phrases :

to, irpbs tov iroXtjxov, res militares, military affairs.to, irpbs tow few (Soph. Phil. 1441); duty to the gods.

irpbs riSovfjv Aeyav, to speak with a view to gratify orplease ; so, irpbs x"-P LV Sij/iijyo/OEtv, to make a popularspeech, talk clap-trap or "bunkum"; irpbs %x6pav iroieio--

dai \6yov, Dem. (calculated to inspire dislike) ; airavTairpbs rjSovrjv ^jTetv, to make pleasure one's sole aim(omnia ad voluptatem referre).

Adverbial phrases :

irpbs fiiav (irpbs to fSiawv, Aesch. Ag. 130), violently, byforce; irpbs dvdyKijv, of necessity (cf. vir avayK-qs, St'

avayKijv, e£ dvdyKTjs, crvv avdyicrj).

irpbs /J-epos, proportionately, Dem. ; irpbs evo-e/3eiav, piously,Soph. ; irpbs opyqv, angrily, Soph, and Dem. ; irpbsKaipov, seasonably, Soph.

7ifpos x«/"' / twos, alicuius gratia, for the sake of a person.

ir/oos lo-xvos x®P LV > Eur. Med. 538 (laws not made) in

support of violence; cf. Soph. Ant. 30, 7rpds x"/"" /&>/>&,

/or <A« sa&e 0/ food. In such phrases, 7rpos x^P tv i s

almost like cWa.jt/oos auAov, Euk. ,4Z. 346, to the accompaniment of the

pipe.

As an Adverb : in addition, besides :

dAoyta /cat dfiadla ye jrpos, PLAT. Meno, 90 E, absurdity

and unreasonableness to boot. Cf. Eur. Or. 622.

In Composition :

(1) Towards, irpo^pxop-ai, I approach. (2) Near, beside, be-

, irposKeifiai, I lie near ; ttoosti&j/u, / apply, I add.

§ 278. "Ttto.1

'Tito (Epic. viraL), under, = Sansk. wpa (thither, to, with).

Lat. sub.

A. With Genitive.

1. Of Place.

Under

ra vtto 7979 SiKaarijpia. PLAT.The courts of justice under the earth.

From under :

veocrcrbv toVS' vtto TnepZv cnrdo-as. EUR. And. 441.

Drawing from under the wings this chick.

An Epic but rare Attic use.

1 iirb, like the Latin sub, seems originally to have meant upwards,from below towards a place above. Compare vimos with supinus, facingupwards, ifi, aloft, surgo {i.e. sub-s-rigo), succedo. Hence iirb meansgoing to meet (!ma,vTi&iu), supporting, and so agency or cause. Moregenerally iirb comes to denote under the power or influence of, and even

accompanying circumstance, sometimes almost like iirl with a Dative,

e.g. Aesch. Sept. c. Theb. 821, iirb (pbvqi. With the Genitive virb denot-

ing separation from, the Genitive must represent the Ablative ; on the

other hand when iirb means under, the true Genitive, denoting sphere

within whichanything occurs, whether of place or time, etc., is em-

,

poye' Digitized by Microsoft®

342 PREPOSITIONS.

2. Figuratively ; under the influence, of.

Of Persons —the Agent, like Lat. a, ab :

With Passive Verbs

01 Hipaai evucrjOria-av vtto tSjv EXkrjvmv.

The Persians were defeated by the Greeks.

Of Tilings —the cause :

wdvTa virb Sew? ^vviaraTai. ThuO.

They all hold together through fear.

A very common use, virb voo-ov, vj> rjSovr/s, vir' opyrjs,

by, in consequence of, from, for, disease, pleasure,

anger.

virb KijpuKOS evicts eiroiovvTO. THUC. VI. 32.

At the direction of a herald they were offering prayers,

praeeunte praecone.

Hence of accompanying circumstances

Frequently of music :

ioTpareveTO virb (rvplyyiav. HdT. l. 17.

He used to march to war to the sound of the pipe.

Cf. Soph. El. 711. Eur. Baceh. 156.

So irlveiv virb craAirryyos, Ar. Ach. 1001, to drink to thetrumpet's sound. vir' ev<$>rjp.ov /Joijs dvcrai, SOPH.

El. 630, to sacrifice with auspicious cry. virb tfxivov

iropevecrdai, to march by torchlight. iVo jto/otjjs, in

procession. Hdt. ii. 45.

Note, vtto has this sense with the Dative in early and late

Greek, e.g. Hesiod and Luctan (see Liddell and Scott) ; also

rarely in Attic with the Accusative, Plat. Leg. 670 A, vir

opxrjo-w k<xI (jSSijv : Xen. Sym. 6. 3, virb av\6v.

Phrases :

vfi JauToC (iroieiv n), to do anything spontaneously, of one-

self, sua sponte. i<j> vp.(ov avrlov Kal p,f) virb rwviro\ep.[u)v, Thuo. iv. 64, of your own free-will, and not

compelledby the enemy. viro

here denotes the Agent.Digitized by Microsoft®

B. With Dative.

u7ro means under, in a local sense, less frequently

in Prose than in Poetry.

Under

evK\er]<; davel

<yvvr\ t apiarr) twv ixj> r]Xiq> /x,aicpw. Euk. Al. 150.

Glorious thou wilt die,

The noblest woman far beneath the sun.

Cf. Xen. An. i. 2. 8, vwo Tr) aicpoiroXei etvai.

Covered by

rt e'x"? virb t<£ IpariQ; Plat. Phaedr. 228 D.

JFiW k« ^ow concealed under your cloak 2

Cf. AESCH. -<4</. 1030, virb ctko't(J).

Under power of persons or things

r\v

envtro vo/jlois Kai irarpi. PLAT. Rep. 574 E.

He was still in subjection to laws and to a father.

v<f) iavrm iroi&aQai, to bring under one's power ; cf.

Hdt. vii. 157; Thuc. vii. 64 (and see Accusative).

Glassed under :

to. virb Tats yeofieTpiais Aeyeis. PLAT. Bep. 511 A.

You are speaking of what comes under the head of geometri-

cal pursuits (various branches of geometry).More rarely with Accusative, see Lexicon.

C. With Accusative.

Motion under :

dveywpr/crap viro to ret^os. XEN.

They retired under the walls.

vtro hucao-Triphov, into (under contrgl of) a law court.

Hdt. vi. 104.

Extension or position under :

to UeXao-yiicbv to virb rrjv aKpoiroXiv ifyKrjOrj.

Thuc. ii. 17.

The Pelasgicwm which lies (extends) under the acropolis was

crowded.

to. virb rr\v apKTov. Hdt. v. 10, the northern districts.

344 PREPOSITIONS.

Subjection to

ei/co? avTow; iravra Treipdcao-dai, viro <r(pa<; TroielcrBai.

Thuc.

It is likely they will try to bring all under their power,

ol vtto Tiva. Xen., those who are in subjection to

any one.

Cf. Dative.

Of Time : near, about :

V7T0 tov a-eta-fiov. TlIUC.

At the time of the earthquake.

viib vv/cra, towards night, at nightfall, sub noctem.

wo t?]v KaraXvcriv tov TroXefiov, just at the end of the war.

Xen. Mem. ii. 8. 1.

Phrases :

vir avyas opav n, to hold up to the light (cf. Euk. Hec.

viro ti, Plat, and Aristoph., to a certain degree, ali-

quatenus.

In Composition :

(1) Up to, vn-avTidfa, I go up to meet, I face ; and so ofaccompaniment, vir§,So>, I accompany in song.

(2)Under,

wrei/M, I am under. (3) Secretly, slightly, gradually,v7ro(j>aivh>, I show or shine a little; virofZaWta, I suggest,suborn, substitute; vtripvdpos, reddish.

34& THE NEGATIVES.

In all the above instances ov contradicts downright a state-

ment of fact, whereas /*ij deals with conceptions or thoughts.

A line is thus drawn between the two negatives —a line, on

the whole, clearly marked throughout Attic Greek, althoughsubsequently blurred. 1 M17 is thus used with Wishes, Prohibi-

tions, Conditions, and Purposes. A negative consequence con-

ceived (wore with the infinitive) requires /wj, a negative con-

sequence achieved as a fact (&o-re with the Indicative)

requires ov.

Mij is used generally with abstract conceptions as opposed to

known and definite facts. Thus ol ov Trio-TtvovTi<s means those

particular (known) persons who do not believe / oi ftrj irLo-Tevovres,

all or any persons who do not believe (if any do not believe); «rei8^

ovk tfXdov, when, or since (as a matter of fact), they did not

come; eTreiSfj fifj eXdoiev, whenever (the number of times notbeing specified) they did not come; 17 ovk ifaretpia, the in-

experience (of some known person), the fact that some one is in-

experienced ; 1) p) ifj,ireLpCa, inexperience in the abstract (withoutpredicating of any particular person) ; 6 ovk &v, he wlw is not

existing, the dead man ; rot /ui) ovra, all things whatsoever are not,

a vast limbo outside of our actual knowledge.The construction of the sentence may change otj to fvq, yet

even so, if it is necessary to contradict point blank a word orstatement, ov may be used. See examples at the end ofthis chapter.

Whatever applies to ov and /vrj applies equally to their com-

pounds, ovSds, [i-qSeis : ovSe, [iijSe : ovts, ju^tc, etc., etc.

§ 280. Ov PRIVATIVE.

Ov prefixed to a word deprives that word of its affirma-

tive meaning and gives it exactly the opposite sense.

Hence it is called privative (privativum).

Especially noticeable under this head is the idiomaticuse of ov with verbs of saying and thinking : ov fa/At,, ov<baaK(0, oi vo/jh^co, ovk o'lofiat, ov So/ccb, ovk ew.

1 As Luoian (second century a.d.) is sometimes read, it may beobserved that he uses ^ where Attic writers use 01} : (1) with Parti-ciples in a Causal sense, and after us, 8n, Slari Causal, (2) after Verbsof Saying and Thinking in Oratio Obliqua.

Oi PRIVATIVE. 347

By this idiom ov is used with the principal verb where

in English the negative is joined with the following

Infinitive.

Ov in fact almost coalesces with its word. Compare

the use of the Latin negative (ne in nego (ne-ig-o), ne queo,

nescio) which has gone a stage further than ov in coalescing.

ov <j)ao~i 6e/MTOv elvcu. PLAT.

They say it is not right.

negant fas esse.

ovk aiero Seiv Xeyeiv. AESCHIN.

He thought that he need not speak.

ov hoi SoKcb. Plat.

I think not.

Note 1. This use of ov with the governing Verb seems moreancient than with the Infinitive. See Monro's Homeric Gram-mar, p. 262.

Note 2. This ov privative is sometimes retained where the

construction requires /x?j.

eav ov ^T£ eav T£ cbrjre. PLAT. Apol. xii. 25 B.

Whether you say no or yes.

d p.ev ov iroWol tfo~av. LYS. 13. 72.

If they were few.

Cf. THUC. i. 121 (d ovk aTrepovo-L) ; XeN. An. i. 7. 18 (d ov

fiaxehai); SOPH. Ai. 1131, 1242, 1268; El. 244: Eur.

Med. 88.

But generally the /mj required by construction is used.

eav [irj<f>fj

o hepos rbv erepov 6p8&s Aeyeii/. PLAT. Gorg. 457 D.

Note 3. Ov exerts this privative or contradictory force on

any word to which it is prefixed.

(a) Verbs :

u o-ripyw, 1 hate. ovk d£i<3, I consider that not

ukIiS, 'u,. , , ,., (like ov SokZ), I require or ex-

i Kd e ^J Ihinder ^ orM 'pect that not (Thuc. ii. 89),

ovk vTno-xvovp.a.1, I refuse. I disdain or refuse (Aesch.

ov TrposTToiovp.0.1, dissimulo. P. V. 285).

ov o-vp,povXe6(o, I advise one

not to, etc. Thuc. and Hdt.

ov

ovk ecu

ov

Digitized by Microsoft

348 THE NEGATIVES.

(b.) Other words :

ret ov KaXd, immorality.

ov KaXcos, immorally ; ovk opOZs, wrongly.

ov% els, ovk 6XiyoL=T7oX\oi, many.> ovk e\d)(i,o-TOS= fj.eyto~TOs,

ovk TjKio-ra dAAa p,dX.LCTTa, HDT. iv. 170.tij9 Aeu/caSos 17 ov Trepirdxi-o-is, Thuc. iii. 95, the non-investment

of Leucas.

r) ovk k^ovo-U, Thuc. v. 50; r) ov 8tdX.vo-is, i. 137; r) ovkCMrdSocrss, V. 35.

Iv ov Kaipii), unseasonably, Eur. Bacch. 1288.

Note 4. In some of these cases the negative doubtless is

due to the Greek reserve and abatement of positive assertion(litotes), e.g. ovx rj/ao-ra, not least, i.e. (by implication) most.

§ 28l. Ov AND fJL7] WITH ADJECTIVES, PARTI-CIPLES USED AS ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS,

AND SUBSTANTIVES.(For Infinitives used as Substantives see § 283.)

Ov. M17.

When definite and known When the members of a

individuals or members class are indefinite, so

of a class are spoken of, that the expression is

so that a fact is stated, virtually conditional : (or

ov is used. when certain attributes

are thought of, so that it

is consecutive :) or whenthe expression is a merevague conception, some-thing thought of rather

than known, ^77 is used.

Instances with /j,rj much outnumber those with oi.

ot ovk aryado'i TroXirai. oi fir) icaOapol Tas %elpa<i.Those {particular) citizens Antiph

who are not good. All who areof impure hands.



Oi AND Mi} WITH ADJECTIVES, ETC. 349

01 fir) Trio-revovTes.

Those, i.e. any (all) who do

not believe = if any do not

believe.

= oiTtves fit] TrocTTevovai.

ocrot, av fir] irbarevcoat.

si qui non credunt.

twv (TTpaTMOT&v oi fir] Bvva-

fievoi. Xen.

Such of the soldiers as are

unable.

ra- opara icat, ra fir\ (opara).

Plat. Phaed.

The things which are seenand those which are not

0L 0V 7TK7T6VOJ/Te?.

Those who do not believe.

(Special known persons

spoken of.)

ii qui non credunt.

at ovk opBai TToXiTelai

avrai. Plat. Rep.

These wrong forms of govern-

ment.

Here, as in many such cases,

the ov is privative ; underwhich rule are given ex-

amples of adverbs andsubstantives.

o fir] tarpon aveTricrT7]fia>v.

Plat. Oorg.

He who is not a physician

is inexperienced.

beivov eaTiv r) fir] e/nretpia.

Alt. Ecc.

A sad thing is inexperience.

Here no statement is madethat any particular person

is inexperienced, but themere conception is spokenof.

Note on Substantives. When oi is used with a Substantive,

the expression is equivalent to a negative objective sentence.

Thus 17 ovk e£ovo-la=quod non licet, the fact that it is not per-

mitted. Whereas 17 /«} egovo-la simply means the not being able

as an abstract conception, non licere.M-q however may be

said to be the usual ^j^S^^mUm with Substantives.

35° THE NEGATIVES.

§ 282. Ou AND /XT] WITH PARTICIPLES.

Ov.

Ov is used when the Par-

ticiple states a fact

the Participle is often

Causal.

ov irioTevwv.

Since (as, when, etc.) he does

not believe.

aicrxyvo/icu ov troiwv ravra.

I am ashamed because (that)

I do not do this.

Mr) is used when the An-

tecedent to the Partici-

ple is indefinite, so that

the Participle is Condi-

tional.

fJbtj TTio-Tevcov.

If he does not believe.

aiaj^vvofiai, fiT) irouov rav-

ra.

I am ashamed if I do not

do this.

8rj\wo-(o 011 •7rapayevofj,evo<;.

Antiph.

/ will prove that I was not

present.

ko.v <3<f>\e xiAias Spa.'XjjLa's ov

fj,€Ta\a/3(bv to Tre/nrrov pepos•7(01/ xp-fjrfxov.

Plat. Apol. xxv.

He would even have been con-

demned to pay a thousand

drachmae, because he had not

obtained a fifth of the votes.

ovk evrv)(ovcro.i Sd^er' o^x'8voTu\tiv.

Eur. Bacch. 1263.

Although not fortunate, ye shall

seem not to be unfortunate.

Cf. 270, vovv ovk e'x(ov (void

as he is of sense).


ovk av Svvaio, fir) Ka/^mv,

evhai/iovelv. EUK.

Thou amidst not be happy,

unless thou shouldst toil.

01 AND Uf, WITH THE INFINITIVE. 351

Note, ws (&o-!rep) oi is more usual with the Participle than<is ju.17. <is pj appears to be used when the construction of theSentence demands /*ij (e.g. when an Imperative or a Con-ditional particle precedes), though even then (is oi may beused when a plain statement of fact is intended.

i6opv/3eire ws ov iroi-qo-oVTis rawa. LYS. 12. 73 (cf. 27. 16,

&crircp otj).

Cf. Thuc. iv. 5 ; vi. 82. 2, Xen. An. iv. 4. 15.

For (is prj —(is e/tov jUijSejrore d/*eA?jcrovTOS, oiitws £)(£ tijv yvd/J.tjv,

Xen. C«/r. i. 6. 11.

But, —ct<£ieTe /ie rj /iij dc^tere (is e/iov ovk civ Tronjcroi'Tos aAAa.

Plat. Apol. xvii. 30 B ; Thuc. i. 78. 1. fipaSew (3ovX.eveo-6e

, us ov Ttepl f$pa)(e<tiv.

us pvq, with the Participle, may denote several charac-

teristics, e.g. SCSao-Ke p.' (is p.rj dSora, as one who knows not,

Soph. 0. G. 1154.

§ 283. Ov AND fiT) WITH THE INFINITIVE.

Oi. M77.

Mrj is the regular Negative with the Infinitive.

"When ov is found with an Infinitive, it is chiefly in

Indirect Statements after verbs of Saying and Thinking,ov being the proper construction in Oratio Obliqua.

An infinitive used as a Substantive with or without

the Article regularly takes fir}.

tyrj ovk eicfirjvM fie etc tov alo-xpov fir) aXrjdeveiv.

ifKoiov. Antiph. It is wrong not to speak the

He stated that I did not truth.

leave the ship = ovk e<pv

eK@rjvat.

e\eyov ovk eivat avTovofioi. %pr) fir] Kara<ppovelv tov

Thuc. wXtjAows. Isaeus.

They were saying that they We should not despise the

were not independent. multitude.Digitized by Microsoft®

352 THE NEGATIVES.

evo'fucrev ovk dv hvvaadcu to fir) 8iicaia><; airdKecrai.

fieveiv. Xen. Antiph.

Hethought that they would

Anunjust sentence of death.

not remain.

o/McofioKev ov yapieiaQai.

Plat. Apol. xxiv. 35 o.

A striking instance; verbs

of swearing usually are

followed by pJ), see note 4

below.

For other instances, of.

Soph. Ant. 378, 755 ; Plat.

Apol. xvii. 29 B.

Note 1. Whenov is exceptionally used with the Infinitive,

it is generally due either to the order of or emphasis on a word

or sentence. Sometimes ou is privative. A positive negation

is always made.

ovSevos a/iapreiv SsWds lo-rtv. ANTIPH. iv. Tetr. T. a. 6.

There is nothing which he deserves to miss.

= ovSiv k<TTiv 06 ajj.apTe.iv.

dAoi Iva) Sv o/ittj/JOKare -Kapaj3y)vai ovEkv.

Xen. Hell. ii. 4. 48.

I leg you to violate no single point of yow oath.

= ovk d£<,a>.

Observe that ov is used although a Petition strictly requires

/4 Cf. Thuc. i. 39. 2.

Cf. Soph. Phil. 88, ?<£w ov8ev=ovi< 4'^>w.

KtXevei ovk Iv ry eKKXrjaia dW ev tu) Oedrpw -rijv dvdp/jrjcm

yiyvto-dai. AESCH. 3. 204.

(The law) requires the proclamation to be made, not in the

Assembly, but in the Theatre.

Emphasis onthe parenthesis.

Oi AND Mri WITH THE INFINITIVE. 353

Sokeis x al PWet v V °vk airo6aveur0ai ; ANDOK. i. 101.

Do you expect to rejoice, or escape death ?

ovk d.Tro6avei<r6ai is perhaps privative.

Note 2. xprj (xpr\v, e\PV v ) are followed by both pj and ov

with the Infinitive. xPU °^ ma y be considered to stand for

ov XPV-

Soph. Phil. 1363, xprjv /i^re fioXetv, k.t.A,

And. 607, XPV V PV K" ,£ " / -

EUE. Androm. 100, \P1 8' oviror' enrov, so 214.

Sipp. 507, XPV V °v °~' «/*<"pTavetv.

Jferf. 294, x/iij 8' ovttot' eKSiSdu-Keardai.

Note 3. Mij is not seldom found with the Infinitive in anIndirect Statement. In some, but not all such instances,

the Statement is general, and bears the character of a

Conception.

a/iTiKpivaro pjSevos rjTTiav elvai. XEN. Hell. ii. 3. 11.

Be replied that he was inferior to none ; cf. iii. 2. 31 ; iv.

4. 5 ; Mem. i. 2. 39.

ot fiavreis Aiyovrai eavrois /if) irpoopav to hriov.

Xen. Symp. iv. 5.

Prophetsaire

saidnot to foresee the

futwe forthemselves.

This is not, however, the strict Attic use, and Xenophon is

often exceptional. See Xen. Mem. i. 2. 39. Ov and pjoccur in co-ordinate clauses in Soph. Phil. 1058; Plat. Prot.

319 b.

Note 4. Many Verbs which imply an effort of thought or

will prefer pj with the Infinitive. Such are Verbs of makingan admission, 6p.o\oya>, Plat. Phaed. xlii. 98 D, o-wyx^P"' : °f-

conviction, wumwo, Xen. An. i. 9. 8 ; ir'eKzwpai, Plat. ^poZ.

xxvii. 37 A : of witnessing, swearing, 6'pvp, Ae. F«sj». 1047,

1281 (also an Epic usage), epai=6p.oviJ,ai, Xen. Cyr. vii 1. 18;

kyyvwp.a.1, Plat. Pntf. 336 D. (For other constructions of

6/M/xyu, see Lexicon.)

Verbs of Perception, kir'una.p,ai, are foundwith p.rj and the

Infinitive in Soph. Eb$9&dW$'crosoft®z

356 THE NEGATIVES.

ovkovv KaOeSei Srjr evOaSi,

jdarpcov ; Ar. Ran. 200.

Sit ye downthere,

Paunch.Cf. Soph. Ant. 244, Ai. 593,

Phil. 975, 0. C. 834.

Note. Similarly ovk av withoptative, ovk av rf>p<ureias

which is a gentle 4>pdaov,

Soph. Phil 122. But ov in

combination with ttov and 817

(ov srou ; ov ti ttov ; ov Sij

ov 8^ 7tou ;) means surely it is

not so ? Cf. Soph. Phil. 900 ;

Ar. Ran. 522, 526; —the ques-

tion here is really outside the

words " surely not —eh ?"

§ 287. DELIBERATIVE' QUESTIONS.

Mr) is used in Delibera-

tive Questions.

fir) (nrotepivcofiai, ; PLAT.Am I not to answer ?

Xeyere, eurio) 77 firj ; PLATSpeaJe, must I enter or no ?

Cf. SOPH. Ai. 668, n /at, ;

§ 288. INDIRECT QUESTIONS.

(a.) Indirect Single Ques-

tion. The Negative is ov.

rjpa>Tr)o~a, S«z rt ovk k\6oi.

I asked him why he did notcome. Digitized by Microsoft®

INDIRECT PETITION 357

npcoTayopa? epmra ec ovk

aio-yyvopai. PLAT.

Protagoras asks me if I amnot ashamed.

Obs. el here is interroga-

tive, not conditional.

(6.) In Indirect Double Questions the usage varies, but ov

is commoner than p,rj. There is generally a reason for yj\.

crKoirwixev, ei irpeirei r\ ov. 6 veos ov% oto? re Kpwe.iv o

PLAT. T4 re virovoia teat b pir\.

Let us consider whether it is Plat.

becoming or not. A child is incapable of de-

oVtu? *&?sddin 9 what is alle 9° r y

v > v tj 1 > ' ws;' and what not.

eir evoov eir ovk evoov. «««** i»v«-

Soph.

That thou may'st see

Whether he be within or not

within.

Note. Ov rather than /mj seems to represent simply the

original direct double question. Mr} seems to import a doubt

into the question, or to represent it as a conception. ProfessorJebb, in a note to Soph. Ai. 6, and Antiphon (Attic Orators,

p. 161), draws a subtle distinction in every case. Thus, he

says crKoirwfiev <l TTparei r) p.r] means, let us consider the question

of abstract fitness : but o-KowZfiev el irpetrei r) ov ; let us see whether

the matter in hand is fit or no.

In this passage of Antiphon, el rj p,r)— el r) oi occur in

sequent clauses. Similarly in Isaetjs, viii. 9, we have, in

three sequent clauses, efoe efoe p,f] —koX el rj ov —kcu el r] p.f).

§ 289. INDIRECT PETITION.

firj is always used whe-

ther the Petition is Direct

or Indirect.

Digitized by Micrd^ 76 °* ^ KlJ *V*'



358 THE NEGATIVES.

a. Direct.

p,r) dgoovre fie ravra hpav-

Do not require me to do this.

o. Indirect.

eXeyov avrois fir) aSiieeiv.

Thuo.

They were telling them not to

do wrong.

iKSTevov fir) aTpef3\a)0rjvao.

ANDOK.

They were hegging not to he

tortured.

Note. For exceptions see

under ov and fir) with Infini-

tive. See also oVus fir) withFuture Indicative (Index).

§ 29O. CONDITIONAL.

Ov. Myj.

The Apodosis or Principal The Protasis or Subordin-

Sentence takes ov. ate Sentence takes fvrj.

For Examples see Conditional Sentences.

Note 1. Where ov is foundin a Protasis it is joined

privatively to some special

word. (Cf. supra, p. 347.)

Note 2. d interrogative, notconditional, takes ov not fir).

Note 3. When ei is used like

on after verbs of emotion

(davfiafo, KwroiKTelpu), Setvov

eo-rt, and the like), ov, not fir),

follows, for we may either say

that a statement of fact is


CONCESSIVE, CAUSAL. 359

made, or that el is virtuallycausal. Cf. Isoc. 11 d. pfj

Qavftdarys el ov Trpeirei, DEM.197 D. ovk al(r\pbv el ov

Note 4. Also sometimes et

ov is found when a directstatement is quoted, el, (is

vvv <jyqo-ei, ov irapeo-Kevao-aTO,

Dem. 1266. 2, so virtuallyEur. Ion, 347.

CONCESSIVE.M17.

Ei, eav (?)v, av), conces-

sive, take fir\, being truly

Conditional.

§291.Ov.

Kaiirep (jcai, tcai ravra,

kuI toi), with a Parti-

ciple take ov.

Kanrep ovres ov Seivoi fie/x-

vrjcrOat, fwqfJLOvevere.

Dem.Though you are not quick, at

remembering, you remem-

ber.,

Cf. Soph. Phil. 377 ; Era.Ale. 352= even being.

§ 292. CAUSAL.Ov. M17.

The regular Negative is 011.

eireitiri ovk eSuvavro Xap- Note. See Introduction on

fiaveuv to ywpiov airievai,

77877 eireyeipovv. XEN.

Since they were unable to

take the fort they now

were trying to depart.

SoStoT*, Thuc. iv. 11. 2.


use of P7 in Causal Sentencesin late Greek.

3<$o THE NEGATIVES.

§ 293. CONSECUTIVE AND RESTRICTIVE.Oi.

mare with the Indicativetakes ov.

obra) SiaKeifieda ware ovBev

Trpafjai BvvafieOa. DEM.We are in such a mood that

we are unable to do any-

thing.

Note, ov is found with anInfinitive.

SeiV kwqirziXti TeAetv Sxtt' oiVe

vvktos vttvov oiV e£ rjfiepas

e/ie (TTeya^eiv rjSvv.

Soph. El. 782.

She threatened to fulfil a dreadrevenge, so that, nor day, nornight, did sweet sleep shroud

me.

Of. Eur. Eel. 107, Phoen.

1357, Thtjc. v. 40. 2, viii.

70. 6, Plat. Apol. xiv. 26 d.

Note. It is very importantto distinguish between theregular and the exceptional

use of wore ov with the Infini-

tive. The regular use (e.g.

Plat. Apol. xiv.) is due to

Oratio Obliqua. The exam-ple in Soph. El. 782 is excep-


M77.

&o-re with the Infinitivetakes fir).

ovrca aXoyicrTos ei/M ware

fir/ SvvaaOai 'Koyl^eadat.

Plat.

So unreflecting am, I that Icannot reflect.

acjiie/Mev <re ei\oaocpeov. Plat.

We set you free on the under-

standing that you no

longer pursue, philosophy.

Cf. Thuc. i. 103. 1. (Fut.

Indie.)

For the rule of i<p' S> re,

see p. 274.

TEMPORAL, LOCAL, AND FINAL SENTENCES. 361

tional. But in all cases wemay perhaps say that there is

a negation of fact.

§ 294. TEMPORAL AND LOCAL SENTENCES.M17.

When the Time or Place

is indefinite firj is used

(e.g. with brav, oirorav,

eiretBav, hirov av, etc.,

with Subjunctive : or

ore, etc., with Optative).

ovkovv, brav §e fir) adevw,

•ireiravcrofiai. SOPH.

So, when I have no strength,

I vnll give o'er,

(orav denotes Indefinite

Futurity.)

07TOT6 fjurj (palev cnrcvyovTes

aTTe/CTelvav. THUC.

Whenever they said "no,"

they led them off and exe-

cuted them.

Ov.

When the Time or Place is

definite ov is used.

eireiori o avr/p ovk etyaivero

wvofjbt}v ifKemv. Antiph.

When the man was not forth-

coming I went on myvoyage.

Obs. That ottot(. changes ov

<j)y]/ju to ix/q <f>T)/JU.

6W? fiev ob av/jt.fia^oi ovk

etvov ottol aTroaralev

e/CpVTTTOV Tr)v 7T/30? ty-ia?

lyQpav. Xen. Hell.

So long as the allies did not

know what side to revolt

to, they concealed their

dislike to you.

§ 295.FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.

(a.) Final Sentences.

(6.) 07T&)5 with Future

Indicative,

(c.) Verbs of Fearing.

With these Constructions

the regular Construction is

Digitized by MidMbft®

362 THE NEGATIVES.

§296. Ov and M17 with Relatives.

Ov.

The Eelative takes ov

when the Antecedent is

definite, so that a fact

is spoken of.

tyyrovaa <f>apfia% evpov ov%

a '/3ov\ofi7)v. EtJK.

a'

(3ov\6/j,t)v, i.e. a efiov-

Xofvqv.

In seeking drugs I found not

what I sought.

Cf. Xen. An. ii. 2. 3.

Note. ovSets Sorts ov, ovkeWtv octtis ov take oij. Thuc

iii. 39; vii. 87; Hdt. v. 97.

Plat. Prot. 323 c.

In Thuc. iii. 81, ol Si

7ToWol TOV ll<eT(l>V CHTOl OVK

kiruo-6i)o-a.v, the actual fact is

perhaps emphasised. With a

negative preceding toioCtos,ov always follows (Madvig,

§ 203, note)

vojiov Tidefiev, oiktjo-cv /cat ra-

lAieiov jirjSevl etVcu fj.7]8ev

tolovtov, ets o ov :ras fiov-

Ao/ievos eto"eto"tv.

Plat. Bep. iii. 416 D.A treasury which not every one

who wishes shall enter.

Cf. S. Matt. vii. 21, ov ttoIs

tlcreX.€vcreTai.

M77.

The Eelative takes fj\

when the Antecedent is

indefinite. The use of

/wj with Eelatives is the

same as its use with el.

a /j,rj 010a ouoe ocofiai ei-

Se'vai. Plat.Whatever I know not I do

not think that I know.

Digitized by

61 efie fir) taaat. Plat.Any (all, such as) do not

know me.

octtk fir] avrapK7]<; eo~TU>

ovtos ^a\67T09 <{>t\o<; ea-

rl. Xen. Mem. ii. 6. 2.

Whoever is not self-sufficient

is a dangerous friend.

Cf. Aesch. Eum. 618, 661,

Soph. 0. T. 281 (with

Subjunctive and Opta-

tive with av).

This indefinite or generic useof pj shades off into a Con-secutive or Final use.

if'tj^lo-ao'de Totavra !£ 8>v art

Seirdre vpZv /«TayiteA.7Jo-a.

ANDOK 3. 41.

Pass such a sentence that you

will never repent of.

Microsoft®

Ol AND Mi) WITH RELA TIVES. 363

pkWovo-i yap o 1 '

evravOa Tre/i^eiv evda p/q irod'

fiXlov^>kyyo<s irpocroxj/ei.

Soph. El. 380.

They are pm-posmg to send thee

where thou never more shalt

see the glory of the sun.

Cf. Soph. Ai. 359, 470;Phil. 408, 588.

Cf. the Restrictive 00-ov p.%ocra p/fj, ku.0' ocrov prj, on pvq.

ov and /*?j are both used with the Relative in a Causal

Sense. The analogy of Causal Sentences seems to show

that oil must be the normal construction; prr\ is used

where perhaps the fact is delicately put, as for instance

el is put for on after 6avp,d£a). This use of pj\ arises

from its generic use.

Oavjxao-Tov iroiels bs ovBev

BtSms-

Xen. Mem. ii. 7. 13.

You are acting strangely in

giving nothing.

So Ae. Nub. 692 (fins ov

o-rpaTeverat), EuE. Med.

589.

raXai-rrmpos tk av 76 av-

Speovos el m pyryre 6eot

irarpwoi eto-t pvryre bepa

k.t.X.' Plat. Euth. 302.

You are a miserable sort

of being since you have

neither national gods nor

sacrifices.

7T<»? av opdais e/xou kclts-

yiyvwcr/ceTe, <p to irapa-

irav 777309 tovtovl p,7]$ev

avfiftokcuov eariv ;

Dem. Apat. 903. 22.

How could you have rightly

condemned me, since I

have no contract at all

with this man ?

Digitized by MicrS&ftkP- Ba ^ 1459 "

.364 THE NEGATIVES.

§ 297. M77 is used in Expressions of a Wish.

MrjKen %<pV v 6 7 <n -

Ak. Nub. 1255.

May I no longer live !

fir) ttot oxpeXov ~Knreiv

TT)V 3/CVpOV.

Soph. Phil. 969.

Would I ne'er had left

My Scyros.

= I ought never, fi-q like

fir) after Set.

kyta dpdcrvs ovt' elfu /j.rJTe ye-

voLfiTjV. DEM. 8. 68.

I am neither bold nor might Ibecome so.

iyo> S' ojtcos &v fir) Xeyeis 6pdu>s

T&8e ovt' av huvaljxrjv p.rjT

eirKTTai/xijv Xeyeiv. SOPH.Ant. 685.

But that these words thou

speakest are not right I neither

could nor may I learn to say.

ovt av SvvaifjLijv is an Apo-dosis, and therefore ov is re-

quired : /irjT iirio-Taifi,rjv is awish ; the /mj with era-cos is far

more difficult to explain, for

it is an Indirect Statement.But observe that ottus /x^

depends on a verb of percep-tion, iirio-Tafiai (see note 4 [irj

with Infin.). Also 6Vws /«?

expresses doubt, and is muchless positive than 6Vt ov.

Moreover the wish /j.t)8' «r«r-Taifi,r)v may throw its shadow

over the previous line.

MVi AND Mij oi WITH THE INFINITIVE. 36S

§ 298. M17 and firj ov with the Infinitive.

A. After a Principal Sentence containing Verbs andexpressions of denying, hindering, forbidding, and avoid-

ing, fir) is used with the Infinitive where in English weuse no negative.

<pri<; 17 tcarapvel fir) SeSpa/cevat, raSe ; SOPH.

Dost own or dost deny that thou hast done this ?

fjvaVTbw6r)v [W]8ev irpaTreiv irapa tow; vo/aovs.

Plat.

/ opposed your doing anything contrary to the laws.

airayopevm fit] woieiv eicieXrjcnav. AKISTOPH.

I forbid your calling an assembly.

rpcitnovv prj etv<u tow to, okXo. ira.pab'ovTa.s tois TtOveSo-ivopoiovs. Thuo. iv. 40.

They did not believe that those who had given up their armswere like those who had fallen.

Ovryrov's y' hraixra prj irpo&ipKeadcu popov.

AESCH. P. V. 248.

Ay, I let mortals from foreseeing their doom.

Note 1.

Such verbs are :

dvTiXeyai,

dpvovpai (and com-pounds),

a/t^Kr/J^TM, \

atruTTio,J

O7ri\op.ai,

cvXa/3ovpai,

peXXo),

(jxvyto,

(jyvXacro-o/iai.

So also diroX.vop.ai, ThUC. i. 128; drroKpvirropai, ii. 53;

dTrofrrpecfM), viii. 108 ; vTreKTpamo-dai,, SOPH. 0. C. 565 ;

(bvXdo-o-m, 0. C. 667._. ... ..... n~' Digitized by Microsoft®

deny.

€x<o (and compounds), "\

eipyw (and compounds), ' hin-

ipTroSiov elvai, t der.

KtoXvio, )Aroyo/Kfa,

\ forlidtaireiirov,

J

beware of,

hesitate,



366 THE NEGATIVES.

Note 2.

M17, however, as in the English idiom, is not seldom

omitted.

ov Oaveiv ep/Ducrapjv. EUR.Whom I from death delivered.

rovro Tis etpyei Spav okvos. PLAT.

Some scruple prevents me from doing this.

Of. Soph. 0. T. 129 ; Thuc. i. 62 ; Plat. Phaed. 108 e.

Note 3.

Other constructions are (1) wsre /*i) with the Infinitive,

(2) to /ifj with the Infinitive, (3) toC or rov prj with the

Infinitive.

(1.) dyyeXXoyv on ras vaCs airoo-Tpetf'eie fixne /x,rj k\8elv.

Thuc. viii. 108. 1.

Announcing that he had diverted the ships from coming.

(2.) eTpyov to //.i) KaKovpyeiv. THUC. iii. 1.

They prevented them from inflicting damage.

Of. Aesch. Eum, 691 ; Soph. Antig. 263.

(3.) iKcoAixre tov Koueiv eirioVTas. XEN. An. i. 6. 2.

Se kept them from advancing and turning.

e£« tov pjr) KaraSvvai. XEN. An. iii. 5. 11.

It will keep them from sinking.

Of. Thuc. i. 76, ii. 49, iii. 75 ; Xen. Cyr. ii. iv. 23

B. But when the Verbs themselves take a Negativeor quasi-Negative, firj ov and not ^r\ alone is used with

the Infinitive.

Here also in English we use no negative in the sub-

ordinate sentence.

rlva olei WTrapvrjcreaBai fjuq ovj(i eirlaTaaOai raSucaoa ; Plat.

Who do you think will deny that he is acquaintedwith justice ? ( = no one will deny).

ov \t/£co fii) ov irao-i irpocfxovelv. SOPH.

1 will not cease to publish unto all.


Mi) AND Ml, oi WITH THE INFINITIVE. 367

ti efvrroStov firj ov%i airodavelv ; Xen.What is there to hinder us from being put to death ?

( = no hindrance).

Cf. Aesch. P. V. 627 («' /Ûets;); Soph. Ai. 540, 728;Xen. Syrup, iii. 3 (to /*?) ov).

C. Also when the Principal Sentence is negative, /t^

ov and the Infinitive is used after expressions denoting

what is impossible, wrong, repugnant, and the like. Herein English we use a Negative.

aBvvara -qv [ir) ov fieyaXa flXaTrreiv. ThuC.

It was impossible not to inflict great harm.

ov&eis fi av Treiaeiev to fir\ ovtc e\9elv. AEISTOPH.

No one shall persuade me not to go.

vxko-ypv ^qrrj<reiv (us ovx oo-iov croi ov /j,ij ov Barqdtiv

8iK<uoo-vvfl. Plat. Rep. 427, e.

You 'promised to search, on the ground that it would be

impious for you not to assist justice.

Cf. Plat. Symp. 218 c (avo^rov ^rj o-i).

I). Sometimes //.->) ov and the Infinitive follows a Principal

Sentence which is not Negative in form.

aXo-^pov ecrn croqbtav pit] ov^' iravTOiv KparurTOv <j>avai.

Plat. Prot. 352 d.

It is immoral not to assert that wisdom is the highest of all

In these cases the aurxpov is practically condemning, blaming,

dissuadingfrom

a course.

<5o-T£ ttSxtiv alo-xyvt]v eTvai firj o-vcnrov8a.£eiv.

Xen. An. ii. 3. 11.

So that all were ashamed not to co-operate heartily.

Compare these two examples with Xen. Cyr. vii. 7. 16,

Tiva aio-xôv p) <pi\elv rj t6v dSeAôi/ ; where a quasi-Negative

Principal Sentence is followed by i*rj only.

See Herod, i. 187, Seu/oV /*« o-i ko.Be.lv.

368 THE NEGATIVES.

§ 299. Mr) ov with the Participle.

M?) oi is found with the Participle denoting circumstance

(conditionally, or restrictive^), after a Principal Sentence ex-

pressing what is impossible or repugnantM.rj ov is practically" equal to d prf, except, unless.

ovk dp' Zcttl <f>ikov t<j> <pt\ovvTi, ovSev, pr/ ovk dvTi<pi\ovv

Plat. Iajs. 212 D.

No creature then is a friend to a friend, unless it love in

return, (without loving).

^Keis yap ov Ktvq ye, tout' lyo) cra<pios

e£oi8a, prj oij^' Bei/j,' ipol <pepovo-d ti. SOPH. 0. G. 359.Thou comest not empty, this I Jcnow full well,

unless thou bring'st some horror to mine ears.

Svo-dXyrjTO'S yap aveirjv, TOidvSe prj ov KarOLKTetpoiv eSpav. SOPH. 0. T. 11.

hard of heart were I,

Compassionating not so sad a session. (Cf. 0. T. 220.)

Other instances will be found in Herod, ii. 110, vi 9. and106. Isocrat. Laud. Eel. 47.

So entirely was pr) ov eventually regarded as equivalent tod prj that in Dem. de Fals. Leg. 379. 7, we find it used with-out a participle expressed : a'C t« TrdAeis iroWal «cu xaXeira).

\af3elv pr) ov XP° VV Kal noXiopKia, the cities were numerous anddifficult to take except by long waiting and by siege (sc. h^<j>8eio-ai).

Variant Constructions of B. C. D. (pp. 336, 7).

After a Negative Principal Sentence are used sometimes

(1) the Infinitive alone; (2) pr) alone instead of pr) ov with

the Infinitive; (3) to pr) ov

; (4) toij pr) ov.

(1) TatJTCt ovk i^apvovvrai irpaTreiv. AESCHIN. iii. 250.

They do not deny that they so act.

#iAunrov TrapeXOeiv ovk r/SvvavTO KioXCcrai.

Dem. de Pac. 62. 10.

They were not able to prevent Philip advancing.

(2) OV 7ToX.VV

\p6vov p' i7reo~xov pr) pe vavo-roXelv raxy. SOPH. Phil. 348.Not long while

they held mefrom

quick setting sail.(Cf. Antig. 443.)

Mi, AND Mi, oi WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 369

(3) ovk ivavTidcroixai to /*•») ov yeyuiveiv nav.

AESCH. P. V. 786.

Til not refuse (lit. oppose thee) to 4eclare the whole.

Xen. Symp. iii. 3.

(4)- tis M^Siov o'ov aireXelcfrdr] tov fir) anoXovdeiv ;

Xen. Gyr. v. 1. 25.

W7io 0/ the Medes failed to follow you ?

Instances of omission of pj and p) ov are said to be rare.

There are however a good many.

1. Mr) omitted after an Affirmative Principal Sentence,

Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 4. and 7. Thuo. iii. 39. 3. Soph. Ai.

70, 0. T. 129. Eurip. Or. 263. Arist. Aeh. 127. Xen. Hell.

v. 21. Plat. Apol. xix. 31 d, xxxi. 39 e.

2. Mr) for /tij ou after a Negative Principal Sentence,

Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 3. Soph. Phil. 34-9. Thuc. iii. 39.

Isoce. Laud. Hel. 47. (Infin. alone after a Negative Sentence.)

§ 300. M77 and ju,^ ov with the Subjunctive.

Mt; with the Subjunctive expresses anxiety, apprehen-

sion, suspicion, surmise, and so may often be translated

perhaps.

1X7) tovto a\r)6e<;f/.

Perhaps this is true.

pi) ceypoiKOTepov rj to a\r]de<s enrelv. PLAT.

Perhaps it is somewhat blunt to tell the truth.

The addition of ov gives the opposite or negative

meaning

fjuj ov tovto aXr/6e<; rj.

Perhaps this is not true.

aX\d fir) oi tovt y -xaKeiTov, OdvaTov eK<j>vye2v.

Plat. Apol.

It looks as if this were not the real difficulty —to

escape death.

Cf. Grit. ix. 48 a. Phaed.xi 67 B.Digitized by Microsoft®

2 A

370 THE NEGATIVES.

Note 1. Mi} ov is found graphically with the Indicative in

questions.

aAA' apa pfj ov)^ wroAa/j/?avas ', PLAT. Prot. 312 A.

But perhaps then you do not suppose 2

Note 2. 6Vu>s /«j, oVws /iij o-u is similarly used with the Sub-junctive and Indicative (Pres. and Future), Plat. Crat. 430 D,

Meno 77 A, Phaedo 77 B; Biddell's Digest, p. 140.

Note 3. The same constructions of p.rj and /xi) ov occur evenmore commonly after a Principal Verb like <ppd£op,<u, opZ,

(TKoiru), a.6pu>, kwoov/xai, alo-^vvop-ai, okvw, klvSvvos Ictti, <po(3ov-

pai, etc.

(a.) With Subjunctive

<j>povTi!(<o p.r) KpoTLo-Tov y p.01 a-iyav. Xen. Mem. iv. 2. 39.

I am considering whether it is not best for me to be silent.

Tavra aTTKTTcav Trapeyei. irepl rijs foxV^ f'V ov8ap.ov kri y.

Plat. Phaed. xiv. 70 a.

This causes a doubt about the soul that possibly it no longer

(b.) With Indicative

a. Present Indicative :

opw/jLev pvq NiKias oieraC ti Acyeiv. PLAT. Lack. 196.

Cf. Soph. Ant. 1253; Eur. Tro. 178, Phoen. 92 (quoted p. 267).

b. Imperfect Indicative :

opa p,rj ira'iljtiv 4'Aeyev. PLAT. Theaet. 145.

e. Future Indicative :

opa pr/ Serjo-ei. Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 27.

(pofiovpai p.7] evprjo-opev. PLAT. Phileb. 13. A.

SeSotxa cotcus p.fj rev^opat. ARIST. Eq. 112.

Cf. Plat. Crat. 393 c, Rep. 451 A.

d. Perfect Indicative

<j>o/3ovp.eda pvq ap,<f>oTeptov fipn.pTqKap.tv. ThUC. iii 53.

e. Aorist Indicative :

Sei'Sa) prj TrdvTa vrjpepTea tTirev.

HOM. Od. V. 300.Digitized by Microsoft®

Oi rf WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 371

§ 301. Ov fxr, WITH SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE

INDICATIVE."A. Ov fir] with the Subjunctive (generally the Aorist,

but sometimes the Present) expresses an emphatic nega-

tive future statement.

ov firj iravatofiai. (j>i\.ocro^>a>v. PLAT. Apol. xvii.

/ will never give up philosophy.

ovrob <r A%ai,(ov, olBa, fit) Tt? vj3pi<rr).

Soph. Ai. 560.

None of the Achaeans, I know it, shall ever insult

thee.

B. Ou, fir] with the Future Indicative has the same

meaning.

aXk eiffi8 . ov (7oi /U9j fiedetyofiai rrore.

Soph. El. 1052.

Enter within. I ne'er will follow thee.

elTrev otu r) ^irapTr) ovBev fir) kcikiov oacieuTai avTOV

airo6av6vT0<;. Xen. Hell. i. 6. 32.

He said that Sparta would be governed not one whit

the worse after his death.

Observe that the example is in the Graphic Oratio

Ohliqua.

C. 1. Ov fjf Interrogative with the Future Indicative

(second person singular) expresses a strong prohibition.

7roto? Zevs ; ov fir) \riprjaeK ; ovB' earo Zevs.

Aeist.- Nub. 367.

Zeus quotha ! don't talk twaddle. There's no Zeus.

m dvyarep, oi fir) fivdov e« 7roXXou? epeis ;

Eue. Supp. 1066.Daughter, tell miitt^tailMiwmoffipthe crowd.

372 THE NEGATIVES.

2. Ov fir\ with the Future Indicative (second person)

in the first clause is followed by a second clause express-

ing (a.) an affirmative command (b.) a negative commandor prohibition.

(a.) ov fii] BiaTptyjreL<;, aXXa jewel rrj<; 6vpwi ;

Abist. Ran. 462.

Don't shilly-shally, but taste the door.

(b.) ov pr) 7T/30<70tcre(.9 yelpa, firjS ayfrei ireifKcav ;

Eur. Hipp. 606.

Bring not thy hand near, and touch not my robes.

3. Ov with the Future Indicative (second person), de-

noting an affirmative .command, is followed by a Future

Indicative (with /cat fxr], nrfe) denoting a negative

commandor prohibition.

ovyj, trvyickritreu} aro/ia,

Kai fXT) fieOrjO'ei,'} avdii ato-yicnow; \oyov<> ;

Euk. Hipp. 499.

Set a seal upon thy lips,

and let not fall again most shameful words.

ov acy ave^ei, firjhe SeiXiav apels ; SOPH. Ai. 75.

Keep silence, and awake not cowardice. (Lit. wilt thou

not silently endure T)

Some make these two separate questions, one with oil

(nonne ?), the other with pr] (num ?), wilt thou not endure silently ?

and wilt thou play the coward 1

§ 302. Further Examples of ov ^17.

A. ov ixrj with Subjunctive.

ouk£ti fir) SvvrjraL f3ao-i\.€vs rjjj.a.'s KaTaAa/?av.

Xen. An. ii. 2. 12.

There is no longer any likelihood of the King overtaking us.

Obs. The Present Subjunctive is here used. So also inDigitized by Microsoft®

FURTHER EXAMPLES OF Oi ^. 373

Plat. Rep. 341 c. (ov ^ otds re $s) : and in Soph. 0. C. 1023,(£irevyv>vra.i, one MS. reads kirev^iovrai).

to jxeyio-rov kolkov Ikiov oijSets fiTj 5tot£ \df3y.

Plat. Zegr. 731 c.

^7b one is ever likely voluntarily to choose the greatest evil.

ov fi/fi ere Kpvi//(a Trpbs ovriva ftov\op,a.L atpweo'dai.

Xen. Cyr. vii. 3. 13.

I will not conceal from you whom I wish to march against.

See further Soph. 0. G. 408, 450, 649, 1024, 1702; Thug. v.

67 ; Xen. Hell. iv. 2. 3 ; Plat. Rep. 499 b ; Ae. Av. 461.

oi3 /jt) (TKUi^s, jUijSe rrcurycnjs airep ot Tpvyo8a.ijji.oves ovroi,

dXX' cvcprjpei. ARIST. JTm6. 299.

Dom'i you flout, and don't behave like your poor comedy hacks,

but, hold your peace.

Elmsley changes o-K<ofys of the mss. to o-Ktnipei, Fut. Indie.

Mid. Similarlyin

Nub.505, ov fir) XaXija^ has been changed

to AaA/170-eis. See Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, pp. 186, 187.

If o-K^tpy; is right, this is you won't jest, a possible way of

saying dont jest : if o-K<oxpei, irotijo-ess, the construction is in-

terrogative' like that of C. 1 above, p. 371.

B. ov firj with Future Indicative.

ov u,rj cr' !yo> Trepio\pop,a.i direXOovra. AjRIST. Ran. 508.

I'll not suffer you to depart.

ov toi pvqTrore cr' Ik tSiv eSpaviav,

& yepov, anovrd tis a£«. SOPH. 0. G. 178.

No one, be sure, from these abodes,

Old Sir, shall drag thee hence.

2d person in the same meaning as the above, i.e. denoting

not a strong prohibition, but a negative statement.

ovkovv ttot' £k tovtoiv ye p.rj o-Kiprrpoiv 'eri

oSoiiroprjarus (Schneidewin, oSotTroprjcr^s.) SOPH. 0. G. 848.

Never henceforth, on these props leaning, thou

Shalt journey hence.

rows yap irovrjpovs ov p.-q irore Troirjo-ere fieXriovi.

Aeschin. in Gtes. 177.

You will never make the bad better.

374 THE NEGATIVES.

The following example may denote either a prohibition or

a statement.

ov yiyvdxTKia o-e' ov p,rj etcret ets ttjv ot/ctav. lSABUS, Vlll. 24.

J ô woi faww you, you shall not enter the house ; or ov p.rj eio-ei

C. ovk Is KopaKas ; ov pr) Trpocnrov ; ARIST. San. 609.

7o &« crows with you. Be off!

Observe here that the 2d person dual is used.

& piapunare, to 7roiels ; ov pr) KaTa/3ifo"€t ; ARIST. Vesp. 397.

You scoundrel, what are you at ? don't come down.

ov p-q '£eyep«s tov vttv<£ koto\ovKa.KKLvrjo-ei's Kavao-Ttjo-ws

(pondSa Seivrjv

v6o-ov, S TtKvov ; Soph. Tr. 978.

Observe that eKKivrjo-eis joined by /cat is prohibitive co-ordin-

ately with egeyepets.

ov p,}] KaXeis p.',

fi>v9pwir', iKtTevu), pyjSe KaTe/seis rovvopa ; ARIST. Man. 298.

Don't call me,

Sirrah, I fray thee, nor blab out my name.

ov pr) Svo-p.evrjs 4'crei

<£iAots, 7ravcreL Se dvpov, kol irdkiv o~Tpiipeis K&pa . .

Se£et Se Satpa kgu 7rapauTtjo-ei irarpos ; EUR. Med. 1151.

Be not wroth with friends,

Forbear displeasure, turn thy face again,

Accept these offerings, and entreat thy father.

ov pr] Trpoo-o[o-ti<s Xe Va>

/SaKê-utrcts 8'idv,

prjS' kôpopêi pwpiav T)jv <ri)v ip.oi ; EUR. Bacch. 343.

Lay not thy hand on me, go play the bacchanal,

Nor smudge me with thy folly.

ovkow KaAets avrbv Kal pr) acftrjo-eis ; PLAT. Symp. 175 A.

Call him, and don't send him away.

ov dao-o-ov oi'cras, pj8' aTTio-T-qo-Ei's kpoi ; SOPH. Tr. 1183.Give me thy hand quick, and distrust me not.

376 THE NEGATIVES.

firi XavQaveTO) ae /ii?Se tovto. Xbn. Cyr. v. 2. 36.

Let not even this escape you.

6eov<s (f>o/3ov/J-evoi fi/ifirar acrefies firjBev firjSe avocriovfirjre Troirjarjre jxryre. {3ov\r)o-r/Te.

Xen. Cyr. viii. 7. 22.

Fear the gods, and never do or intend anything either

impious or unholy.

§ 304. OuSei's, M^Sei's, OvSev, M-qSeV, etc.

A. OvSeis and pjSei's are used as declinable Substantives

both in the Singular and Plural, with or without the Article,

of persons.

Much more rarely o, f/, ovSev, 6, ij, firjSev.

B. O-uSev and fi-qEkv are used as indeclinable neuter predi-

cates of persons.

C. to /j.TjSev, an indeclinable substantive, is very freely

used both of persons and things.

All these constructions are chiefly poetical with the excep-

tion of (B), which is also Platonic. Herodotus also uses (A)and (B).

We may observe with regard to them :

(1.) That ovSeis, ovSiv denotes what is known or proved to

be actually non-existent or worthless. (Of. 17 ovk e£owia underov privative.) O-uSev is actually nothing.

(2.) MijSei's, fj.7]8eu denotes an indefinite conception of whatis anything non-existent or worthless. (Cf. 17 [xy igovo-la.)

MrjSh is abstract nonentity, hence to furjSev.

(3.) The two sets often seem to be used indifferently, butthough ovStls is plainer and blunter, yet /^Sei's may be really

more contemptuous, " as nothing," " no better than a mere cipher."

(4.) The construction of the sentence (with et or an im-perative) may favour fnj rather than ov.

(5.) Both sets of phrases are the reverse of tis (ti) eTvai, tc

be a somebody.

378 THE NEGATIVES.

§ 305. M^ with Oaths and Assertions.

Mtj is sometimes found with the Indicative after an oath or

a strong assertion.

/xa tt]v ' A<j>po8lTi}v . . . fj,rj 'yio it' acf>rjcr<i).

Akist. Ecc. 999, cf. Av. 195, Lysist. 917.

Cf. also B. x. 330, xv. 41.

This use of ^ should be compared with prj and the Infini-

tive after verbs of swearing and testifying (see pj with Infin.

Note 4).

The construction is Epic. In Homer ^ is found both withthe Infinitive and the Indicative after an oath or protestation.

M17 repudiates the charge.

mttu) vvv rdSe yata, k.t.A.., /irj Tt trot ko-kov fSov\evo~tjiev.

Od. v. 184.

Be witness earth to this —far from me be it to contrive harmto thee.

terra) vvv Zeiis avros, k.t.A.., p.rj dvrjp €7ro^rjo"«Tai aXAos.II. x. 329.

Be witness Zeus himself —no other man shall ride.

§ 306. Mrj where ov might have been expected.

Mij, where ov might otherwise have been expected, is used

where the structure of the sentence requires or has a naturalaffinity with fiij. Such cases are where (1) an Imperativeprecedes, (2) where the sentence is Conditional, (3) wherethe whole cast of the sentence is of th 1 nature of a concep-tion, so that the statement denied is not 1 eal fact.

1. ip7]<f>io-ao-6£ rbv iroXefwv, fir) <j>oj3rj9evres rb avriKa Seivov.

Thuc. i. 124.Vote the war without fearing the immediate danger.

ravra 0"K07reiTe, on firj Trpovoicj. p,oi\.\.ov kylyveTO rj tvyti.

Antiph. V. 21.

Consider this, that it happened not so much designedly as byaccident.

A very exceptional use of pj, hardly explained by the pre-ceding Imperative.

Cf. Xen.Cyr. iii. 1.

37, Soph. Ant. 546, Dem. 27. 59Digitized by Microsoft®

MISCELLANEOUS INSTANCES. 379

2. o irous eixep ecrnus <j>avepo'i vpXv ko-ri /j,rj /3\r]6eis, SrjkovTai

Sia ttjv avrov afiaprlav airoBav&v.

Antiph. Tetr. B., c. 5.

As to the child, if it is proved to you that he was not struck

when he was standing still, it is evident that he was hilled

by his own fault.

3. oTjiai .fx/q av StKatws tovtov tv\uv ewaivov tov p,rj eiSora ti

io-Ti vop.o<s. Xen. Mem. i. 2. 41.

I think that one who does not know the meaning of law would

not deservedly receive this praise.

The first /xij is exceptional, but the example is fromXenophon, an exceptional writer.

»} So/cet crov oTov tc elvai eVt iKeiVrjv tt/v iroXiv eivai Kat firj

avaTerpa<f)6a.i, kvfj

ai yevd/uevou Sucai /wjSev i&xvovfTiv

Plat, Crit. xi. 50 b.

Do you really think it possible for a state to continue to exist

and not be overthrown, in which verdicts which have been

passed have no avail 1

This may he regarded as regular, the pj coming after oTov

re and not after SokcZ

Eiddell, Digest 135, collects some extreme Platonic

instances.

§ 307. Miscellaneous Instances showing the powerof ov to make a downright Negative

Statement. Cf. the use of ov in Emphasis,

p. 352.

This power is very marked in contrasts

gvpfiaCvei yap ov ra pkv, ra 8' oil AESCH. Pers. 800.

It is not that some things are happening, while others are not

(i.e. all things are being fulfilled).

Kv o Troxaiids Sdcrvs SevSpeo-t miY«n p.ev ov, ttvkvoii Se.1

Xen. An. iv. 8. 2.

The river was overgrown with trees which, though not big,

were numerous.

dirwAeTO 8' ovX

i, dXX' kXve-q. Lys. vi. 27.

He was not condemned jo death, but acquitted.Digitized by Microsoft®

3 8o THE NEGATIVES.

Of course the construction may change ov to pvq :

cr/co5r£tT£ ufi tovto, el Ta.Xa.VTOV eStaKe, dXXa tt)V irpodv/xiav.

Dem. 470. 26.

Consider not this point, whether he gave a talent, but his will.

Yet even in spite of the construction ov may assert itself

el yv(o<j6r\o-6pe0a, £vveX06vTe$ p.kv, dp.vveo-0at Se ov

ToXfiwTes. Thuc. i. 124.

If we shall be known to have met together, and yet not to be

venturing to protect ourselves.

This power of ov to assert itself under difficulties is seen

very strikingly in some passages :

prj o ye ov XP1 toiei. PLAT. Euthyd. 307 B.

Don't do what is actually wrong.

The generic pj might be expected :

eym yap, ei fiiv p.rj tpfirjv rji-eiv irapa, Oeovs, rjStKovv av ovk

dyava,KT&v tu> OavaTO). PLAT. Phaed. viii. 63 B.

i.e. / should be acting wrongly in not grieving, as m reality I do

grieve.

In spite of the Conditional structure :

Cf. SOPH. 0. T. 551, el vopifeis ovx vcpe^eiv.

§ 308. Note on prf, fir/ ov, with the Infinitive and

Participle.

1. M17 with the Infinitive. This construction is perfectly

natural and intelligible. Indeed the Infinitive without it,

though allowable in Greek as in English, may be somewhatambiguous. Thus ov davelv eppvo-dpijv would in itself meanwhom I rescued for dying. The addition of p? makes it per-

fectly clear that the net result is negative.

The negative was thus used in our earlier English :

Ton may deny that you were not the cause.

Shakspere, Rich. III. 1. 3.

First you denied you had in him no right.

Comedy of Errors, iv. 2.

Precisely parallel in Greek is the use of ov with 6V1 and theIndicative after verbs of denying : dvTeXeyov on ovk eyxpol.rj,

XEN. Hell. ii. 3. 16 ; dpvrjdfjvai (Ls ovk d7re8coK£, Lys. XV. 1.

1 The double negative is uot unknown even in Ciceronian Latin

Cf. Cic. De Ofic. in. 102, 118.



NOTE ON Mr;, Mr) ov WITH INFINITIVE, ETC. 381

2. Mr) ov with. Infinitive. Here it is much more difficult to

see the force of each negative, especially as in translating the

Greek into English we make no difference between p) and

p) ov. Thus we translate 6'o-iov p) fiotjdeiv, it is pious not to

help ; ov\ oViov p) ov fiorjdeiv, it is impious not to help. Butwe may be sure that the force of each negative was, originally

at least, felt in Greek. Observe that the double negative is

only used with the Infinitive when there is a negative, actual

or virtual, in the principal clause. Thus there is an additional

negative over and above that in the preceding construction

(pj with Infinitive). Just as pj with the Infinitive repeatsand sums up the net negative result of the principal verb, so

when the principal clause is negative, this additional negative

is repeated with the Infinitive, and sums up the effect of the

principal clause. 1

That this was not always felt to be necessary is shown bythe examples under B. 0. D.

3. Mrj ov with Participle must be explained in the sameway. E.g. in Soph. 0. T. 12, (1) Affirmatively: I should

be kmdly —(net result) —in refusing pity (p) KaroiKTupuiv).

(2) Negatively : I should be unkindly —(net result) in

not refusing pity (p) ov Karoinrdpoiv). The Participial con-

struction is required either because, as in the three instances

from Sophocles, the Participle agrees with the subject of the

principal sentence, or because (as in Herod, vii. 106) it is in

the Genitive Absolute. The Participle denotes circumstance

generally, and more specially condition, restriction, etc., which

are only kinds of circumstance.

Wiinder (Excursus to SoPH. 0. T. 12, 13), while_

pointing

out the above reason for the Participle, denies that it is con-

ditional, although in 0. T. 221 he translates p) ovk e'xwi', unless

I had. In Soph. 0. T. 1 2, 1 3, he says that with an impersonal

construction we might write Suvbv av ii-q or alo-xvvq av jxoi d-q

p) o-u KaroiKrapeiv. It is true that we might thus give the

sense of this one passage, but we could not so analyse the

other passages, while the above explanation seems to suit this

as well as the others.

1 Mr A. Sidgwick communicates the following note : Just as in

KuiMu yu.7) Spav the negatived infinitive gives the total effect of hindrance,

viz.;

the preventedact, so in 01) /cuXiiu 1^ oi) Spav the doubly negatived

infinitive gives the total. effect, viz. the notprevented r-'B Digitized by Microsoft®

! act.

382 THE NEGATIVES.

To this superfluous ju.tj after verbs of hindering, etc., the

French offers an exact parallel : Emplchez qu'il ne se mile

d'aucune affaire. Compare too the redundant ne after com-

paratives :— Ces fruits sont meilleurs que je ne le croyais.With verbs of doubting, denying, etc., used positively, the

French idiom follows the English: —je doute qu'il soit ainsi; butwith such verbs used negatively the French ne corresponds to

the Greek p.r\ ov : —je n'ai jamais ni6 qu'il ne soit ainsi.

§ 309. Note on /aij and ju/r) ov with the Subjunctive.

The Attic construction is chiefly Platonic and Aristotelian(cf. Eth. N. x. 9. 6, Pol. iv. 4. 11, ii. 2. 8). But the construc-

tion is as old as Homer, e.g. Od. v. 467, p.r\ pe u-rifi-q re /cot*?)

koX 6ij\vs eepcrrj Sapido-y, Perchance cruel rime and soft dew shall

blast me. We have here the original deprecatory force of p.rj,

let it not. In a writer like Plato this pvq has become simply asuggestion put politely, and with a delicate irony. Closely allied

to this is the interrogative use of pvq in the example quotedfrom the Protagoras (312 A). We need not call the construc-tion elliptical any more than p,rj yevono need be called ellip-

tical. When a Principal Verb (such as 6pa>) is expressed, thethought is more logically and fully stated, and the clause withpj has become subordinate : but the two constructions are par-allel and synonymous.

Mr] ov after a Principal Verb is also found in Homer, E. xv.

164, <j>pa£ecr8 pr) p,' ovSe Kparepos Trep 4wv eirtovTa raXdo-o-rj

p.eLvai, Let him look to it whether, stout though he be, he endure not

to await my coming. Ov is strictly negative or privative here,as in the Attic examples. Thus in the construction of p.r) andpit) ov both particles exert their legitimate force. M77 ov withthe Subjunctive occurs also in Herod, vi. 9.

§ 310. Note on ov fjut] with the Subjunctive andthe Future Indicative.

Both constructions are post-Homeric. It is impossible totrace them with historical certainty, and therefore any explana-tion suggested must be theoretical.

1. cm pf) with the Subjunctive. This construction is foundboth in Prose (Herodotus, Xenophon, Isaeus, Plato, Demo-sthenes), and in Verse (Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides,

Aristophanes).Digitized by Microsoft®



NOTE ON Oi p{, WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 383

Both ov and /*/} appear to exert their proper force. Theconstruction seems to be the negative of prj with the Subjunc-tive. (See note on that construction, § 309.) Thus /mj ttipijtcu

would mean /ar &« *£ that lie obey ; ov negatives this apprehen-sion : it is not a case of such surmise, there is no likelihood ofhis obeymg, he will not obey. Such a construction in the

second person is tantamount to a prohibition, as in the examplefrom the Clouds of Aristophanes. If this view is correct, weneed no more understand an ellipse of Seos or 6W6V betweenthe ov and the ju.jj here than in (iq with the Subjunctive.

ov Seos, ov SeivoV fully expressed occur often enough (Hdt. i.

84 ; Plat. Apol. ch. xvi. 28 b, Phaed. 84 B, Rep. 465 B • Xen.Mem. ii. 1. 25 ; Aeist. Ecc. 650).

2. ov pr) with the Future Indicative is far more difficult.

In the first place the construction is almost wholly poetical.

It occurs in Hdt. iii. 162, Plato, Aeschines, as a rare

idiom in each. It is very common in Sophocles, Euripides,

Aristophanes.

(a) Is the phrase Interrogative ?x

In favour of ov fi,rj with 2d person of the Future being

interrogative are the following considerations : A positive

command is commonly expressed by ov interrogative with the

Future, e.g. Aeist. Lys. 459, ovx'^^t', oiirorfo-ei', k.t.X. ; fol-

lowed by imperatives iraveo-de, k.t.X. Sometimes ov pj with

the Future (expressing a negative command) appears side

by side with ov and the Future(expressing a positive com-

mand). The juxtaposition is very striking in Arist. Ran.

200-2, a passage which shows that in the time of Aristophanes

the two idioms could be used as exact opposites.

Professor Goodwin's objection to the Future being inter-

rogative, derived from the single passage in the Clouds (296),

where an Imperative and not a Future is joined by aAAa to

ov [irj with a Subjunctive (v. I. a Future), is not convincing.

The inference (supposing that the Future is the true reading)need only be that ov pj with the Future had become a stereo-

typed Imperative. And in Arist. Lys. 459 (above), Soph. Ant.

885 we have the Imperative immediately following ov with the

Future used interrogatively, though not joined by a conjunc-

tion to it.

1 Mr. A. Sidgwick writes :" It is to me quite clear that ov y.i\ with

the Future is usually interrogative ; whennot, it is a form of 06

/4with

the Subjunctive. " Digitized by Microsoft®



384 THE NEGATIVES.

Against the phrase being interrogative may be urged that

such a theory assigns a different origin not only to ov pyq with

the 2d person of the Future from ov prf with Subjunctive, butalso from ov /xrj with the 1st and 3d persons of Future. This

difficulty is increased by the fact that ov p,r\ with the 2d person

of the Future may, though rarely, express a negative state-

ment, like ov pri with Subjunctive.

If, in spite of this, the Interrogative theory is maintained,we should have to assign a different origin to this special

idiom ; doubtless a serious but not perhaps a fatal objection,

for the evolution of popular idioms is as manifold as it is

obscure.

(b) Oij and ov //.iy followed by /cat, dXXd, ko.1 pvf], pvqSk :

If ov prj is interrogative the explanation is simple. Ovthrows its force over each connected clause which follows.

The simplest case is Soph. Tr. 978, where ko.1 follows. Themost complex is Eur. Bacch. 343, where the process would beoi fx.71 Trpoo-oLcrei'j ; —ov f3aK)(evo-eis ; (joined by Si) —ov pvfj e£o-

fiopêi ; Will you not avoid bringing near ? Will you not play thebacchanal ? and will you not avoid wiping off?

If ov u.-q is not interrogative each subsequent clause will

have to be differently explained. Eur. Bacch. 343 would runthus Ov yu.77 irpoo-oLo-eis, you shall not bring near ; /Saicêvo-eis

Se, but you shall play the bacchanal (like irpbs ravra irpdgeis,

Soph. O.C. 956); ^ l^'oôpjfa could only be explained on theassumption of \x.y\ with the Future being prohibitive, a con-

struction which has yet to be established.The interrogative theory of ov jx-q finds decided support

here, not only from the extreme abruptness of each clausethus made independent, but from the grammatical difficultythus occasioned.

(c) Professor Goodwin (Moods and Tenses, §89) considersthat in oi5 /*ij with the Future, oi is added (not interroga-

tively) to p.-r\ with the Future Indicative used as a Prohibition.But (1) p4 with the Future Indicative thus used is a con-struction of extreme rarity, if it exists at all. Some of theinstances quoted (Moods and Tenses, § 25, Note 5 (b) ), e.g.

Soph. _Ai. 572, are probably not to the point, and in others,assuming the Future Indicative to be the correct reading, adifferent explanation seems possible. (2) Assuming the ex-istence of pf) with the Future Indicative as a Prohibition, it is


NOTE ON 04 p4 WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 385

difficult to see how a Prohibition can be got out of oi juvf withthe Future as a statement. An analysis of the phrase oi (you

shall not) ju.17 iroiqo-ets (don't do) would land us in a meaningprecisely opposite to that required. On the other hand, weget the right meaning if the phrase is interrogative, oi, won't

you, pj 7row}cr£is ; abstain from doing ?

In ov pj with the Subjunctive Professor Goodwin does notattempt to account for the pj. He considers the Subjunctive

as "a relic of the common Homeric Subjunctive used as a

weak Future."

(d) Mr. Riddell (Digest of Platonic Idioms, p. 177) explains

the double use of the negative on the principle of " simul-

taneity of force;" i.e. both particles, like a double-barrelled

gun, concentrate their fire on one verb. It is quite true that

in course of time the two particles formed one strong redup-

licated negative, their origin being quite lost sight of. Such

cases as Soph. Phil. 611, Eur. Phoen. 1590, clearly show this.

Still the question remains, Howis it that oi5 and

pj,differing

as they do, combine their force 1

(e) Can ov and pj be separately explained 1

It is pj which requires explanation, not ov. Ov on any

theory exerts its simple contradictory force.

If oi pj with the Future is interrogative, oi p) irowyo-eis ;

must mean, Won't you abstain from or avoid doing 1_

It is

always objected that thisexplanation gives

pjthe privative

force of oi. Not so, for pj n-onj'o-ets need not represent a

privative oi ttoiw, but rather a deprecated future act. Theuse of pj with the Future Indicative would help us to un-

derstand how the idiom might arise. Now the independent

use of p? with the Future is extremely uncommon. ^It occurs,

rarely, in questions (e.g. Plat. Bep. 405 A., apa pj ™pufcv e£eis \af3eiv Te«pjpov). M)j interrogative is simply

p; denoting an apprehension. It occurs after oaths andsimilar assertions (II. x. 330, Arist. Ecc. 991). But the

Future Indicative, graphically substituted for the Subjunctive,

is fairly common (<^oJ3ovjj.o.i p) evprjo-opev, Plat. Phileb. 13,

and the Future Indicative is joined co-ordinately to the Sub-

junctive in several places (e.g. Aesch. Pers. 124; Soph. El.

43; cf. Arist. Ecc. 495). .

If oipj

is not interrogative then it will be a more vivid

and graphic substitution oj oi u.^ for the Subjunctive. The



386 THE NEGA TIVES.

process would be ov p) jtomjo-^s, it is not the case (ov) p,y\

-ironqa-ys (of apprehending that you may do), or ov /j,rj won/jo-eis

(that you really mil do). This readily passes into a command(cf. Eur. Med. 1320,

x"P'8* ov favo-wi 7roT ^ ^ m s ^ia ^ mo ^

touch, i.e. touch not).

A list of passages in which ov pj occurs with the Future is

given for reference.

Hdt. iii. 162 (ov p? ava/JAacmjo-ei). Aeschin. de Cor. 79. 12.

Xen. Hell. i. 6. 32. Isaeus, viii. 24Plat. Symp. 175 A. (ovkow ko.1 py).

Soph, (a.) ov pj, 1st or 3d person :

El. 1052; 0. C. 177; Phil. 611 (Optative in Obliqua).

(6.) ov pj, 2d person:0. T. 637 (ou . . . ko.1 pj) ; 0. (7. 847 (not a prohibition)

Ai. 75 (ov . . . p;Se); TracA. 978 (ov p? . . . kcu); 1183(ov . . . pjSe).

Euripid.a>p. 213;

/J. 496 (ovX

' . . . kcu pi}); lb.1601

(oi

pj . , . pSI) ; Androm. 797 ; «%£>. 1066 ; Bacch. 342 (ou

pj . . . Se . . . pSe).

Aristoph. Ban. 202 (ov pj . . . d\X.d) ; lb. 298 (ov pj . . .

p/Se); lb. 462 (ou p) . . . dAAa); ^c/i. 166; Vesp. 397;JV«6. 296, 367, 505 (the subjunctive of the MSS. in thesepassages has been changed by editors to the futureindicative).


CHAPTER III.

OEATIO OBLIQUA.

Introductory.

§ 311' By Oratio Recta is meant the words or thoughts

of a person given at first-hand, as from his own lips, e.g. —8t6o"a> a e'xo).

I will give what I have.

By Oratio Obliqua is meant the words or thoughts of a

person given at second-hand by some one else, e.g. —etj>rj S&creiv a *X 01 "

or

eXeyev on (us) 8clxroi a «X ''

He said he would give what he had.

If the words are reported in the following way :

eXeyev on ((is) 8dj(rw a e'xco.

He said, " I will give what I have,"

we have no Obliqua at all : eXeyev on introduces the

original words just as in English we put them in inverted

commas, as a quotation in fact.

e.g. irpocreXdovTes Se pot ry vo-repaio: MeXrjTos /cat EicjiiXrjTos

eXeyov on, yeyevrjTai, S> 'AvSokiStj, koI irkirpaKTai rjfuv

ravra. ANDOK. de Mijst. 63.

Next day Meletus and Euphiletus came to me and said,

"It has taken place, AndoJcides, we have done it."

But the reporter may give the words thus :

'i(f>r) S&o-eiv a e Xel -

eXeyev on (<t>s) Swrei a e)( 6 '-

Here we have a kind of Obliqua extremely common in

Greek, and often alternating in the same paragraph withDigitized by Microsoft®

3S7

388 ORATIO OBLIQUA.

the Obliqua given above. From a love of what is graphic and

vivid the Greeks keep the original mood while only changing

the person. Or we may say that they keep the mood which

would be used if the Obliqua were in Primary Sequence

e.g., Xeyu oti SaStrei a e'x £l -

Observe then that in Oratio Obliqua—

1. The person, whatever it was in the Eecta, becomes the

3d in the Obliqua. 1

2. The tense of the Recta never changes. If it did, theObliqua would not represent faithfully the time and act of

the Eecta.

3. The Mood may either

(a.) be changed to the Optative in the Obliqua (of

Historic Sequence),

(5.) be retained as it was in the Eecta, or in Primary

Sequence.

By Oratio Obliqua is here meant reported speech in

Historic Sequence. Oratio Obliqua in Primary Sequenceinvolves (in Greek) no change of Mood in the Adverbial andEelative Sentences, and therefore can at once be dismissed

with one brief example by way of illustration.

Oratio Eecta

Siafievco ecus 8-v eiraveXdacriv oiis irefi/KW.

I will remain until they return whom I am sending.

Oratio Obliqua

tbntri } Siaueveiv „ „ , ,. n „ ,

\, ,, / . \ > « ' - e<DS o,v eiraveA-Obicriv ous ireturei.Aeyet ort (o>s) ) oia/iEvei

~

He says that he will remain, until they return, whom he is

sending.

vo/ii'fa), civ toCt' aK/oi/JaJs fidd-qre, fj.S.XXov v/j,a$ toijtois /u.ev

<Mri(rnjo-6tv, 6yu,ot 8c f$07]Qri<reLV. DEM. Onet. 870. 24.

I consider that, if you learn the truth of this, you will be morelilcely to distrust them, and help me.

' Unless the speaker quotes his own words, or those of a personwhom he is addressing, e.g. "I told you that I knew nothing of thematter :" " You stated that you would lend me ten pounds."



RULES FOR SUB-DIRECT CLAUSES. 389

Sub-direct and Sub-oblique.

When Eecta is changed to Obliqua, the Principal Sentence

(i.e. the Substantival Sentence, whether Oblique Statement,Question, or Petition), becomes itself subordinate to the

reporter's verb (He said, asked, requested). Such a Sentence is

technically called Sub-direct, i.e. subordinate to Eecta.

What were the subordinate sentences of the Eecta, i.e.

Adverbial or Eelative Sentences, become subordinate to a

Principal Sentence which itself is subordinate. They are nowtechnically called Sub-oblique, i.e. subordinate to an Oblique

clause. For brevity's sake these terms, Sub-direct and Sub-

oblique (i.e. Adverbial and Eelative Sentences in Oratio

Obliqua), will be used in this chapter.

The terms have been explained in the Introductory Chapter,

p. 11.

§ 312. Rules forSub-direct Clauses in Oratio

Obliqua.

Such clauses are either (1) Oblique Statements with oti and

us, or Oblique Questions. Oblique Petitions take an Infinitive, so

that their construction is just like an Oblique Statement in

the Infinitive after ifafu. Sentences with ottcos and ottos /mj

(with Future Indicative or Subjunctive) follow the construc-

tion of the Oblique Question. The Oblique Statement in the

Participle presents no difficulty.

Co-ordinate Sentences follow the construction of those to

which they are joined.

A. In Primary Sequence, i.e. when the Principal Sentence

takes a Primary tense, the Mood and Tense of the Sub-direct

Sentence undergo no change.

B. In Historic Sequence the Sub-direct Sentence may either

(1.) be just what it was in Primary Sequence, under-

going no change —(this is called the Graphic

Construction) —or,

(2.) the Verb may be changed to the same tense of

the Optative.

But N.B. The Imperfect and Pluperfect Indica-

tive must remain in the Indicative, and notDigitized by Microsoft®

39° ORATIO OBLIQUA.

be changed to the Optative. If they were

changed we could not distinguish them from

Present and Perfect Optatives. Historic Tenses

of the Indicative with av must also remain inthe Indicative.

A few instances occur where the Present Optative represents

an Imperfect Indicative of the Recta. In such cases howeverno ambiguity exists.

to. Trerrpayfiiva 8iT)yovvTO, on avrol jx\v TrA.eoici' ttjv Se

avaipecriv tZv vavaySv irpotTTd^aiev. XEN. Sell. i. 7. 5.

They were describing the facts, explaining that they themselves

were sailing (against the enemy), and that they had com-

missioned (proper persons) to pick up the shipwrecked

seamen.

Recta, avrol IjrAeo/xev kch Trpoo-erd£ap.ev. Cf. vii. 1. 38,ideXoi, BovXevoiTO.

Obs. 1. The Tense of an Infinitive in a Sub-direct Clause isthe same as in the Recta, e.g. eypaipa, I wrote ; e(j>V ypd<fai, lie

said that he had written; A.eye, speak ; tKeXevev avrbv keyeiv, he

was ordering him to speak The time of the Infinitive Tensemay therefore be instantly discovered by turning it back tothe Recta So with the time of a Participle.

Obs. 2. No verb takes av because of its conversion from

Recta to Obliqua. If in the Obliqua a Finite Verb, Infinitive,or Participle takes av, it is because it had an S.v in the Recta.The tables of converted Conditional Sentences will show this.

§ 313* Types of Sub-direct Clauses in Historic

Sequence.

A. I. Original Recta (Statement).

1. ravra pMvddvuy.

2. ravra /xad^cropMi.

3. ravra [Aep,ddr)Ka.

4. ravra e/idvOavov,

5. TaCra efiefj,a6rji<rj.

6. ravra ip.aOov.

SUB-DIRECT CIA USES IN HISTORIC SEQUENCE. 391

II. Converted to Obliqua in Historic Sequence.

Principal. Sub-direct.

e\e£ev on, cos. 1. tclvto. jj.av66.vu. Graphic.TavTa fj.avdd.voi. Strict Sequence.

2. ravra jxaOrjo-iTai. Graphic.ravra fj.a6ij(To<,To. Strict Sequence.

3. TaiJTU /jefiaOriKe. Graphic.ravra /j,e/j,adrjK(as drj. Strict Sequence.

4. ravra efidvdave.

5. ravra ijj,efj.a$rjKu.

6. ravra e/iade. Graphic.™«ra (iddoi. Strict Sequence,

B. I. Original Eecta (Question).

1. ri fmvddvus •

2. Tt fiadr/uei

3. ti /j.e[j.d0rjKas

4. Tt e/j.avOave'S

5. Tt ifj.efxadyjKWS

6. Tt €/mdes

II. Converted to Obliqua

^/3£to. 1. oti or Tt. fjavdavei. Graphic.[mvddvoi. Strict Sequence.

2. „ fiadrjo-eTai. Graphic.

fjadrjo-oiro. Strict Sequence.

3. „ fiefid9rjKe. Graphic.

fj.efiadr]K(l>s drj. Strict Sequence.

4. „ kfj.dvBa.vt.

5. „ e/tejuaftj/cet.

6. „e/j.ade. Graphic.

fiddoL. Strict Sequence.

Note. The Aorist Indicative is preferable to the Optative

whenever it avoids ambiguity. Thus ovk u\ov 6'ti 8pdo-eiav

might mean either they did not know what to do (Recta, Tt

Spdcr(i)fj.ev ; a deliberative Subjunctive), or, they did not know

what they had done (Eecta, Tt iSpdo-afiev ). Almost always the

first construction is intended.Digitized by Microsoft®

392 ORATIO OBLI QUA.

C. Similarly with &™s, Hirtos prj (a much rarer construction

after verbs of commanding, etc., than the Infinitive).

Recta : 6'inos /«.») ecrecrde dvagioi kXevdepiai.

See thatyou he not

unworthy of freedom.„, „ v otovtcu ) Graphic.

D. With Deliberative Questions.

Recta, Trot <j>vyta •

Obliqua, -qiropet, ttoi (airoi) <pvyy ) Graphic.

$iryoi j Strict Sequence.

§ 314. Rules for Sub-oblique Clauses in the Oratio

Obliqua.

A. In Primary Sequence they undergo no change of Moodor Tense in passing from the Recta.

B. In Historic Sequence :

1. By the graphic construction they undergo no change,continuing to be what they were in PrimarySequence.

2. The verb is changed to the same tense in the Optative,

in Strict Sequence.

But N.B. The Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist Indicative

must remain in the Indicative and not be changed to the

Optative. Exceptions will be noticed further on.

to c

§ 315. Note to accompany the following Tables.

The construction of Sub-oblique as well as Sub-directClauses is shown in Conditional Sentences converted from theRecta to the Obliqua. The Recta will be found by referring

to Conditional Sentences (page 198), and need not be repeated

here. The Apodosis is the Principal Sentence in the Rectaand the Sub-direct in the Obliqua. The Protasis is the Sub-direct in the Recta, and the Sub-oblique in the Obliqua. TheProtasis may be taken as the type of any Adverbial Sub-obliqueClause by substituting omS^, 6Ve, «os, wpiv, etc., for el or iav.

It may equally well stand as the type of any Relative Sub-oblique Clause, but for the sake of completeness a RelativeConditional Table is given converted to the Obliqua.

TYPES OF OHA TIO OBLIQUA. 393

Observe that in the Sub-oblique Clauses, Adverbial or

Eelative, the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist Indicative of

the Eecta are not converted to the Optative but continue in

the Indicative.

The conversion of General Suppositions may be thusshown

Recta rjv Jy-yus eXdy ddvaros ovSels j3ovXerai dv/jo-Kciv.

dXX' el ri p.rj cf>epoipev &Tpvvev <f>epeiv.

Obliqua after rjv eXO-g —̂ovXerai. —Graphic,

£Xe£e on el eXdoi —fiovXono.ei rl pr\ <j>epoiev —tinpvvev.

e<£ij rjv eXdy —ovSeva f3ovXeo-0cu —Graphics

el eXOoi —ovSeva (3ovXeo-dcu.

ei Tt p.i] <f>epoiev —orpvvew <f>epeiv.

He said that, if they were not fetching anything, he

was ordering them to fetch it.

§ 316. Types of Oratio Obliqua, showing Sub-direct

and Sub-oblique Clauses in the Obliqua.

The Protasis is the Sub-oblique, the Apo-

dosis the Sub-direct Clause.

If you do this you are doing wrong becomes, when reported

by another person, He said that if he did it he was doing wrong.

I. With Xeyrn on, and a finite mood :

1. Primary Sequence :

Sub-oblique (the Protasia).

(el ravTO. woiei

ire-iroirjKe

el TaCra eiroiev

eiroi,r)0~e

lav (rjv) Tamo iroiy

TTOirjo-g

el ravTO. iroiolrj or

Troi7)0-eie

el Tavra. TrotrjO-ei

el ravTO. ewoiei.

Xeyei on (us)

Vet raiiTa «rotry<rtDigitized by Microsoft®

Sub-direct (the Apodosis).

aSiKei

ySiKetrjSiK'rjO'e

aStKfjcret

dSiKOirj av or

dSiK-qo-eiev av

dSiKrjcrei

rjSiKei av

r)SiKi9(T£V av

394 ORATIO OBLIQUA.

eXe^e oti ((is)

abiKOi/q

dSiKrjareie

d.8lK7)(TOl

dSiKoirj av

dSiKr/o-eiev av

dSiKYjcroi

r/Siicei av

rj8iKr](T£V av

2. Historic Sequence :

el ravra iroioirj

el ravra e-iroiei

eirofycre

el ravra ttoioit)

TTOLrjcreie

el ravra ttoioit)

iroLYjcreie

el ravra 7ro«jcrot

el ravra eirota,

el ravra liroirjo-e

In the graphic construction the construction after eXe£e onwill be just the same as after Xeyei 6'ti. The Future andPerfect Indicative (graphic) are commoner than their cor-

responding Optatives.

II. With <f>t)fit and an Infinitive

1. Primary Sequence :

f A. PRESENT ei ravra TTOiciseiroleis

hrotrjcras

a-e \ 0. FUTURE a. edv ravra <7r0 '^ s

( iroi-qo-ys

, ~ f TTOLOimei ravra < ,

'

[ TroirjO-eias

el ravra Trovqcrei's

el ravra hroleis

ei ravra eironjcras

Note. An Imperative in Apodosis would of course dependon a Verb of commanding (Indirect Petition), e.g. K&irre rrjv

dvpav, knock at the door ; etite K&wreiv rrjv dvpav, he told him to

knock at the door.

^>-qfx.i or

oifiai

B. Past( eiroieis f

{ eiroLri<ras \

II.

I

A.B.

PresentPast

dSiKeivaSt/cetv

dSiKijcrai

dStKJJO"6ll>

dSiKetv avS.oiKrjiTai avd8lKrjO~etV

dSiKeiv av

dSiKrjaai av

Strict Historic Sequence :

t A. PRESENT el ravra 7ro«Hj)s

Past el ii.

4c/>tiv or

(jijUlJV

B.€77

eiroieis

IWoiijcras

TTOLOLTji

Troi-qcreias

7TOtOt77S

vTronjcreias

\C.Jel ravra Troiijcrots


ere -j 0. FUTURE a. el ravra

0. el ravra i

dBiKelv

dSiKeiv

d8iKrjo-ai

dSiK-qo-eiv

dSiKeiv av

dSt/djcrat av

d8iKrj<rei.v

THE APODOSIS IN THE PARTICIPLE. 395

( A. PRESENT ei ravra eVoiets dStKeiv dv

\ B. PAST el ravra eiro6ijtras dSiKijo-ai av

Note. Et with the Optative in the Strict Historic Obliquastands for three distinct forms. Thus el noiol^'s may represent

(a) el n-oieis, a present condition; (6) edv noty;, an ordinary

future condition; (c) el ttoiomjs, a less graphic future condition.

§ 317- The Apodosis in the Participle.

1. Primary Sequence.

otSd ere, el ravra Troieis, dSiKovvra, and SO on, the Participle

in each case being in the same tense as the corresponding

Infinitive.

2.Historic

Sequence.

rj8r) ere, el ravra jtomhtjs, dSiKovvra, and SO on.

Note, el raCra 7tok3 dSiKti becomes oiSa el ravra izom aSiKWv.

§ 318. A Relative Sentence in the Sub-oblique

Clause.

Becta.

d 6V£t SiSoxri

a ej"x e or ^°"X e eSiSov or t'Sw/ce

. exoi oiooirj

Scotret

av

a e'AfiSdjtret

a eixev ebibov av

a arvfv eSoxKev av

Note. Observe that a, dv exV becomes in the Obliqua afxpi :

whereas d elxe remains a efye, and is not converted into a ex oi -

a ?x 01 represents three forms, a ex e '> " " v «X»< « *X°'> but

the Apodosis is in each case sufficient to prevent ambiguity.

If, however, a efx e ^ Sov were cnan g ed to a ^'x '8{8o

"7 theambiguity would bea7§abed by Microsoft®



396 0RAT10 OBLIQUA.

«£



REAL EXAMPLES ANALYSED. 397

Principal.

4. icrKoirti

He was consi-

dering.

Eecta

5. "Avdtos ttyf)

Anytus said

that

Eecta

Observe that

changed to

6. Xiyovo-i Se

Sub-Direct.

TTOS OHJTlji £0"OtTO

how he should find one

ttojs fx.oi eorat

Sub-oblique.

OCTTtS Q&IJJOI.

ISAE. ii. 10.

to bury him.

otrrts Odipu

ov% otoi> T£ eii/ou to fir) I eireiftr) t'urrjXdov Sev-

aTTOKTetvai p,e\

po.

Plat. Apol. xvii. 29 c.

it was impossible for younot to sentence me to

death

when once I had been

brought into this

court.

I oi)( olov re earn* to pA)|

eireiSrj e'urrjXOe S(vpo.

I d/!roKTeivai 2(DK|0aT?j I

the Aorist Indicative of the Eecta is notthe Obliqua.

o)S eV Tij yy a.7rida.vev 6 ! os ou/c e^ej3rjv to

dvrjp, Kciyoi Xidov avrio I irapdrrav Ik toC

eve/JaA.oj' as tijv Kt(£a- I TrAot'oi;.

Aijv,|

Antiph. cfe (7astf\ .Her. 26.

2%^ say though as a matter

of fact I never left

the ship at all.

that the deceased was

murdered ashore, andthat I struck him on the

head with a stone,

Observe here that the Aorist Indicative is kept in the Sub-

direct Clauses, and also (of course) in the Sub-oblique

Clause.

7.ifa

He said

yueXP' tovtov 8eiv fiav-

ddvuvetus iKavos tis ye-

voito, curare Setfcrete,

K.T.X.

Xen. Mem. iv. 7. 2.

until one became cap-

able, if ever it should

be necessary, etc.

that it was necessary to

go on learning for so

long a time

Eecta : p-eXP L tovtov Set {/.avOdvetv, ecus av yevi]Ta.i, edv irore

Seno-n.' " Digitized by Microsoft®

398 ORATIO 0BL1QUA.

§ 320. The Infinitive, and on (ws) with Finite

Moods in the Sub-direct Sentences.

Both these Constructions occur in the Sub-direct Sentence,

i.e. in the Principal Sentence of the Original Recta. But the

Infinitive is unquestionably the most common, as it is the

most natural, simple, and easy mode of expression. Greekwriters seem unconsciously to slide into it, even after anObliqua has been introduced in the first instance by on or u>s.

In consequence of this love for the Infinitive, one or twopeculiarities should be observed.

1. An Obliqua (indirect words or thoughts) is often

suddenly introduced without any introductory Principal

Verb. A Particle is the only warning given, said he, he

thought, it was said, or some such expression was in thewriter's mind and can be easily supplied. And in such acase it should be noticed that the Predicate in the Nomina-tive accompanies the Infinitive when referring to the Subject

of the Infinitive and of the chief Verb.Latin and English have the same free and natural usage.

(a.) *Ayis tous ?r/Decr/3e<,s h AaKc8aip.ova eKeX.ev<rev ievaf oiyap eivai Kvpios oujtos, k.t. A. XEN. Hell. ii. 2. 12.

Agis recommended the envoys to go to Lacedaemon (ex-

plaining that) he was not himself competent, etc.1

(b.) HXdriav 8e oSe, & avSpes 'AdrjvaToi, /cat Kpirwv Kal

K/dito/3ovAos Kal 'A7rok\68<opos KeXtvovcri fn.e rptd-Kovra p,v£>v Tip.rjcrao-do.1, avrol 8' eyyvaadai.

Plat. Apol. xxviii. 38 b.Plato here, and Crito, and Critobulus, and Apollodorus,

wish me to propose thirty minae (desiring me to saythat) they themselves are the securities.

Svoiv Xprjcrip.0LV ov Stapj/DTijcrea-flai ttjv ttoXiv 'qyovp.rjv 7rAeu-cravTcov fj/xlov rj yap QiXanrov, a fiev €?Ar/c/>ei rf}s TroAeioscHroSaSo-en', twv Se Aomiw a<f>k£ecrdai, rj, p,rj itoiovvtosravra, aTrayyeAeiv rjfi.a's tvQeas Sevpo. k.t. A. DEM. 388. 15.

One of two useful ends I considered the state would not lose.

Either Philip would restore the possessions of the state

i English expresses this just as neatly, with still less warning •

'' Agis recommended the envoys to go to Lacedaemon. He himself was

not competent, etc.

INFINITIVE, ETC., IN SUB-DIRECT SENTENCES. 399

which he had taken, and would hold his hand from the

remainder, or, if he were not to do this, we should at once

Iring back word here, etc.

2. In the same way, but not nearly so often as an Infini-

tive, an Optative may be introduced by an explanatory yap.

(a.) cA.£yov on TraVTOs a£ia Aeyet 2ei50ijs" x«fi(uv yap sty,

k.t.X. Xen. An. vii. 313.

They said that what Seuthes said was quite right : for it

was winter, etc.

The whole paragraph 1 3 is very instructive, and should becarefully read. Observe that the Obliqua ends with a direct

indicative of the writer, !8oKa.

(6.) Or the Optative continues the Obliqua after a precedingOptative with on or <os.

aTTiKpiVaVTO O.VT(S, OTl dSwaTO. (T<JMXIV t'lTj TTOLCIV 8, TTpOKa-

Aetrot avev ' AOrjvaitoV imZSes yap <r<$>u>v Kal yvvaiKes

Trap' intivois eir/auvSeSievai Se nai, k.t.X.

ThUC.ii.

72.Obs. That after the Optative the writer slides naturally into

the Infinitive SeSievai.

They answered him that it was impossible for them to comply

with their proposals without consulting the Athenians, for

their wives and children were with them; moreover they

. were afraid, etc.

(c.) In Soph. Phil. 615, an Optative is still more abruptlyintroduced.

evOeaiS vireo-)(eTO

toi' avSp 'Ax^'ofs TovSe 8rjkui<reiv aywv'

oiWo p,lv p.dkio-0' etcovcriov \af3wv.

d p,rj i)i\oi 8', aKovra' [xai tovtw ndpo.

Ttpweiv etpelro TuJ OeXovn p? TV)(h>v\.

Straightway he promised

To bring and show this man to the Achaeans._

Most like with his consent he thought to take him.

Should he refuse, then in his spite, etc.

Out of vireo-xero is to be supplied (ekegev (us) before oiono.

And observe, as in the preceding passage of Xenophon, the

Direct Indicative icpdro is resorted to, relieving the artificial

strain of the Optative. Cf. also Plat. Phaed. 95 D, &»?

. . . olttoWvoito : Rep. 420 C, evaXt) Xipfievoi, eUv. With the lastDigitized by Microsoft®

4 oo 0RAT10 OBLIQUA.

instance compare Soph. 0. T. 1245, v<j> &v ddvoc , . . XCiroi.

Here, although in a Relative Sentence, the Optative crops

up; it is equal to eXegev on inrb rovrtav Bdvoi, SO that the

clause is virtually Sub-direct rather than Sub-oblique, being

introduced by /wjj/mjv e-^ovo-'. The passage is discussed in

Madvig's Syntax, p. 116, note 2, and Goodwin, Moods andTenses, § 77, 1 (e).

3. The Infinitive and on (ws) with a Finite Mood alternate

in the same Obliqua.

ol AaKeSai/idvtoi ehrov, on o-<f>uri [lev SoKotev aSiKetv oi

'Adrjvaioi, fBovXecrdai 8e Kal tovs jrai/ras ^vfi[id)(<rvs

Trapa.Ka.Xko-avTK tf/rjcfrov errayayeiv. ThTJC. i. 87.

Obs. on p,ev SoKoiev co-ordinate with ftovkeo-dai. 8e.

The Lacedaemonians told them that their own judgment wasthat the Athenians were in the wrong : they wished, how-ever, to summon all the allies as well as themselves, and to

put the matter to the vote.

keyeis o~6, & rrdrep, d>s ep,ol SokeT, on, &o-7rep ovSe yeu>pyov

dpyov ovSev o(j>e\os, ovrws oijSe o-rpar-qyov dpyov oiSev

6'<£eAos thai. Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 18.

You say, father, as I understand you, that, just as an idle

husbandman is of no use, so an idle soldier is of no me.

Observe that the verb ko-n is omitted in the sentenceintroduced by Sxjirep, and the finite construction with on is

not carried out at all.

4. And this is the greatest peculiarity. Such is the naturalGreek yearning for the Infinitive, that Sub-oblique clauses,

both Adverbial and Relative, instead of taking a Finite Mood,are actually followed by an Infinitive. In some cases thewriter, after beginning with if, since, when, which, etc., seemsmentally to throw in a "said he," "it was said," "it wasagreed or thought," and passes to an Infinitive : in others thepreceding Infinitive seems to exercise

an assimilating influenceover the Sub-oblique Verb.

(a.) £<£?? 8e. eireiSri ov eKfirjvai ri)v i/^X 1 ?", Tropevecrdo.1 /nerajroA.Xaii'. Plat. Bep. 614 b.

He said that when his soul had gone out of him (i.e. hisbody), he was journeying with many.

Several similar instances occur from 614 to end of the bookafter kv <$, o#s, ore, els o, o®, (us.

INFINITIVE, ETC., IN SUB-DIRECT SENTENCES. 401

(J.) Aiyercu k.o.1 'AAk/Wcoi/i t<j> 'Ap.<pidpe(a, ore Sr/ aXacrdaiavrbv fiera tov cpovov rrjs /mjt/jos, tov 'ArroXXai

ravrrjv Tr)V yr\v xPWat, o'lKelv. ThuC. ii. 102.There is a tradition moreover that Apollo by oracle

directed Alcmaeon, the son of Amphiaraus, when hewas a wanderer after the murder of his mother, to

inhabit this district.

Strictly ore qXaro.

(c.) TvyrjV cpao-lv ISovra to xdcrpM iâl 9avfi.aicra.VTa, Kara-

fSrjvai, K.a.1 i8ew aXXa re 6avp.ao-Ta «ai imrovX^Xkovv kolXov, OvpiSas côvTa, ko.6' as eyKvipavracSeiv evovTO. veKpov, As <f>o.lveo-6a.i, pelfro 7) Kar'

avdpuyirov tovtov Se aAAo p.ev %xelv ovSev, Trepl

Se TJ7 X61/3 ' XP vcr0 ^ v SaKTvXwv, ov rrepieXopevov

eKîJvat. Plat. Sep. ii. 359 d.

Gyges, the story runs, seemg the abyss and marvelling at

it, descended and saw, among many other marvellous

things, a hollow brazen horse, fitted with windows,through which he peeped and saw inside a corpse, so

it seemed, of more than human stature. It hadnothing but a golden ring on its finger, which Gyges

took off, and so made his way out.

ko.6' as eiSev —<os e<f>atveTO —aAAo plv tt)(e —ov 7repi.eX6p.ivoi

Though Latin has the same construction of the Eelativewith the Infinitive, yet Cicero in translating this does notavail himself of the identity of idiom (see De Offic. iii. 38).

Note. Latin has, though very rarely, this idiom of the

Eelative with the Infinitive : the often quoted instance fromLiv. xxiv. 3 appears to rest on an incorrect reading, but in

Liv. xxx. 42 an undoubted example occurs.

Quorum oratio varia fuit, partim purgantium, quae questi

erant missi ad regem legati, partim ultro accusantium

socios populi Eomani, sed multo infestius M. Aurelium,

quern ex tribus ad se missis legatis, dilectu habito,

substitisse et se bello lacessisse contra foedus, et saepe

cum praef ectis suis signis conlatis pugnasse.

They spoke on a variety of topics. A t one time they endeavoured

to clear themselves of the charges brought by the commis-sioners sent to faejikmg $y<fhim&lm> time they were bringing

402 ORATIO OBLIQUA.

countercharges against the allies of the Roman people, with

much greater rancowr however against M. Aurelius, who(they said), out of the three commissioners sent to them, had

levied troops, stayed behind, and hadcommenced hostilities

against them contrary to treaty, and had fought several

down/right battles with their officers.

§ 321. Assimilation of Optatives.

A. After an Optative in a Principal Sentence it is usualfor another Optative to follow in an Adverbial or a Relative

Sentence as if in Historic Sequence. As the Optative is notin itself past, but on the contrary almost invariably refers to

future time, we can only explain this on the principle of

assimilation.

(a.) TeOvai-qv ore fioi urjKeri ravra fxi\oi.

MlMNERMUS, i. 2.

Then might I die whensoe'er this is no longer my care.

For oTttv piXy.(p.) 7r<3s av Tts, a ye p,fj iirlo-Ta.no, cro<£os av eirj

Xen. Mem. iv. 6, 7.

How could one be wise in what he does not know forcertain ?

Instead of a hriararai, or a av fifj eVtcrnjTCH.

(c.) el a.TrodvrjO'KOi jj.lv irdvra ocra tov £fjv peraXdBoi,iiruSr] Se dwodavot,, p.ivoi iv toi5t<j) t<j o)(rjp.aTi Kal

p) irdXiv dva/iido-KoiTO, ap' ov iroXXrj dvdyKrj,TtXevTuivTa irdvra redvdvai Kal pySlv £rjv

Plat. Phaed. xvii. 1. 72.

If all things whatsoever partake of life should die, andwhen they die, abide in this condition and not cometo life again, does it not inevitably follow that in theend all things will be dead and nothing living ?

For 60-a av p.£TaXdBrj —iireiSav diroddvy.But Tts ovk av juitriyo-etev &iXnrirov, d <£aivotTO tootois iiri-

BovXzvwv, virep &v 6 irpoyovos avTov irpoelXeroKivSvveveiv ; ISOC. Phil. 77.

Because 7rpo£6'AeTo was Aorist Indicative in the Recta.Who would not detest Philip if he should be proved to be

conspiring against those in whose behalf his ancestordeliberately decided to

face danger ?

ASSIMILATION OF OPTATIVES. 403

Note. After an Optative denoting a wish, the sentence may-be assimilated.

dvfiov ykvoiro X6 '/ 5 ' TrX-qptacrai irorelv' al M.vitrjvai yvotev ij 'SarapT'q 6' ori

XV 2/cCpos dvSpZv aXmfitov /wjt?j/> 'icj>v. SOPH. Phil. 324.

For ha, yvwa-i. It is generally stated that a Final Sentenceis never assimilated. See Soph. Phil. 961, an often quotedinstance. See also Soph. Track 955 ; Eur. Bacch. 1252 (andconsult the note in Sandys' edition).

In Eue. Bacch. 1384, we get both constructions, Assimila-tion and non- Assimilation combined

ekOoijll 8' 07TOV

p/qn K.i8aip!liv piapo<s /t' ecriSoi

pvqre K.i8aipuiv' otrcrotcrtv eyto,

p!f\& 081 dvpcrov fivrj/i' avaictnai'

3aK\ais 8' aXXauri p.e\oiev.

§ 322« B. 1. Occasionally this Assimilation does not take

place.

(a.) Tis ai' SiKrjv Kptveiev f) yvqii) Xoyovirplv av Trap' dp.<j>oTv pJodos eKp,d8y o-a<£<3s ;

Eur. Eer.. 179.

irplv av eKfiddy, and not irplv eKfidOoi. Of. Eel. 176,

Ion 672, Plat. Bep. ii. 359 c (0 T6 av /3ovXrjrai).

(J.) KD/OOS irpoo-KaXwv toiis <f>tXovs eanrovSaioXoyetro, &sSrjXoirj, ovs Tijua. Xen. An. i. 9. 28.

ous rt/ja, arid not rip,(oy.

2. An Indirect Statement with6'ti or <J>s, an Indirect Ques-

tion, or a Sentence with &™s when following an Optative, is

not so assimilated, nor usually a Final Sentence.

(a ) ov S' av eis dvTeiVoi ws ov trvficpcpei rfj 7roA«.

Dem. 202. 23.

Not even one would reply that it is not expedient to the

Here av dvretVot is a Principal Sentence in Primary Time.Digitized by Microsoft®

404 ORATTU OBLIQUA.

(b.) e'l Tts Aeyot avOpwrov IcmjKOTa, Kivovvra Se ras \etpas

re /cat rfjv KecJMXrjv, on 6 auros eo-rrjKe re /cat Kiveirai,

ovk av d^ioipev ovtw Aeyetv Setv.

Plat. Rep.iv.

436d.

If one should say of a man who is standing still, but is

moving his hands and his head, that the same manis both stationary and in motion, we should not allow

this to be a correct mode of expression.

(c.) 6 irpwpevs -rijs vea>s . . . «ai dirmv av enrol, birov CKacrra

Ketxat koI oirocra ecrriv. XEN. Oec. vili. 14.

(d.) okvoitjv av £ts Ta jrAota ep/3aiveiv, a K{!/50s rjp.LV Soirj,

pvrj rjpas awats Tats Tpirjpeo-i KaraSvo-g.

Xen. An. i. 3. 17.

§ 323. Examples of Mixed Graphic and Strict

Obliqua.

(a.) irpoeiTtov vpiv on el pr) jrapeo-op.eda o-vo-rpao-evcropevoi,

eKeivoi erf> r)pas loiev. XEN. Hell. V. 2. 13.

/ told you beforehand that if we should (shall) not be present

to join them, they would march against us.

(b.) e(f>oj3eiTO p,r) ol KaKeSaipovioi (refill's, oirore (ra^jais aKoiareiav,

ovKeTi dcjiSio-iv. ThUC. i. 91.

He was afraid that the Lacedaemonians would no longer let

them go, whenever they heard of it.

(c.) eurov tij fiovXfj on eiSeir/v toiis ironjcravTas, nal e£rj\ey£at<x yevopeva on eio-qy-qo-aro pev ttivovtuv rjpiov TavTr/v

•n)v j3ovXr)v Ei5<jf>iA)jT0S, dvTeiirov Se eyto, /cat Tore piev ovy'evovro Si' epe. Andok. de Myst. 61.

I told the Council that I knew who had committed the act, andI established the facts that Euphileius had suggested this

scheme, and that I had opposed it, and that on that occasion

it was not executed owing to my opposition.

. . . eio-ijyqo- aro Euc^tAijTOS, dvreiTrov Se lyw, ovk eyevero.

§ 324. Virtual Oratio Obliqua.

Virtual Oratio Obliqua occurs when the words, thoughts,and motives, not of the writer, but of the subject of thesentence, are given rather by implication or allusion thandirectly introduced.

PAST TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 405

(a.) tov ILepiKXea eKaKifav on crrpaTijyos &v ovk erre^dyoi.

Thuc. ii. 21.

(The Athenians,oi ttoXXol,

grumbled thus:

<rrpaT>;-y6s &v ovkeire^dyei rjpas).

(6.) ot 8' Qicreipov, el aXuxroivro. XEN. An. i. 4. 7.

Others were pitying them if they were to be captured (felt pity

at the thought).

The thought was o'lKTpol eo-ovrai el aXucrovTai.

(c.) oio~da eiraivecravTa "Oprjpov tov 'Ayapepvova ws fiao-iXevs

eli] ayados. XEN. Symp. iv. 6.

You know that Homer praises Agamemnon as being a good

king.

Cf. laudat Africanum Panaetius quod fuerit abstinens.

Cic. De Offic. ii. 76.

(d.) raXXa, rjv en vavpayeiv el 'AOrjvaioL roXprjvuxri, wap-

eo-Keva£ovTO.THUC. vii. 59.

They were making all other preparations in case the

Athenians should venture cm a battle.

Here, observe, the graphic tjv ToApjo-wo-t is used instead of

el ToXprjcreiav.

(«.) Comparejrpbs rrjv iroXiv, el eirifioijOoiev, exiapovv. THUC. vii. 100.

They were advancing on the city in case the citizens should

march out against them.

El and edv often allude in this way to a thought. See Soph.

0. 0. 1770, edv 7TUS SiaKwXvo-wpev : SOPH. Ai. 313, el pi] cpavofyv.

§ 3 2 5- Past Tenses of the Indicative inOratio Obliqua.

I. For instances of the Imperfect and Pluperfect Indicative

in Sub-direct Clauses, see Xen. An. i. 2. 21, Hell. vii. 1. 34.

II. For instances of the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist

Indicative in Sub-oblique Clauses, see Xen. Mem. ii. 6. 13;

THUC. vii. 80 (oi)s pereirepxpav) ; DEM. 869. 9(&v direSoerav)

;

Xen. An. i. 9. 10 (wwk&S9<tiikrGmS- 2 -9 ('? v ty»lM-

406 ORATIO OBLIQUA.

The Indicative may be accounted for on the same or ana-

logous principles in the following passages

(a.) expyjv tovs aXXovs firj irporepov irepl rZv 6/ioXoyovp.evoiv

gvfj,/3ov\eveiv, irplv irepl rSv d/j<£K7/3')jTOii/Jevu>l' ijpis

ZStSagav. Isoc. Panegyr. 19.

Here irplv 8i8d£eiav would represent irplv dv SiSd^taa-i.

(b.) ijSews av KaXXiKXel en 8ieXey6p,rjv, e'ws atrip -rqv tov

' A pifrlovos direStOKa prjcriv dvrt Trjs tov Ztjoov.

Plat. Gorg. 506 b.

i'ais aireSwKa and not ews d,Tro8oi7jv, which would represent

etas av diroSw.

§ 326. Apparently Abnormal Obliqua.

Sometimes, but rarely, instead of either the Graphic or the

real Obliqua , we get an Indicative. An , examination of

passages seems to show that the writer throws in the moodand tense from his own point of view instead of giving the

mood which would be required if he were quoting words 01

thoughts.

(a.) K.vpos vir'eo-yero tois MiAijo-tois fyvyacriv, el ~k<xAu>s «ara-

npd£eiev, e<j>' a IcrrpaTeveTO, pvrj irpocrdev iraveo~6ai, irplv

avrovs Karaydyoi oiKa.Se. XEN. An. i. 2. 2.

The Recta would be rjv KaraTrpdgu), efi a o-rparevopai oviravo-ojxai irplv av KaTaydyo). e<$> a eo~TpareveTO is really a bit

of the writer's narrative.

(b.) Aiyercu 8' avrbv (Tlavcraviav) pieXXovra £vXXr)tf>drjo-eo-6ai

. . . yvuvai. e<f>' la ey^tapei. TlIUC. i. 134.

It is said that Pausanias, when on the point of being arrested,

knew for what purpose he (the ephor) icas coming,

etp,' $ xwpoirj or xcopet would be the usual construction ; ixwpeiis the mood and tense of the writer rather than of the subject

Pausanias.

(c.) eXeyov ov KaXGis rrjv 'EXXdSa eXevOepovv avrbv, el avSpasSiecpdetpev, k.t.X. ThTJC. iii. 32.

They told him that he was not liberating Greece in the right

way, if he was destroying men, etc.

Obliqua would require d SiacpOeipei, or 8ia4>6eipot. Of. Thuc.vi. 29, eipyao-To (taking Siecfrdeipev as Imperfect. It may beAorist).

LONG SPEECHES IN OBLIQUA. 407

Precisely in the same way it is open in Latin for the writerto employ an Indicative or a Subjunctive. Thus we mightsay, legati, mirante consule, quod morabantur,

venerimt (or quodmorarentur) ; morabantur would give the writer's statement(morarentur would express the consul's feelings).

(d.) The most peculiar instance perhaps is in Arist. Vesp.283, Xeymv tos <f>iXaOrfvaios fjv kou Karetiroi, where the Xeyiav(is seems to necessitate a quotation of words (ais iu-rt or d-rj).

§ 327. LONG SPEECHES IN OBLIQUA.Long Speeches in the Oratio Obliqua, such as we find in

Livy, are rare in Greek. Greek is too lively, too anxiousconstantly to recur to the present, and cannot bind itself tothe formal regularity which characterises a Eoman Obliqua.The introductory verb ?<£ij, eXege, tfpero, elnev, is repeated, orthe writer breaks away suddenly into the Eecta.

For longer specimens of the Obliqua see Plat. Symp. 189,Rep. 614 b, Thuc. vi. 49, Xbn. Cyr. viii. 1. 10, 11.

A very instructive example occurs in Andokides deMysteriis, 38, etc., which is here given at length :

e<£ij yap AtoKAeiSijs e'lvai f£v Diokleides stated that heavSpdn-oSov 01 eirl Aavp[<j>, Seiv had a slave at Laurium, and

Se Ko/ucrao-dai aTrocfiopdv. dva- that he had occasion to fetcheras Se 7r/ouj \peva-6eh t^s &pas a payment due. Rising early

/JaSifeiv elvai Se irava-kXrjvov. he mistook the time andeiret Se Trapa to irpoirvXaiov tov started : there was a full moon.Aiovvo-ov f)v, opav dv6 punrovs When he was by the gateway7roAAovs euro tov d>8eCov Kara- of Dionysus, he saw several

/Baivovras els rfjv opx^o-rpav persons coming down fromSeuras Se clvtovs, elo-eXdiav v7rb the Odeum into the Orchestra.

rty a-Kiav Ka6e£eo-6ai peragu Afraid of them, he withdrewrov Kiovos Kal rfjs 0-TiyA.^s ec£' into the shade and crouched

27 o aTparrjyoi eo-nv 6 \aXKovs. down between the column andopav Se dvdp&Trovs rbv (iev the pedestal on which stands

dpidfibv p,d\itTTa rpiaKcxriovs, the Bronze General. He saweo-rdvat, Se kvk\w dva irevTe Kal some three hundred menSe/ca avSpas, rovs Se dva. standing round about in

eiKoa-ivop&v

Seawrav wpbs groups

of fifteen and twenty-i)v o-eX^i/Tjv Ta vp&BlfflfkeSW Mffi^&mfi* he looked he reco S"

408 RAT 10 OBLIQUA.

wXuo~to>v yiyvuxrKCiv. Kai wpG-

tov piv, & avSpes, rovd' -uire^cTO

Seivorarov irpaypa, oipai, birois

ev eKeivip eh) ovtivo. jiovXoiro

'A6rjv(u<j)v <f>avai t£>v dvSpwv

tovtwv etvai, ovtivo. Se fir)

/3ovXoito, Xeyeiv on ovk rjv.

tSuiv Se TavT e<pr) eirl AavpLov

levai, ko.1 -rr\ vcrrepala, anoveiv oti

ot 'Eppat eTev TrepiKeKoppevoi'

yvwvat, oSv evdvs on tovtiovelt)

rSiv dvSplav to epyov. rJK(ov Se

eis acrrv fijTJjTas re r)Srq yprjpe-

vovs Ka.TaXa.pf3dvet,v Kal p-f)-

vvrpa. KeKTjpvypeva eKarbv juvas.

ISiav Se Eifc^juov tov KaAAtovtou TrjXeKXeovs dSeX(j>ov ev tijj

XaA.Ket Ka,6r)pevov, dvayayuiv

avrbv ets to 'H^>aio-T£tov Xeyeiv

direp ip.LV lya> ei'pr)Ka}

<os ISoi

ijpas ev skcwy) Tg vvkti' ovkovvSeoiTO irapa. tyjs 7roAews )(prjpa.Ta,

Aa/Jeii/ yuaAAov »} Trap' r/pStv,

&<rd' r/pas e'x eu/ ^>'Aow.

eiiretv oSv tov Eii<£?jp,ov on

KaAfis 7ronjo"eiei' eiTrcfiv, kc« vwi)Kuv KeXevcrai ol el's tijv Aew-yopov o'lKiav, iV licet £vyyevgper' epov 'Av5o/aSiy kgu eTepois

oT'S Set. ij/cetv £<£)} Tij vcrTepaia.,

koX Si) KoiTTe.iv Trjv dvpav, tov

Se ira/repa. tov Ijuov txixeiv

e£tdvTa, (cat ei7reiv aiJToV" apa•ye o-£ ot'Se Keptpevovcri

; XP'?Digitized by

nised most of their faces bythe moonlight. Now in the

first place, gentlemen, this

story on which he bases his

evidence is a most extraordin-

ary thing; his object, I take it,

being that it might rest withhim to include in this list

any Athenian he wished, or to

exclude any he did not wish.

After seeing this hestated

that he went on to Lauri m,and next day heard of themutilation of the Hermae.So he knew it was the workof these persons. Returningto town he found the com-missioners of inquiry chosen

and a reward of a hundredminae offered for information.

Seeing Euphemus the sonof Kallias and brother ofTelekles sitting in his forge,

he brought him up to theHephaesteum, and told himexactly what I have said to

you, how he had seen us thatnight. Now he did not (so

he said) desire to receivemoney from the state morethan from us, if we would behis friends.

Euphemus then told him

that he had acted rightly intelling him, and now he askedhim to come to the house ofLeogoras, to meet me there,said he, with one Andokidesand other needful persons. Hesaid that he went next day,and just as he was knockingat the door my father hap-

Microsoft®r

LONG SPEECHES IN OBLFQUA. 409

fievTOi, fir) a7ro)0eKrdaL toiovtovs

(j>[\oi's' ihrovTa 8e avrbv Tavraoi'xcer^at.

KCU TOUT(f> fl€V T<J> Tp07T(ff TOV

irarepa p,ov d7r(oA.Aue, crwetSdVa

a.Tro<jiaivo>v. ewretv 8e ijjtias 6V1

SeSoyfievov r)p,iv ei'rj Si5o /J6>

rdXavra dpyvptovSiSdvcu ot

avri twv Ikgitov /xvcov t<3v ck

tov Srjfiocriov, eav 8c KaT<xcrx-

/xev ij/aeis a [3ovX6fie6a, hia.

avTov r)fiiav e6vcu, ttlo-tlv 8e

Tovrui' fiovvat re Kai Se£acr#GH.

(hroKplvacrdai Se avrbs irpbs

ravra 0T6 /3ovXtvcroiTO. 17/ias

8e KeAtijetJ' a-urov t/k«v asKaAAtov rod T17A.eKA.60us, tva

Kcuceivos wapdrj. rbv 8 ati

KijSeo-Tijv /iot) o{!tms aTrdtWvev,

riKiiv i^rj £19 Ka.AA.tou, kcu

KaOop.oXoyqa-a.'S Tjfilv ttmttiv

Sovvai kv aKpowoXei, (cm, ij/tas

crw0e/*eVotJS ol to dpyvpwv as

tov ciriovTa ju-ijva Sdkrciv Sia-

\ptv8eo-9ai kcu oi5 StSdvar r/Ketv

oSv fir/vvo-wv tu. yevofieva.

pened to be going out, andsaid, " Oh, is it you these

people are expecting 1 Well,

one ought not to reject suchfriends." So saying, he wasoff.

In this way he tried to ruin

my father by denouncing himas an accomplice. (Accordingto him) we said that we pro-

posed to give him twotalents

of silver instead of the hun-dred minae offered by the

Treasury, and that if wegained our object he was(should be) one of our num-ber, and that we exchangedpledges of this. His own

reply to this was that hewould think it over : we, how-ever, told him to come to the

house of Kallias son of

Telekles whose presence wedesired. Again in this he

tried to ruin my relation.

He came, so he said, to the

house of Kallias, and accord-

ing to agreement he gave us

pledges on the Akropolis, andwe, after stipulating to give

him the money by the next

month, break our promise and

refuse to give it. Conse-

quently heis present to in-

form of the facts.

CHAPTEE IV.

FIGUEES OF EHETOEIO, Etc.

§ 328. Alliteration.

Alliteration, or the repetition of the same letter.

e.g. Who shall decide when doctors disagree ?

Subdola cum ridet placidi pellacia ponti. Luc. ii. 559.

Tympana tenta tonant palmis et cymbala circum

Concava, raucisonoque minantur cornua cantu.

Id. ii. 618,

6o.v6.tov 6S.ttov 6el Plat. Apol. xxix. 39 A.

It (wickedness) fleeth faster than fate.

rj t<5> TravcoAti iraTpl tu>v fi.lv k^ k[iov

iraiSiov irdflos irapuro ; SOPH. El. 544.

Or by thy felon father, for the family

I lore him, was all fondness flung away 1

rbv S' ayplois oo~o~outi Tra.TTT'fjVa.'s 6 7ra?s

7rn5cras Trpocranrip. SOPH. Ant. 1231.

Of. Soph. Ant. 50, where an initial a occurs seven times.

Instances may easily be collected. Ours is the most alli-

terative of languages. Shakspere abounds with natural

and beautiful examples. Asis

well known, Early Englishalliterative poetry consisted of couplets, in which each section

contained two or more accented words beginning with thesame letter.

In a somer seson, whan soft was the sonne,I shope me in shroudes, as I a shepe were,In habite as an heremite, unholy of workes,Went wyde in pis world, wondres to here.

r,- •*• -,<.»,.• «^ Piers the Plowman4 10 Digitized by Microsoft®



ANAKOLUTHIA. 41

Shakspere ridicules the abuse of Alliteration

Whereat, with blade, with bloody blameful blame,

He bravely broached his boiling bloody breast.

" Hortatur me frater, ut meos malis miser mandarem natos "

of Accius (Cic. fuse. iv. 77) is little better.

§ 329. Anakoluthia.

Anakoluthia or Anakoluthon is the term used where thestructure of the sentence is not grammatically followed out.It is either natural and unstudied, or artificial and rhetorical.It is natural and unstudied in Herodotus, whose irregularconstructions arise from his writing just as if he were talking.It is natural and unstudied again in Aeschylus, whosethoughts and emotions are too big for his words, and in

Thucydides, who thinks more of matter than manner. It is

rhetorical in Plato, who purposely imitates the easy freedomof ordinary conversation. Sometimes Anakoluthia arises

from mere slovenliness, as in Andokides.During the progress of a sentence a new idea strikes the

writer ; a new expression is thus introduced and becomes adisturbing influence. Or an explanation may be necessary

and a parenthesis, more or less long, is inserted. Thesentence thus may wander far away from its original con-

struction. Generally the writer is aware that he has goneastray, and goes back, not to the grammar, but to the sense

of the passage, resuming often in a different construction with

a particle Se, 817, ovv, so, then, as I was saying.

There are many kinds of Anakoluthia, and the figure is

constantly recurring. One or two specimens are given just

to show what is meant

dvSpoTv 8' bjxa.iii.ow ddva.ro'S SS' ciutoktovos, —ovk &tti yrjpa.'S rovSe rov fjU(Wjj,aros.

Aesch. S. c. Theb. 681.

Here ddvaTos, the subject, has no verb (yrjpao-Kei). Instead

of the verb the writer solemnly pauses, adding a second

sentence nearly complete in itself.

But blood of brothers shed by fellowly hands —There is no age fm such voUutwn.

412 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC.

tci izdvTa yap tis eyêas dv8' afyiaros

eras, [idrrfv o fiof(do<s. AESCH. Oh. 521.

Pour all the atoning offerings in the world

For one life spilt —vain were thy toil.

Grammatically : ixdr-qv av /mjxôujs.

01 'Adrjvaioi vocr(j) «rie£bvT0 Ka-r' d/j.<f>0Tepa, t»Js re &pas tov

iviavTOv rairnjs oi'cr^s, ivfj

a.<r9evov<riv avOpiowoc fiaXurra,

Kal to x<apiov dfj-a, kv <J io-TpaToireSevoVTO, JAwSes Kal

XaAeirov fjv. THUC. vii. 47.

Grammatically it should have been tov xaplov JAtoSous ko.1

XaAtjroC ovtos.

The Athenians were suffering from sickness arising from twocauses, first, because this was the time of year when sickness

is most prevalent, and next, the ground on which they wereencamped was swampy and unhealthy.

Cf. iv. 23, Kal 7repl ILjAov —T<£ Teiêt. Hl)T. vii. 74, KalTToAAa dfivvao-Oai.

One simple instance from Plato may suffice to show how heimitates the freedom of ordinary talk:

^XOov hrl Tiva t(ov 8okovvto)v o-o<pQv etvai . . . Kal SiaXeyo-jitei/os avTiij, e'So£e poi oStos o d.vrjp So/cetv filv ilvai croiôs

k.t.A., elvai S' ov. Plat. Apol. vi. 21 b.

1 went to see one of those who had the reputation of beingwise. And talking with him, this man seemed to me to beconsidered wise, without being really so.

As if it were SiaAeyojuevos avrtp cfioâcra, conversing with himI thought.

§ 330. Antiptosis.

Antiptosis. The Subject of the Subordinate Clause isthe object of the Principal Clause.

The stock instance is " nosti Marcellum, quam tardus sit

for " nosti quam tardus sit Marcellus." " I know you notwhence ye are."

This is a common construction in Greek, Latin andEnglish.

iTeov ovv o-KoirovvTi tov xfyô-fixiv tl Xkye.i. Plat. Apol vii21 E.

I must go m then exammmg the oracle, what it means (i.e.emmvnmg what the oracle means, or the

meaning of theoracle).Digitized by Microsoft®

ASYNDETON AND BINARY STRUCTURE. 413

otoe p.ev ouSejs rbv ddvaTov ovS' el rvy\dvei ttovtcov (leyicrrov

ov tQv dyaduv. Plat. Apol. xvii. 29 A.

No one knows (with regard to) death, even whether it is (not)

the greatest possible blessing.

We may say that the Accusative and the SubordinateSentence together become the object of the principal Verb.

Antiptosis is commonly explained as above, but the simplerand more rational account is that the Subordinate Clause ex-

pands and explains the Object or Accusative of the Principal

Clause.

§ 33I« Asyndeton.

Asyndeton, or the omission of Conjunctions, stock instancesof which are Shakspere's

Unhousel'd, disappointed, unanel'd

and Cicero's Abiit, excessit, evasit, erupit.

Cf. Milton's Unrespited, unpitied, unreprieved.Unshaken, unseduced, unterrified.

Exhaustless, spiritless, afflicted, fallen.

aKAawTOS, a<£tAos, dw/ievaioi. SOPH. Ant. 877.Unwept, unloved, unhymned.

&<j>i\ov, epr)p.ov, dwoXiv, Iv faio-iv veKpov. SOPH. Phil. 1018.

Friendless, lone, citiless, midst the living dead.

The use of the figure is to set forth each idea separately,

and pointedly. It is so common that further instances are

unnecessary.

§ 332. Binary Structure.

One conception is stated twice over, so that two aspects of

it are given. This double presentment enables the reader

to obtain a fuller view of the conception as a whole.

Mr. Eiddell aptly describes this artifice as giving a rhetorical

"binocular vision." It is commonly employed in Similes.

av 8' 'Aya/j.ejj,v(i}V

icrraTO 8a.Kpv)(e<ov, wore Kpr/vrj fieXdvvSpos . . .

ws 6 fiapvo-Tevdxv ore" Apyeioicri fieTrjvSa. II. ix. 13.

Cf. Soph. Ai. 840, 0. 0. 1239.Digitized by Microsoft®

ravra Jya> Sokw aKoveiv, wcrjrep ot Kopv^avTiCivTes T<av

avXwv 8okov(tlv aKoveiv . . . K.a.1 hi c/iol avrrj ij ijx 7} • •

/Soju/Set. Plat. Crito, 54 d.

ov ravrbv rovro irarovOao-iv, . . . aKoXaala tivi o-bxppoves

e'urtv ; Plat. Phaed. 67 E.

ovtukti croi Sokw, ovSeva vop,[£u> debv etvai;

Plat. Apol. xiv. 26 e.

Binary Structure in giving two descriptions of the sameobject differs from Apposition, which gives hut one descrip-

tion, though in certain forms there is a resemblance between

the figures. Asyndeta and Anakoluthia often occur in thisstructure. The artifice is used by all Greek writers, but it is

employed in an almost endless variety of subtle forms byPlato. See Eiddell, pp. 196-209, whence the above examplesare taken.

Antiptosis is a form of Binary Structure.

§ 333- Brachylogy or Abbreviated Construction.

(Including Zeugma, Constructio Praegnans, Brachylogy of

Comparison.)

Brachylogy is a kind of Ellipse ; but where Ellipse actually

suppresses a word or sentence altogether, Brachylogy leavesthem to be supplied from some corresponding expression inthe context. Brachylogy is thus more essentially artificial

than Ellipse.

£^>pacras viriprepav rrji tote x°-P lr °s ( s( 5. iiriprepav X°-P w> the

X°-P l v supplied from x«/°'tos). Soph. El. 1265.

A Substantive, an Adjective, a Pronoun, a Conjunction, ora Verb may thus be supplied from the context.

rot p,ev aXXa, bo-airep Kal iravres vp,eis liroutre.

Xen. Gyr. iv. 1. 3.

i.e. to, p.lv aXXa (sc. iiroUi, supplied from eTroieiTe).

In the common phrases ovSev aAAo 17, rt aAAo 17, 6IAA0 ™rj, adifferent verb of more general meaning is supplied from aspecial verb in the context.

of. Aai<eSaip,ovioi aAAo oiSiv rj Ik t/)s yijs evavadyovv.

. Thtjc. iv. 14.i.e. aAAo ovhlv eiToiovv -q. PLAT. Apol. 19 D.

ravra /cat ttouiv Kal irdcrxeiv a 7rao"xa. PLAT. Phaed. 98 Asupply Kal fl-oie?.

CONSTRUCTIO PRAEGNANS. 415

§ 334. Zeugma and Syllepsis.

Zeugma is another form of Brachylogy. There is only one

verb in the sentence, but more than one noun. The verbstrictly applies only to one of the nouns, but suggests the verbrequired by the other.

dW rj 7rvoa«rtv rj fiadvcrKafai Kovei

Kpv\j/ov viv.

Soph. El. 435 ; cf. El. 72, Ai. 632, Eur. Bacch. 142.

No, or to the winds (sc. /M0es) or m the deep-dug soil bury

them.

A violent instance of Zeugma :

ecrdrJTa Se <f>opiovcri rg ^KvdiKfj 6[M>ir)v, ykHcrcrav 8e iSirjv.

HDT. iv. 106.

They wear a dress like the Scythian, but (speak) a language

of their own.

Cf. the old Tyne ballad :" He wears a blue bonnet, wi' a

dimple on his chin."

7rpo0ii/u'a xpw/ievoi /cat 7rapaKeXevcr/j.§. ThUC. iv. 11.

With energy and with mutual exhortation.

X/HU/J6VOI goes with both nouns not quite in the same sense.

This sort of Zeugma is sometimes distinguished as Syllepsis.

1 Cok. iii. 2, ydXa i/iSs eiroTura ov (3pwp,a, is a stock instance

from the New Testament, In-oncra suiting ydXa only. Cf. L.

i. 64.

§ 335- Constructio Praegnans.

Constructs Praegnans is a form of Brachylogy. TwoSentences are compressed into one.

oS «5ei KaKoiradeTv rS> crco/xaTt ivravOoi ovSev p,e h>(j>eX.rjO-tv 17

epTreipia. Antiph. de Coed. Her. 2.

Where I ought to have endured personal ill-treatment hither

(i.e. here, whither they have brought me), my experience

proved no help to me.

It is common with certain Prepositions (eis, Iv, «£) and with

Relative Adverbs.

e.g. rals iv Trj yrj KaTairefevyviais (sc. vavcri).

The ships which had fled to the shore, and were on the shore.

neivos 8' oirov /3e[3r)Kev, ovSels otSe. SOPH. Tr. 10.

Where (for whither) he is gone none hnoweth.

Swov for Snot. Cf. Phil 256.

Constractio Praegnans is very common in the New Testa-

ment. A stock instance is "3?jAi7nros evpedij els 'A^cotov, ' Act.

Ap. viii. 40. See 2 Tim. iv. 18, Matt. v. 22, evoxos els tt)v

ykevvav.

§ 336. Brachylogy of Comparison.

Brachylogy of Comparison, or Comparatio Compendiaria.The stock example is from H. xvii. 51, Kofiai x a P^ T£(ra

"bV

5p,oiai, i.e. Kojxai 6/j.oTai âpiTtav Ko/xauri, hair like the (hair of)the Graces.

'H(j>a[<TTOv 8' iKave So/xov Gens dpyvpoireâ

dcpdiTov dcrrepoevTa, p.eTairpeTre' ddavdrouriv. HOM. II. XVlii.

i.e. p,erairpeirea 86p.oUTiv dOavdrtov. [368.

Silver-footed Thetis came unto the house of HephaestusIncorruptible, starry, conspicuous among the Immortals.

yeipov dpcrevinv vocrov ravrqv vocrovp.ev. EtTR. Androm. 220.

i.e. êipova dpcrevuv vocrov vocrov vocrovp.ev.

Worse than men this plague we are plagued vnthal.

o/xoiav rats SouA.ais el-ê rrjv icrdfjTa. XEN. Cyr. V. 1. 3.

Cf. REV. xiii. 11, elye Kepara Svo op,ot,a dpvioi.

§ 337- Catachresis.

The use of a word not in its strict meaning.

vTroTTTevm, I expect; 8aip.6vios, extraordinary; 6avp.ao-T6s

davfidcrios, strange, eccentric, funny, capital, excellent ; p,eyas (sc.

Aoyos, Plat. Phaed. 62 b), puzzling ; virep<j>va>s u>s (6po\.oy£>),

I decidedly do (assent) ; a/Mjxav<3s ye &s o-<f>68pa, most decidedly.

See Eiddell, Digest, p. 240.

§ 338. Ellipse and Aposiopesis.

The suppression of a word or sentence.

e.g. 17 avpiov (sc. rjjj.epa).

Is Kopai<as (sc.fidWere,

eppere, oi)(ecr6e).

To the crows ! Djgjtjzed by Microsoft®

EUPHEMISM. 417

The suppressed word or sentence can, of course, be easily

supplied. The figure is mechanically and unconsciously em-ployed in many common every-day phrases. The object of

its artificial use is to give brevity and pith to the expression.

fjp.iv p\v ciJ^cls racrSe (sc. ev\opat). AESCH. Cho. 142.

For us these prayers —The omission of the Subject with its Verb, of the copula tort,

of the substantive with its epithet or genitive (ol dyadoi, 6

$iA.wr7rot>), are common instances of unconscious Ellipse.

Instances of unconscious Ellipse of Sentences occur in the

phrases ov-^ on, pvq on, o^x ows, etc., and more or less so in

the suppression of a Protasis, or of an Apodosis. .

Aposiopesis is a form of Ellipse. 1 In animated and excited

expressions the speaker breaks off abruptly, leaving the lest

of the sentence to be understood.

p,r)8ev wpos opyrjv -irpos dtSiv (sc. Spao-fls). SOPH. El. 369.

By Heaven 1 naught in anger.

pj\ rpifias It (sc. iropi^n or some such verb). Antig. 577.

No longer tarrying t

pj) p.01 irp6<pao-iv. An. Ach. 345.

No shuffling !

/X17 pjol ye pvdovs. Ae. Vesp. 1179.

Come I no tales I

Vergil's "quos ego: sed motos praestat componere

fluctus," is Quintilian's stock instance. ."Quid multa?"" quid plura 1 " are common cases.

§ 339. Euphemism.

The substitution of a colourless or an agreeable expression

for a strong or disagreeable one. It is the reverse of " calling

a spade a spade." The Greeks carefully avoid the mention of

death especially, e.g. hrpa.% &irm e»rpa£e

e.g. <UAo n. TraOecv. Plat. Cnto, iv. 44 E, to suffer something

1'Airovubirr,™. Reticentia, ClC.

Obticentia, Cblsus. Interrvptio at.

Quint. Inst. ix. 2.Digitized by Microsoft®

So we say " in the event of anything happening."

ey

/iij jj.01 PefirJKr). SOPH. Phil. 494.

Where Philoktetes fears that his father may no longer be

alive.

§ 340- Hypallage.

• A change of case, so that a word does not agree with the

case which logically it qualifies. In such constructions theword agrees with a compound expression, so that the figure

is a form of Synesis rather than Hyperbaton. The stock

instance is from Horace

Nee purpurarum sidere clarior

Delenit usus,

where the adjective clarior, instead of agreeing with pur-purarwm (purple robes) agrees with the compound substantiveusus purpurarum.

& irarpwov Icrn'as ftdOpov. SOPH. Ai. 860.

Seat of my father's hearth.

For 5rar/oi})as ecrnas jSddpov.

So Antig. 794, veiKos dvSpwv £vvaip.ov, where vei/cos dvSpwvforms one word : Track 817, SyKov dvd/xaros pvqrp^ov.

tov 8' dSAiws OavovTa THoXwcCkovs vkuvv. SOPH. Ant. 26.

For davovTos TloXvveiKows.

In' Lucretius, i. 474, we have an instance of true Hypal-lage : Ignis Alexandri Phrygio sub pectore gliscens. Mr. Munro,

in his note on the line, collects some striking parallels fromother writers.

§ 341. Hyperbaton, Chiasmus, Hysteron-Proteron.

The displacement of the natural order of words. Its chiefuse is to give emphasis to a word. It also enables languageto represent the rapidity of thought, one word instantly

catching up another word.Digitized by Microsoft®

LITOTES. 419

Easy and familiar instances are

etVe, & n-pbs Aids, MeAijre. Plat. Apol. xiii. 25 c.

Like the Latin

Per te Deos oro.

Certain words in particular are thus displaced, especially ye,

fievroi, av, 'in, tcrios, ovk in ov <£»j/x<, etc.

dp' ofiv av /(te oiecrdt rocravra err/ 8iayeve<r6ai ;

Plat. ^0/. xxi. 32 e.

Tts >Jv ev rj fjun.rTOjj.i6a p.evroi ra\cf>i.ra ; ARIST. Nub. 788.

Ta^' civ opOtas i'crios p.ip.<f>oiro. PLAT. £«(/. 640 D.

Chiasmus is a form of Hyperbaton. Chiasmus is the In-

verse Parallelism of Clauses and Sentences :

ttom p,h> epyov irav 8' eVos Ae'yovTas re Kal irpdrrovTai, —where the outside epyov belongs to the outside Trpdrrovra's,

and the inside eVos to the inside AeyovTas.

ovr dSiKet, ovr' dSiKeirai, ovO' mrb deov, ovre deov.

Hysteron Proteron (yo-repov Trporepov) reverses the order in

which events occur, e.g. rp6.<[>ev -qS1

kykvovro.

EXetS rl Kel<rrJKOvo-as ; SOPH. Ant. 9.

d\kyj\ovs SiSdo-Keiv re Kal <j>pd£etv. PLAT. Apol. iii. 19 D.

aio-âi'dêvos p.ev Kal \v7rovp.evos Kal SeSiaig on djnjX"

6avop,t]v. Plat. JôZ. vi. 21 e.

On the Hyperbaton and its forms see Riddell, p. 228.

§ 342. Litotes.

Litotes or Meiosis, smoothing or diminishing a stronger

conception by a weaker statement. A common enough figure

in all languages, but especially suited to Greek taste, e.g. ov X§0-0-0 v, not less, i.e. more; ov p.S.X\ov, not so much.

el fiev yap rovro Xeyovcnv, op.o\oyo'ii}v av eytoye ov Kara.

tovtovs eTvat p-qroip. PLAT. Apol. 1. 17 B.

If this is what they mean, I must admit that I am an orator,

not as they are orators (i.e. an orator of a far higher order

Hum they).

\alpov(TLV e£eTa£o/xero<.s tois oio/ievots elvai (robots, ovo~i o

ov- 'ia-Ti yap ovk djySes. PLAT. Apol. xxii. 33 C.

They enjoy the cross-examination of those who think they are

wise, without really being so. It really is not disagreeable

(i.e. it is extremely amusing).

KeiTcu 6avwv SeiXaios, ov fi&A.' evTV)(£is. AJESCH. Pers. 327.

Lies low in death unhappy, not all fortunately (i.e. all in-

gloriously, because unburied : an euphemism also).

§ 343. Oxymoron.Oxymoron is the contrast by juxtaposition of opposite

conceptions, e.g. from the Paradise Lost :

Our final hope is fiat despair.

Dishonest shameOf Nature's works, honour dishonourable.

A universe of death . . .

Where all life dies, death lives.

In King John the despairing and passionate Constance cries :

Death, death ; amiable, lovely death !

Thou odoriferous stench ! sound rottenness !

i^Opwv aSiopa SZpa. SOPH. Ai. 665.

Giftless the gifts of foes.

fiaiverai 6" vcf>' ijSoi'tJs

p-qTrip dp.r)Tb,p.'

Soph. El. 1154.She is mad for joy,

A mother, yet no mother.

oo-ia wavovpyrjo-ao-a. SOPH. Ant. 74.

Daring a holy crime.

e^G(f>0tv0' at TpiO~KaXfwi

vaeg avaes ava«. AESCH. Pers. 680.

They are destroyed those three-banked

ships, ships no more, ships no more.

Cf. Catullus : funera ne funera.

Of. Aesch. P. V. 545, x«/°'s ax a /"s- Soph. 0. T. 1214yau.os ayauos.

PERIPHRASIS AND PLEONASM. 421

Oxymoron is well caricatured by Shakspere

A tedious brief scene of young PyramusAnd his love Thisbe, very

tragical mirth.Merry and tragical, tedious and brief !

That is, hot ice, and wonderous strange snow.How shall we find the concord of this discord ?

§ 344- Periphrasis.

Periphrasis or Circumlocution is a roundaboutway of usingtwo or more words instead of one, e.g. 'Ict/m^s napa, head of

Ismene, for 'Ict/mjj^ ; dpi^ara NelXov (Plat. Leg. 953), children

of the Nile,ie. Egyptians (cf. the Hebrew, children of Israel,

sons of Belial, son of peace, etc.). The word xPW a occurs inone or two phrases : vbs jiiya XP^Jf ,a

iHdt. ; to xPVt ia ™"

wktZv, Ar. Nub. 2.

Very often the Substantive is used for an Adjective or an

apposition, e.g. HoareiSSvo's k/xitos, the might of Poseidon, forthe mighty Poseidon (Aesch. Eum. 27); vapQevla 'lovs, the virgin

Io (Aesch. P. V. 898); fiypbs o-e/3a<?, a revered mother (P. V.

1090). So in Latin, mitis sapientia Laeli, prisci Oatonisvirtus (Horace).

Periphrasis is employed in the use of Tenses, e.g. pk\ku>TOirpruv, fjteWai redvavat (Plat. Apol. xviii. 30 c and xix.

32 a), drifida-as e'x", periturus sum, fore or futurum esse witha Subjunctive mood.

Very often, again, both in Greek and Latin, a periphrasis

is used, for a simple verb, especially with 4'xw, e.g. kv v$ Ix *

= Zia.voovp.a.1 : <£povi/i£s ex"* = 4>p°v& ' OappaXews e'xi> = Ba.ppm

(all in Plat. Apol.): \vrn)pm Zx>» = AwroC/tat (Soph. El. 766):rjSovrjV $£/>av = rep/ruv (SOPH. El. 286) : <t>(ovrjv \aj3elv =(fxoveZv, etc.

Infact

theseperiphrastic verbs are of constant

use bothir-

prose and poetry.

§ 345. Pleonasm.

Pleonasm or Eedundancy is the employment of wordsapparently superfluous. Apparently, for a second expression

may often define or amplify a previous expression, e.g. 6

rrrpaTrj-ybs Trjs crTparia.'s, fiovov Ka6' avrbv KovSev' aAAov.Digitized by Microsoft®

A cognate accusative is a sort of pleonasm, ^x rl

v /*«x ecr ^ a ' :

or an adverb with its adjective, //.eyas //.eyaXwo-ri (kclto). II.

xvi. 776, (he lay outstretched) huge with his huge length.Adverbs are often thus combined : d)s aX-qBCis t<5 ovti :

iraXiv aWis, aS TraXiv adOis : eVeira p.erh. ravra. The repeti-

tion of the negative and of av are cases of Pleonasm.ti Srj keyovT£<s Sie/3aXXov ol Sta/JaAAovres

Plat. Apol. iii. 19 b.

ZirieiKrj av jioi SorcaS Xeyeiv Xkyoyv. PLAT. Apol. xxii. 34 D.

Periphrasis is a form of Pleonasm.

§ 346. Prolepsis or Anticipation.

What is intended, or expected to take place, as spoken of,

by anticipation, as having already taken place.

It occurs most commonly with a predicative adjective. Agood instance is found in Juvenal

Paullatim caluerunt mollia saxa.

i.e. caluerunt ita ut mollia fierent.

A stock instance is

evcj>r]p.ov, S T&Xatva, KOtfiTjcrov crro/ta. AESCH. Ag. 1258.

i.e. &<TTt evcj^rj/jiov efvai.

JcJSa Kiveb (bdkyjxaT opviOSv cracfrrj. SOPH. El. 18.Awakes to shrillness the birds' matin songs.

See v. 14, Ttp,b>p6v.

yovktav

Ikti/aovs 'i(T\ovcra irrkpyyai

dfurdviov yoiav. SOPH. El. 242.Restraining the wings of shrill-voiced waitingsSo that they honour not a parent. Cf. Antig. 1200

Cf. Eur. Bacch. 70, 183.

§ 347- Puns.

(Paronomasia, Annominatio.)

Occasionally Greek writers indulge in them.

dXXa. yap, & MeAijrc . . . cra^cos aVoâi'veis rfjv travrox,dpeXeiav, on oxJSei' (rot /tejueArjxe irepi $>v ip,e eiVayeis.

Plat. Apol. xii. 25 c(See xiv. where the îeW^ôft®

PUNS. 423

Riddell, p. 242, collects many instances from Plato.

aTreo-repijKas rbv /?m>v to, to£' eX<iv. SOPH. Phil. 931.

where there is clearly a play on /3i6v (bow) and /3iov (life).

The grandest instance of punning or playing on words at asolemn moment is in Shakspere. (Richard II., Act ii.), wherethe dying Gaunt dwells on his name :

Old Gaunt indeed, and gaunt in being old, etc.

So of Helen

eXevas, eXavSpos, !A«rToA.ts. AESCH. Ag. 689.

Helen, the Hell of ships, the Hell of men, the Hell of towns.

Compare the pun made on the rock-built Assus recorded in

Athenaeus viii. 352.

"Asro-ov W', &<s Kev Oacrcrov oXedpov mipaff iKtjai. M. vi. 143.

Paronomasia is the combination of words of similar sound

or cognate form.

utrum propter oves an propter owes; Varro,.R. R. iii. 2. 13.Traume sind Schaume (lit. dreams are bubbles).

Soa-iv KaKav KaKwv KdKots. AESCH. Pers. 1041.

<LpOovd' 6 TXrj[i<ov 6p6bs e£ opdZv Sicfapwv. SOPH. El. 742.

Aotos eavToi/, oms v<j>' eavrov, etc., would be familiar

instances.

ENGLISH INDEX.

Reference is only made to subjects which are not easily found in the

Table of Contents.

The numbers refer to the pages of the book.

Ablative represented byGenitive, 78-9.

Accusative, see Table ofContents, 66-78.

Absolute, 95.with. Infinitive,! i 3]

158, 179.with Infinitive instead

of Nominative, 180.

in Apposition to Sen-tence, 25, 74.with. Prepositions, 289.

Active Voice, 120.Adjectives which take a

Genitive, 100.

which take a Dative,

Article, for Possessive, 30.with words used ma-

teria/iter, 35.not repeated with a

second noun, 35.Asyndeton, 24.

Attraction, 58.Attributive or Epithet, 5 ;

Peculiarities in Construc-tion, 23-4.

Cases, Preliminary Noteon, 64.

Causal Sentences, see Tableof Contents, 276-9.

Causative Active Voice,125 ; do. Middle, 127.

Collective Noun with PluralPredicate, 19.

Comparative and Super-lative, 120-3.

denoting too great

a degree, 97, 120, 121.Concessive Sentences, see

Table of Contents, 249-251.

Conditional Sentences, see

Table of Contents, 193-

231.> Sentences, examples

of, 209-231.

Consecutive Sentences, see

Table of Contents, 269-

275.

Co-ordinate Sentences, 7.Copula, 1 ; Verbs used as,

12 ; omitted, 13.

Construction koto, ovvecrw,

24.

DDative, see Table of Con- I

tents, 104-119.

Dative of interest in Par-ticipial phrases, 107.

of circumstance usedadverbially (e.g. ciyfj),

114.with Infinitive, 13, 158.as an Oblique Pre-

dicate, 45.

Dawes' Canon, note on, 267.Deliberative or Dubitative,

see Questions.

Definite and IndefiniteSentences, 194-5.

Demonstrative Pronouns asSubjects and Predicates,18.

Pronouns preceding asentence in Apposition,25.

Deponent Verbs, 131.

Dual Number, 19, 20.

119.Adverbs which take a

Genitive, 100.—which take a Dative,119.

Adverbial sentences,9.Agent, how denoted, 131.

denoted by Preposi-tions, 289-90.

Genitive of, 101Dative of, in.

Anastrophe, 289.Aorist, uses of, 145-9.

Sometimes the equival-ent of the English,Present, Perfect, orPluperfect, 147.

Apodosis, meaning of the

term, 195, footnote.

without av, 217-9.

Apposition, 5 ; Peculiarities

of, 24-26.

Article, 2 see Table of Con-tents, ch. ii., 27-46.

as Personal, Demon-strative, and Relativein Attic, 28.

1 For an explanation of this construction, see Monro's Homeric Grammar^ p. 158.

2 See Monro's Homeric Grammar, where the uses of the Article are arranged under

three heads.

Digitized by Microsoft® 425

Emotion, Verbs of, withParticiples, 170.

Verbs of, with et foi

on, 186.

Epithet, see Attributive.

Fearing, Verbs of, with

/*)}, /xif ov, 262-8.

(i)WithSubj. or Opt,262.

(2) With Fut. Indie,264.

(3) With o7ro)<r fj.-rj andFut. Indie. Subj. orOpt., 265.

(4) With cos and Fut.Indie, 265.

(5) Withlnfin., 265.

(6) With el Interroga-tive, 266.



426 ENGLISH INDEX.

Figures of Rhetoric, see

Part III., ch. iv., Tableof Contents.

Final Sentences, 252, 259.

(1) With 'iva, o>9, o7ra)5,and Subj. or Opt.,

253-.

(2) With, us, ottos avand Subj. (not Opt.),

255.

(3) Rarely with Fut.Indie, j 256.

Frequentative, see Itera-tive.

Future Middle as Passive,1 3-5.

Perfect, 150.

Indicative, with otros

Final, 256, n. 4 ; Fut.Opt., as Obliqua ofabove, 256.

Genitive, see Table of Con-tents, 78-104.

Absolute, 1 96, 165-7.with Infinitive, 13,

158.

as Oblique Predicate,45-.

in Apposition to an-other Genitive suppliedin the Possessive, 26, 49.

Gnomic Tenses, 151.Graphic (or Vivid) con-

struction, i.e. the Sub-stitution, in a SubordinateClause in Historic Se-quence of the Moodused in the PrimarySequence,

138,182, etc.

see also Oratio Obliquapassim, esp. 386, 404.

HHoping and Promising,

Verbs of, with Pres. andAor, Infin., 180-1.

Imperative Mood, 136-7.

Imperfect Tense, uses of,143-4-

Indicative Moodstates facts or asks

questions, 132.in the Indirect State-

ment, 181, etc.

Indicative Mood—in the Indirect Ques-

tion, 188.

in the Indirect Petition

(Fut. Indie), 192.in Definite Sentences,

194-5.in Conditional Sen-

tences, see Part II. ch. ii.

(a) Present Conditions.(b) Future Conditions.(c) Past Conditions.(d) Unfulfilled Past or

Present Conditions.in Temporal Sentences

to denote Definite Time,see Part II. ch. iii.

in Concessive Sen-tences, see Part II. ch. iv.

in Final Sentences ofPast Purpose, 257.

in Relative Final Sen-tences, 238.

with SVws Modal (Fut.j

Indie), 259, etc., 262.with Verbs of Fearing,

263.——with Consecutive Sen-

tences, see Part II. ch. vi.

with Limitative or Re-strictive Sentences, 274.

with Causal Sentences,see Part II. ch. vli.

with Expressions ofWishes, see Part II. ch.viii.

with Relative Sen-tences, see Part II. ch.ix.

substituted for theOptative by the Graphicor_ Vivid Construction inHistoric Sequence where-ever the Recta or thePrimary Sequence tookan Indicative.

Infinitive, see Table ofContents, 153-162.

Epexegetical, 155-6.

compared with LatinSupine, 155.

after a Comparativewith 77 or wsTe, 156.

with (is, ws ye, Limi-tative, 156.

for Imperative, 2 159.denoting surprise, 160.personal and im-

personal passive con-struction, 159.

Infinitive, with tou denot-ing a purpose, 162.

in Indirect Statement,178, etc.

in Indirect ' Petition,191.

with Verbs of Fearing,265.

with tw, used caus-ally, 279.

in Oratio Obliqua,introduced without aPrincipal Verb, 398.

and Finite Moodalternating in Orat.Obliqua, 400.

with Adverbial andRelative Sentences in

Orat. Obliqua, 400.in Latin Orat. Obliqua,

401.Indefinite Tenses, see

Definite.Time, three kinds of,

232.Iterative (Frequentative)

Tenses, 151.

See Temporal Sen-tences.

Limitative or RestrictiveSentences, 274-5.

Locative Case, 64-5, 116.

MMiddle Voice, 8 125-130.

(and Active) Verbs.Alphabetical List, 127'

130.Modal Sentences with oirws,

ottus jlwJ, 259-262.

(1) Fut. Indie, or Fut.Opt., 260.

(2) Subj. or Opt., 260.

(3) ofj» otw rpdiroj, efOTto TpOTTQ) for OTTtoS,

261.

(4) oirws with av andSubj., 261.

(5) With JX17 for ottwsjLiij, 261.

Moods, see Table of Con-tents, 132, 137.

N.

Negatives, see Part ILL.Ch. ii., Table of Contents'

1 See Monro's Homeric Grammar, p. 167.2 On the Infinitive as an Imperative see Monro's Homeric Grammar^ p 162. The

whole of the chapter (see especially the Infin. as Subject, 157, Accus. with Infin ic8Origin and History of Infinitive, 163), is worth careful perusal.

"''

3 For the Middle and its uses, see Monro'sHomeric Grammar, p. 7. The Passivehas grown out of the Middle, in fact was originally one of the uses of the Middle


428 GREEK INDEX.

denoting Indefinite Time(which is of three kinds),(see Part II. ch. iii.).

Subjunctive, in ConcessiveSentences with edv /cat,

/cat edV, 250.in Final Sentences of

Primary Sequence (seePart II. ch. v.)

in Modal Sentenceswith on-us, etc., as a rarerand variant construction,260.

with Verbs of Fearing,etc., 263, etc.

alternating with Opta-tive, 182-184 (see Com-pound Sentence andOratio Obliqua passim,and 254, «. 1).

Substituted, ^ by theGraphic or Vivid Construc-tion, for the Optative inHistoric Sequence where-ever the Recta or the Pri-mary Sequence took a Sub-junctive, see Graphic.

Subdirect and Suboblique,11, 389 (and Orat. Obi.,

passim).Subjunctive J—

Introductory Note,i32.in Independent Sen-

tences, 134, 135.A. In Exhortations.B. In Prohibitions.

C. In DeliberativeQuestions.

D. Denoting a futurepossibility (a veryrare Attic construc-tion).

in Deliberative IndirectQuestions, 190.

in Indefinite Sentenceswith av, 194.

in Conditional Ques-tions (see Part II. ch.

ii.).

(a.) In Future Condi-tions.

(&.) In General or Fre-quentative PresentConditions.—in Temporal Sentences

1

1 On the Subjunctive and Optative see Monro's Homeric Grammar (Subjunctivein Principal Clauses, 196 ; in Subordinate Clauses, 201 ; Optative in Simple Sentences,215 ; in Subordinate, 219 ; History of Subjunctive and Optative, 229, etc.).

Substantive used as Adjec-tive or Attributive, 23.

Superlative and Compara-tive, 120-123.

Swearing and Witnessing,Verbs of, take /xij, 353,». 4, (see 352).

T.

Temporal Sentences, see

Table of Contents, PartII., ch. iii., 232-248.

Tenses, see Table of Con-tents, Part I. ch. vii.,

138-152.Time in the Moods, 139.

Tmesis, 288.Transitive Verbs become

Intransitive, 124.

V.

Vocative, 80.

Voices, see Table of Con-tents, 124-131.

W.Wish, expressions of. 280-3.

GREEK INDEX.The numbers refer to the pages of the book.

A privative, Adjectivescompounded with, takea Gen., e.g. afxvrjfj.mv,

avrJKOos, 98, 103.ayaBov (e5, kclkov, etc.),

Aiyw, 8p5>, etc., withdouble Ace, 72 (for Pas-sive forms, see 73, n. 2).

iydWofxai, with Dat., 112.dyafiat., with Gen., 94.ayai'aKTto, with Dat., 117.

dyetv X€l p°S> 87.a.yvo<>, with Gen. , 103.aSektpos, with Gen. or Dat.,

,

IIQ>

afiiKw, with double Ace,, 72-

„

Adip/wi/ ttoKk;, 81.dflujLLw, with Dat., 112.

aiSovfiai, with Ace, 75.

oupu, with Gen. of Charge,,95-

tx.iaxvvofi.ai,, with Ace, 75.—with Dat., 112.—with Infin., 155, 172.—with fxri, 264.alvSavofMLi, with Gen., 86.—with Particip., 169, 175,

,

l8„6 '

alriSifxaL, with Gen. ofCharge, g5.

^

amokovOos, with Gen. orDat., 119.

aKoKov8Si, with Dat., 118,a-K.ovto, 6.Kp0ti>iuxi> with

wGen., 86.

0A1?, with Gen., 82.aAwTKo/Aai, with Gen. of

charge, 95.aAAos, oAAotos, with Gen.,

103.

aAAos, meaning &esidvs, 62.


6 aAAoj, meaning in general,

.6 3"

.,

aAAos bo-os, aAAos etns, 60.aAAdrpios, Dat. or Gen.,

79, "9- .

Ajua, quasi-Prep., 306.a/xa, with Dat., 119.afxaprdvoi, with Gen., 86.dfxeCfSofiat, with Gen.,

93.d/xeXci, with Gen., 87.afxvva, with Dat., 116.ajuvi/ojuat, with Ace, 76.afxvvto and afJ.vvofJ.ai, 129.afitftt, Prep., 317-319.afj.tfn4vwfu, with double

Ace, 72.a.fi<l>Lo-{3r}Ttti, with Gen and

Dat., 117, 118.—withfiij, fiy) ov, 365.*Av, see Part II., ch. ii.,

Table of Contents, 193-231.

GREEK INDEX. 429

"&.v 7 with Impen. and Aor.Indie, denoting a re-peated act, 151.—with. Aor. Infin., afterVerbs of hoping, etc.,

181.—with Infin.; in Indirect

Statement, 181.—with Optat. , in Indirect

Statement, 185.—with Particip., in In-direct Statement, 187.—with Aor. Indie, notdenoting an unfulfilledcondition, 216.

—omitted with the Subj., in Subordinate Sentences,

245-—retained with the Optat.in Subordinate Sentences,246.—with Final Sentences,

2S5- „- with o7rai9 Modal, 261,

—with wore Consecutive272, «. 2.

'Avd, Prep., 291, 292.

avayKa^bj, with double Ace.

,

. 73- „ .

eti/ayKatos, construction of,

,*&• , , ,

avap.Lp.vyjO'Kfo Tiva tl ananva twos, 73, n. 3.

Avev, 301.avrjp=Ti$, with Gen., 83.

avTexfo, with Dat., 118.

awTevojuaL, with Gen., 86.

'Am, Prep., 294.avTi\4y(o p.r\ and p.r) ov,

365-

avmroLSt, with double Ace,72.ai*Ticrrpo(pos, with Gen. or

Dat., 119.

avvrta, with Particip., 172.

a£ios, construction of, 159.

afiw, with Gen., 93, 103.

airayopevb) (aireiirov) prf, fir)

ov, 365.airaWdtra-oi, -Ofiai, with

Gen., 99.airai/Tto, with Dat., 118.

airei6S>, with Dat., 116.

airexOovofLai, with Dat.,

117.aTre'xw, with Gen., 99.

aTre'xo/xat 1*1), Mov, 363.

aviirrSt, with Dat., 116.

—(airtarttaf irapexeu) pA,fir} ov, 264, 365-

Atto, Prep., 295-297.

diroSexofJ-ai. tclvto. twos, 88.

ctTroSiSpacTKCo, with Ace, 75.

diroSC&op.a.L, with Gen., §3.

a'u-oKft/ii'w, with Particip.,

172.

aTTOtcpvirTOfxat p.y), p.-/} ov,

airo\avtii tl twos, 85, 86.

aVoAuojiuu p;yj, fiT) ov, 365.aVopia, with Gen., 82.oi7ro(rrepw, with double

Ace, 72.a7TOCTTpe0CO fMJ, jLLTJ OV, 365.aTroTpe'ww, with Gen., 100.dLTroTuvyai'ft), with Gen.,

t86.

a7ro^ev7u, with Gen. (ofcharge), 95.

a.itTop.a.1, with Gen., 86.

dpjj-yw, (poet.), with Dat.,

,II6 -

apKw, dpKel, construction,

apfov/xat jinj and p-ij ou, 365.apTi, with Present, 143,apx<ii, apxop.ai, with Gen.,

86, 88, 98.—with Infin. and Particip.,

,171-

cn-e, Causal.avTOKpd.T<ap, with Gen., 103.avTos, various uses of, 53-

55-—with Dat. of Circum-

stance, 114.—strengthens Reflexives,

49.—subject to Infinitive, 179.auTo-SiKoxoo-uirj, etc. (Plat-

onic idioms), 26, 55.avTOs-and 6 auTos, 42, 53-4.

6 aiiTos, constructions of,

no.a<paipovp.at tlvo. tl, and

Tiva twos, 72, 73, «. 3.

a^tij/Lti, with Gen. (of

charge), 95.d4>t<m}ju.L, with Gen., 99.

a.x6op.ai, with Dat., 112,

117-i^peio? , axpTJo-TO s, with

Dat., 119.

"Axpt, quasi- Prep., 302.

—temporal Conjunction{see p-e'xpO-

paCvto TTO&a, 77.^

jSape'ws ipe'pw, with Dat. 117./3<xo-iA.ev&), with Gen., 98.

/Stdjjb/wu, with Ace, 78.

p\diTTta, with double Ace,72.

p\a<rreLV, with Gen., 80.

(SXeirta vchrv, etc., 78.

fSoTjBSj, with Dat., 116.

povAeuw ottws, with Fut.

Indie, etc., 261-2.

yeAco, with Ace. 76.


yevta, with Gen., 84, 86.

yj7poTpo</it3, with Ace, 76.

Ypd^ojutat, with Gen. of

charge, 95.—with double Ace, 73.yujuwds, with Gen., 82, 98,

103.

Saicpvbi, with Ace, 76.SeSotKa, with Infin., 155.fie'picojU,ai nvp, "Aprji/, etc.,

817, 8ij7roTc, Sijirorow, asSuffixes, 58.

StjAos, BqAo>, constructions,

172, 174.>

Set, constructions, 117.Set oirtt)?, 261, «. 8.

fievVepos, Sevrepaios, withGen. ,97.

Atdi, Prep., 307-310.Bia/3aAAw, with double Ace.

,

72.8taAAdo"o"fti Tiva. tlvl, 105.oi.aAt'yo/jiat, with Dat., 109,

Il8.Bta.vip.bi, with Ace and

Dat., 105.SiairAeto,

with Ace, 75.Sicupepta, with Gen., 97.Sieuf.epop.ai, with Dat., 98,

109.ot«(/>epoi'Tw5 e'xw, with Gen.

,

97. 103. ^

5ta<f»opos, with Gen., 97,with Dat. or Gen., 109,119.

SiSdo-Kto, with double Ace,72.

Sie'x<o, with Gen., 99.Sikcuos, construction of,

159,.

St7rAcio"i.os, etc., with Gen.,97-

8i\fj£>, with Gen., 87.StuKu), with Gen. of charge

(6 SititKoiv), 95.Soieei, SokS), construction of,

117, 159-Svoti' Bdrepov, etc., 26.

6v(7e'pa)5, with Gen., 103.Sugtvovs, with Dat., 119.

eaV, jtf^ Conditional andConcessive Sentences.

—never Interrogative, 191,footnote, 207.

eavrov, for 1st and 2d pers.,

50. _—Reciprocal, 50.

eyyus, with Gen and Dat.,

,"9-

G.yyybip.a.1, with p.r} and

Infin., 353.

43° GREEK INDEX.

eyw (otJ) for avTo?, as Sub-ject of Infin., 180.

eyKokdi, with Dat , 117.eyKparrjs, with Gen., 103.efiet, without av, 144, 218.

el. See Conditional andConcessive Sentences.

—Interrogative. See In-direct Question.

—Interrogative, with Subj.

,

291.—Interrogative, with Verbsof Fearing, 266.

—for em with Verbs ofEmotion, 186.

—with Subj., 245.et (edv) K.aC, /cat et (ear),

eit

elydp, eit?e, with Wishes,280-283.

el Se ju.7), 208.

el (edv )=si forte, 208.

et edv, in Virtual Obliqua,

, 40S-et ou, 347, 358, 359.earep (edvirep), quasi con-

cessive, 250.elkos %v (without av), see

J&tt,_

eiKWj with Gen.,99,

Gen. or

^ Dat., xo6.etp.t, with Gen., go.

elpytti, with Gen., 99.—/«?> M °"j 365*Ets, Prep. 292.et? StSaovcdAou, AtSou, etc.,

*?*: ,et? dVijp, with Superlative,

*I2 3*

etcreiju-i, with Ace, 75.'Ek, 'E£, Prep., 297.cieari, 301.e/cStSpdovcw, with Ace. , 75.CK/Stupo), with Gen., 100.cKecVo?, uses of, 52.e/CTTA?j(rcrop.at, etc., with

Ace, 75.eXarrw, eAdTTOV/Ltai, with_

Gen., 98.^

eAeuflepos, 6Aeu0epcT>, withGen., 98, 99, 103.

eAAHnfc, with Gen., 113.eAKoy ouracrat, etc., 69.ep.p.oi/os(ep.p.eVw), with Dat.,

eju,TrA.eco?, with Gen., 82.ep.7retpos (diretpos), with

Gen., 103.ep.TroSi£oiJi.ai(ep.iTcSu>v elvai),

Dat. 116.—p.»j, p.)) ou, 365.ep.(/>vTO?, with Dat., 119.'Ei>, Prep., 302.eV, when used with Dat. of

Time, 115.

eWi/nos, with Gen. or Dat.

,

,*°3-

evSvio (e/e5vw), with doubleAce, 72.

eveKa, eW/eei', 301.

ivvoS) jLi], ju.i] oi', 264.cvTpeirOfiai, with Gen., 87.

evTvyxdvoi, with Dat., 109,118.

e£ OTOV TpOTTOV, 26l.e^t<TTTjp.t. with Ace. , 75,

with Gen., 100.

eoiKa, with Dat., 117, con-structions of, 159.

eTroupw, with double Ace,72.

emxtpop.ai, with Dat., 112.

eirefetû, with Gen. ofcharge, 95.^

ETTepxojLtat, with Dat., 118.

e7njj3oAos, with Gen., go,

103.eTnjpedfw, with Dat., 117.

'Etti, Prep., 318-327.—Verbs compounded with,take a Dat., 118.

eTTiSe'ij?, with Gen., 103.eTriSetKi/up-i, with Partic.

,

187 (see 174 a.).

67rt$o£os, constructions of,

,159-

. , „eTrtKoupos, with Gen., 103.eTriKoupw, with Dat. 116.

e7rtp:eA.^s, £7riA*Jo7X.wv, withGen., 103.

eirip.eAoi)p,at, with ottcos,

Modal, 260-1.—with Infin., 261, «. 6.

eirioTa/xat, with Partic, 175.—with Partic, and withInfin.—with fiij and Infin., 353.

eiriTide/xtu, with Dat., 117.eTrmjSeios, with Dat., 119,

constructions of, 159.kwiTvyxdvui) with Dat., 87.

eVojuat, with Dat, 109, seealso 118.

epy}fji.o$ t with Gen., 82, 103.ep/£<o, with Dat., 117.epS>, with Gen., 87.—with p-ij and Infin., 353.epioTti (qpop-jjp), with double

Ace, 72.

etrOtw, with Gen., 84.eo"Tti> oi, eitTLV oil, eVtoi., 60.eVepos, with Gen. ,97, 103.euSatjxoi>i<Jc<), with Gen., 94.etJAaôvp-at, with Ace, 76.—with Infin., 155.—with onias, 260, with p.ij,

p.7i 01J, 264, 365.evAo-yw, with double Ace,

„72-ewous, with Dat., 119.

ecpefijs-, with Dat., 119.

ej' £ (u re), Limitative, 274.

ajx.Ki'ovp.ai, with Gen., 86,

87.

h(Qp6$ twith Dat., 119.

exop-ai, with Gen., 86Meanings of, 90.

expyjv (xpw)> without dr,

144, 21S.

ex<o, with Gen., 99.—as a Copulative Verb, 43.—p.7), p.rj ov, 365._

extav, in colloquialisms, 165.

yj-Vw, with Ace, 76; with

Gen., 94.

H77S17, with Presen- 143.fj tis ») oirSetV, 62.

yj KaTa, 7} d)S (tooTe), withComparative, 121.

TJ5op.ai, with Dat., 112.

r}p.urv$ (6) toO xpoôu, etc.,

.85.jjp.wi' (vficov) avrSiv, Parti-

tively, 51.7jTTa>p.ai, with Gen., 97-98;

with Dat, in.

Oappia, with Ace, 75.(9av/j.d£u), with Gen., 94.(?aup.a<jTo? ocros, etc., 59.0tYydi/<o, with Gen., 86.

IStos, with Gen. or Dat., 79,

.

I,I 9' .

tepds, with Gen,, 79.Ikovos, Constructions of,

„ I73-.

iva, Final Conjunction, 253.iwx av, not Final, 255.10-0p.01.p05, with Gen., 84.ieroppOTros, with Gen. or

Dat., 119.

to-os, Constructions of, no,, £

IQ-

.

to-w, with Ace and Dat.,117.

KKaflapoff, with Gen., 82,98,

jcot, KatVep, teat ravra, seeConcessive Sentences,242.

K« f joining two Adjectives,24.

1

See Monro's Homeric Grammar^ p. 93.

GREEK INDEX. 431

Kav, Kav el, 209.Keucovpyos, with Gen., 103.KaX.bc; Kayaflos, 24.Kakd, with double Ace, 71.Kara, Prep.. 310-313.

Kara touto elvai, 157.KaTOKpivoi, Ka.Tayiyvti)(Ttco),

etc., with Gen., 95.KaraTroAe/xco, with Ace, 76.

Kara<l>povS)} with Gen., 87.

Ketpevdai, with Dat., 107.Ke\euo>, with Ace. and Dat.

also with Ace. and Inf.,

116.

k€v6$, with Gen., 82.

KGiftakjcuov (denique t adsummam\ 26.

kCv8vv6$ eori /jtij, juif 'ov,264.Ktxorco, with Ace, 86.

kXvco TauTa crou, 88.Kotvds, with Gen. or Dat,

79, 119.

-Ko?, Adjectives ending in,

with Gen.j 113.KQLviavS>, with Gen. and

Dat. 84.KparS), with Ace. and Gen.,

87, 97, 98.

K(*u7TTto, with double Ace,72.

Kvptos, with Gen., 103.

KvpSt. with Gen., 86, 87 ;

with Particip. (poet.),

173-KQ}kv(o, with double Ace,

—fuii w ov, 36s.

Xayx* Vft) > with Gen., withAce, 85 n. 1 ; with Aceand Dat, 116.

kap.pdvw, with Gen. andAce, 87.

kap.pdvap.at., with Gen., 86.

kav9avofX.au, (and Compds.)iwith Gen., 86.

kavddvw, with Ace!, 76.

kav8av(o }kadiav construc-

tions, 173, 174*karpeHbif with Dat., 116.

keCtrofiat, with Gen., 98.

Aijyw, with Gen.. 99.

\oi5opw, with Ace, 73, n. 3.

koiSopovp.at, with Dat. 73,

«. 3, and 117.

A.va-tTeA.ei (with Dat., 117.

MjLtd, and similar words, with

Ace, 77- . , _ . -

jLta/capt^w, with Gen. (and

Ace), §4'itaAXof »?, with Compar.

and Positive, 121.

p-axofiai, .with Dat., 109,

ju,etoveKT(o, with Gen., 98.pJket JU.01 tovtov, 87.

p.4kei, p,eTap.4kei, Construc-

tions of, 89, 117.p.4kei p,ot

t jaeAeTW, withOTrtus Modal, 260, 261.

jxe'Wco, forming Periphras-tic Future, 140.—7tws (ti) 011 jU.e'AAa> ; 150.—/mJ, fiij ov, 365.

p.ep.<pop,ai, with Ace andDat., 73, n. 3, and 117.—also Ace, also Gen.,,"7-

/xeVos, with Gen., 103./xeords,

withGen., 82.

Mera, Prep., 316-317.IxeraSiSuifit, with Gen. and

Dat., 84, 105.p\erakap.f$av<i}

t with Gen.,84.

[terai-v, with Particip., 165.jaera7rotoi)fiat, with Gen.,

84.jue'retju-t, with Ace, 75.(xeTe'pxo/xai, with Ace, 75./xe'reoTi, with Gen. and

Dat, 84, 117.

/lerexw, with Gen., 84: withAce, 85, w. 1.

/xeVoxos (a/AeVoxos), withGen., 84.

H-iXPh Conjunction, 238quasi- Prep. , 302.

M77, see Chapter on Nega-tives.

jj.t\ p.-q for fXT} ov, 264.

pvq for oirois p-r), Modal, 261.

ju.ij, omitted after Verbs ofdenying, and /uj for p-rj

ov, 369.yx7)5e p.rfSeTrep, Concessive,

249-, M ,, _jlwjS' et, jlojo ear, Conces-

sive, 250.ju^pvu, with Dat. and Ace,

u6._fj.yjXO-vSip.at, ornor, etc., 260,

261.p,LKpov, 83.p.ip.irrjo'Kop.ai, with Gen. , 86.

p.ioS>, with Ace, 117.

(i.vrip.(tiv {ap.vrip.<tiv), withGen., 103.

Ncat p.d (vy), with Ace, 77.vep.ta, with double Ace, 71.

viKtafiai, with Gen,, 97 ;

Dat, in.vop.L$o}, with Dat., in.

B

IvT/tVjftt, with Gen., 86.


6 fiQvk6p.evos (6 Tvx<*"0f 31,

o (birep) Ae'yw, 60.

SSe, 66t, uses of, 51, 53.6<Jw, with Gen., 86._

b&Qvi'aca, for brt in state*

merits, 185 ; Causal, 277.otSa (tvvotSa), with Partic.

with Infin., 175.ol/cetos, with Gen. , 79.oucmpiu, with Ace. and

Gen., 94.otjuot, with Gen., 94.otov, with Superlative, 123.

otos, in Attraction, 60.

olos re, 60.

olos, Consecutive, 275Causal, 278.

olo"0' o Spao-ou ; 137.oIyojllcu, with Partic, 174.6Aiyov, bktyov Set, 82 ; 6At-

yov oeu', 157.oAiyupw, with Gen., 87.bpukm, with Dat., 109, 118.

bp.vvp.i, with jj:q and Infin.,

.,3S 3- ,, , ,ojholos (apojuoios), ng.—Constructions of, no.

U/J.01.W, with Ace and Dat.,

117.6ju.0A.0yu, with Dat., 117,

119 ; with Partic, 187.bp.6tre x^pw, with Dat., 117.

ojuov, with Dat, 119.

bp,<tivvp,os, with Dat., 119.

op.w5, «* Concessive Sen-tences, 249.

bvopd^oj, with double Ace,7*«

07nj for ottws, with Fat,261.

6tt6t€, Causal, 277.07rws, Final, 253 ; Modal

with Fut., 259, etc. ; in

Indirect Petition, 262for oTt in Statements,

185 ; Temporal, 235ottws av, with Opt. notfinal, 255.

opytfo/xat, with Dat andGen., 94, 117.

bp4yop.a.t, with Gen., 86.

bpfyavog, with Gen., 98.opci p.77, p-?} ov, 264 ; OTTW?,

260, 261.

bV. Personal, 29 ; Relative,

57 ; Interrogative, 56Conditional, 225, 226Consecutive, 274 ; Causal,

278.

6? ye Causal, 278.

5(tos, see olos.

Saw ye /x' etSeVat, 157.

5s ire'p, 57.

bartS, Relative, 57; In-

432 GREEK INDEX.

terrogative, 56 ; Condi-tional, 225, 226 ; Con-secutive, 274 ; Causal,278.

f

oen^pcuVo/./Lcu, with Gen., 86.

ore, Temporal, 234 ; Causal,277* n - 3-

ort (and ws), in Statements,178, etc. ; difference be-

tween, 184.

Causal, 276 ; with Verbs ofFearing, 265.

oTi, with Superlative, 123.

OT(£> TpOTTW for OTTOJS, 261.

Oil, oi/K, ovyt, see Part III.

ch. ii. (Table of Con-tents), 345, etc.

011 ju.d, with Ace. , 70.ov ft.7}, with Fut. Opt. and

Infin., 375.ovb" ei. (eav), Concessive,

230.ovSd (7rep), Concessive, 249.ov, 01, e, Reflexives, 50.oufieis b'sTt? ot>, 59.

ovk 016" av el, 203.ofiv, as a Suffix, 58.

ovvsko. for on, 185.oSto's, ovrotTL, Relatives,

57-ofiroff, A^ms tu ! 66.

outw, in Wishes (sic —ut),

282.

o<f>pa (Epic and Lyric),final, 253.

oi//tju.a0v]s, with Gen., 103.

nTtako.1, with Present, 143.ito.v=quidlibet, 63.

ttovto. etvai, 16.

Ilapa, Prep. 318-332.—Verbs compounded with,take Dat., 118.

jrapafidWbi, Constructionsof, 118.

irapairAiJo-tos, with Dat.,119 ; Constructions of,

no.7rapacTKevatrTtK6s,withGen.

,

103.Trapao-Kevajjw oirws, etc.,

260, 261.

TrctpaTao-o'oju.ac, with Dat.,118.

irapaxcopw, with Gen., gg.iravta (Ace), and Gen., 99 ;

iravoju.ai, Gen., 99 ; Travto

and iravofiat, with Par-ticip., 163, 170.

Tre'irjs, withGen., 82, 103.

7ret0O|U.£U, with Dat., 116.ireCBov and iridov (jxot), 116.

7rep, as a Suffix, 57.Ilepi, Prep., 332-335.

—Verbs compounded with,

take a Dat. of reference,

7repi/3aAA.o/A<H, with doubleAce, 72 ; Constructionsof, 118.

Treptytyi/o/Attt, with Gen.,97/ . , „

Trepteifj.1, with Gen. , 97.irepiipxofM*-!; with Ace,

75-7r6pL7rXe'&),' with Ace. , 75.TrCfLirKy}fj.i, with Gen. , 82 ;

Dat. , 82.

TTLvto, with Gen., 84 ; Ace,

tTKTTevta, with Dat, 116.

irttrTevfa (7re7ret(ryxat), with

\lt\ and Infin., 353.irlavvos, with Dat., ng.irXeoveKria, with Gen., 98.7rAe'fi)s, with Gen. , 103.

7rA7Jp7js, with Gen., 82.irkovo-Los, with Gen., 82.

iroiov/xaL, with Gen., 79.7ro«)s ; ir69ev ; in Repeti-

tions, 56.irai6<s and ttoo-os (indefinite),

61.

7roAe'jU,tOff, 7r0A.eju.ai, withDat., 119, 109.

ttoAAtj rqs x&P&s, 85.ttoAAootos, etc., with Gen.,

97-ttoAAou Sel (Sew), 83.irdrepoff ; and Trorepds, 61.ttov yijs ; etc., 85, n. 3.7rpaKTtKd?, with Gen., 103.irpao-tra) (7cp6.o~o-op.aC), with

double Ace. , 72 ; irpatrcrta

on-cos, etc. 260, 261.Trpe'iret, with Dat., 117.Ilpd, Prep., 300.irpoOvfiovfiaL, with Ace,

76; ojrws. etc., 260, 261.wpoKaA.oCiU.at, with Gen. of

charge, 95.TrpoKei/mi, with Gen., 100.TrpostpiXijs, with Dat., 119.irpoTt^to, with (Ace) and

Gen., 100.npds, Prep., 336.—Verbs compounded with,

take a Dat., 118.irposa-yopevto, with double

Ace, 71.Trpdset/xi, with Dat., 118.it pose

1

pxo fiat,, with Dat.

,

log.

7rpds77«et /xoi tovtov, 117.TTposKpovw, with Dat., 118,

119.7rposTV7x ai,u j with Dat.

,

87, iog, 118.n-poTepatos, with Gen., 97.irvvOdvofiat, with Gen. , 86.7ra>A.w, with Gen., 93.ff«9

-yap. aj/ ; 209.


rrias av; in Wishes, 215,

280, etc.

a"rj/xetoi> fie, 26.o-tco7r«, with Ace, 76.

o-KOTTw el, Interrog., 261 ;

ottu?, etc. 260, 261 ; [ty,

p.7j ov, 264.a-TTOvSdîa bntas, etc., 260,

261.o-Tao-ta£w, with Dat., 117.ore pCa-Ko fiat, with Gen., gg.OTetpapovjuai, with Dat.,

"7;irroxôfJi.aL, with Gen., 86.

o-TparriyS), with Gen., 98.Q-vyyiyvuHTKa}, with Dat.

and Gen., 95.o-vyyvoi fx.(av, with Gen., 103.cruyxwpui, with /at} and In-

fin-» 353_-

o-uKo<pai/™, with Ace, 76.o-uA.\apv/3aVio, Construction,

118.

a~vôvkevio, with Ace andDat., 116.

o-ujU./u.axos, with Dat., ng.o~vfji<f>epov, o-i;/x<£opos

(dorip;-(popos), with Dat., 119.

o-up-ôvw, with Dat., 117.Su^, Prep., 305.—with Dat. of Circum-

stance, 114.o~vv Oeio eiTrelv, 157.Suceo-t?, see Construction

kolto. o-i$veo-iv (EnglishIndex).

—Verbs compounded with,take a Dat., 118.

avv^Sto (S«jSw), with Dat.,117.

0-ueaA.A.aWw, with Ace andDat., 117.

<r-6veifLL, with Dat., 118.avvek&VTi (<tvvt4ij.vovti) et-

Tretp, 107.trvvoiSa* Construction, 118,

*75-o-0dA Aop.at, with Gen., 86.o~xeSov eiffely, 157.o"xijp,a koS' 6A.0V koX fieprj,

24.

tol irpSiTa. etvai, 16.Tafie, TdSe iravra, 52.Tao-o-fa), with Gen., 93.TEKf^ptov fie

1

, 26.re/Afw, with double Ace, 71.TVS avjrjs rjêpas and 17?

auTfl rifJLepg, 92.Tt

Mp.a0ui/; rt 7ra0ui/; (rt

eXt.ii/, Tt'(3ou\dj«.ei'os), 164.

rt/Aios, with Gen., 103.

GREEK INDEX. 433

TLfA,S}, rtftibfMn, with Gen.,93-

TlfMopoUjLKU, With AcC, 76 J

see 129.Tt/Awpw, withDat., 116.

Tiy, idiomatic uses of, 26.to JU.TJ (/Hi; ou), tou or tou

furj (jmi ov), with Infin.,after Verbs of denying,etc. ^366, 367, 368.

TO TTOIOV, TO Tt J 56 J TOTTOtoV, TO 7TOO-OI/, 63.

TOtouTos, followed by ou,362.

To|euw, with Gen., 87.tou, with Infin. Final, 94,

see 366.

tou Aoi7rov and to Kolttqv,92.

ruyâco), with Gen., 86with Particip., 173.

tout' e/eeii'o, 52.rpoupqi'ai, with Gen., 80.

TpCfitov, with Gen., 103.rvpawevia, rvpavvia, with

Gen., 98.ru(pAds, with Gen., 103.

vfipCg<a, with double Ace,,73'u7raKouw, with Gen. and

with Dat., 116.u7rapôj, with Particip., 171,vnQKTpa.irecr6v.L. p.rj, ju.17 ov,

,365-

Yn-e'p, Prep., 314.vjrepa\yS), with Gen., 100.uirep/3aAAai, with Ace, 75.vnepextti, with Gen., 97.U7rep<f>wjs oo-o?, etc., 59.

vvevQvvos, with Gen. andDat., 103:

umjpeTw, with Dat., 116.

vtrt<rxvovp.at, with Dat. andwith Ace, 116.

'Ytio, Prep., 341.

U7roj3aAAa), with Dat., 116.viroo'v'o/iiu, with Ace, 75.VTioTrrevoi \m, p.?) ou, 264.u7roreA)}s, with Gen., 103.uiroTiflejutai, with Dat., 116.

viro(f>ev'y<a t with Ace, 75.vorepSt, v<rrepl£ta

t withGen., g8

;uorepds, uorepaios, with

Gen,, 97.v4>CtjTCLfxai, with Ace, 75.

<pa.vep6s, ipavep6v t fyaivofiai,

Constructions, 173, 174.(petiSo/xat («£ei5wA6s), with

Gen., 99, 103.<J>eO, with Gen., 94.<t>evyw SCkvjv, 81 ; with Gen.

of charge, 95 ; 6 fyevymv,

95-_ ,

<pevyw jut}, «.Tj ou, 365.4>0a.vot

t with Ace, 76 ; withParticip., 171.

4>QovS)t with Gen., 94 ; with

Dat., 117.<|)iAtK(I»s Sidjceijbuu, etc., with

Dat.f/jtA66u)pos, with Gen., 103.

<l>LAofj.aftris, with Gen., 113.

(jjofiovft-a-i, with Ace, 76:with Infin., 153; with/x^,p.rj ou and variant con-structions, 266, etc.

$pitF(nat with Ace, 75.

^povTiîo ottos, etc., 260,

261 ; ju.1), jllv] ou, 264.<pvAdo~o~u, -oju.a,t ottus, etc.,

260, 261 ; p.>j, |UJ7 ov, 264,

365.(/iuAaf/CTO/xa(, with Ace. 76

/xij, fti| ou, 365.4>vvcu r with Gen., 8c

X<upu> with Particip., 17a

XakenaCvaif x^^TTUff (pe'pw,

withDat., 112-117.;\a/ji^"ojU.at, with Dat., 116.

Xapu', quasi-Prep., 302.

Xopeva Gcav, 72.

XP*J (xpf *i «XpV)i with fii?

and ov , 353.

XPW, see exprjv.

Xpiio-tpof, xwvfo (o-XPWtos)» with Dat, 119.

Xpw/i,<u, with Dat., in.Xwp^co, with Gen., 99.X«pk, quasi-Prep. 301.

ibevKofjM-t, with Gen., 86

with double Ace, 72.i/aA<Ss with Gen., 98, 103;

ff/ikiS, with Gen., 99.

aa)i/»rrds, with^ Gen., 103;

(ovou/jtai, with Gen., 93:with o7r(os, etc., 260, 261.

(jipaLo;, with Gen., 93, 103.ws, Modal, 253 ; for Situs

Modal," "261, «. 3 ; Final,s»S3Svwith EinalPaitiap.,

(Gsl^for wsTeTConsecu-tive, 27s ; &$ av, Final,

255 ; in Wishes, 280, etc.

Comparative (also aiswep)

with Particip., i&sZZ®&s, with Superlative, 123.

«s (wsjrep) ou and /hJ, 357.o>s eVo? ftrrfii/, and similar

phrases, 157.<Iij7rep ai/ ei, 209.ust€, Consecutive, 269-273

Limitative, 274.ciisTt p,if, with Infin. after

Verbs of denying, etc.,

.366-tafakov, without av t see

cffiei; in Wishes, 281-283.

Digitized bfifMzrosoft®



TABLE OF REFERENCES.Aeschines, B.c. 389-314 (?)

Aeschylus, B.C. 525-456.

Andocides, B.C. 440(1?) —last speech 39aAntiphon, B.C. 480 (?)-4io (?).

Aristophanes, B.C. 450 (?) —last play 388.

Demosthenes, B.C. 384(?)-322.

Euripides, B.C. 480-406.

Isaeus, dates of speeches B.C. 389-352.

Isocrates, B.C. 436-338.

Lysias, B.C. 435 (?)-378.

Plato, B.C. 429 (?)-347.

Sophocles, B.C. 496-406.

Thucydides, B.C. 471 (?)-40i (?).

Xenophon, B.C. 4a9(?)-356 (?).

The



TABLE OF REFERENCES. 435

LINE987,

i°47i

PAGE93

136

Septem ad Thebas.

4S1,

5»3.

553,672,68i,

821,

843.

'5,

594,

62206

778289411

note 341. 318

Supplies*.

30974

ANDOCIDES.1. De Mysteriis.

30, 180

38,

43,50,

54,

57,58, 59,61,

63,101,

• 5°, 4°7244, 256

41223

. 224218

404387353



436 TABLE OF REFERENCES.

LINE




LINE



44° TABLE OF REFERENCES.

LINE

Oed. Col.PAGE

79354261

37362162

63368373373301245

.171

36S2 45

37336S62

322227356373

49. 384271

73372373351413245304331

39373

Oed. Tyr.

26,

46,

60,

Pkiloctetes.

368, 38!366, 369

245368

1443622513°4154208410380298309302309

420207

29S123257257101

405

44276

304

LINE6s,88,

102,

122,

169,197.

244,285,289,

348.

349.

353.

377.408,

409.427.

444.487.

494.523.

534.554.588,611,

674.

764,825,900,

914.9'7.931.961,

969.

975,1030,1079,1171,1224,1289,l=93>

1314.

1363.1441

389,

545,

577,631,

687,

817,

978,1 100,

IT22,XI29,

"83,J342,

Trachiniae.

PAGE311352304356185

9471

3°715136S

369323359363274277

274301418

683°i

318363

375, 385164246255356

276245423243281

356107

19122

70147304147

35334°

296154295

256, 299246418

374. 384323

102264

374211

THUCYDIDES.Book 1.

36, 85, 327• 85, 273

3. 3354, 94, 162

293


23.

24,

36,

37.38,

39.41,

44.

45,

54.

56,

58,

60,62,

64,

65,

67,68,

7°,7i.

73,

74.76,

77.

78.86,

87.

89,

91.

95,96,

97,

99.TOO,

I02,

T 03,

104,

107,

109,112,

'

Il6,

Il8,I20,

121,

123,

124,

125,126,

128,

J3 1 .

132,

134.

137."4°,

: *i,

3,

4,

5.

15,

Book

PAGE31. 34°

*I,S

290, 297326120

107101

325244> 325

, 352161, 315

"5120

334293

15

319366298261

333244221

>45268166

354. 366304

35i339400

<59

290, 404112

60, gi

45236

276360

29170238, 292

68166

85, 244299

121, 34723

373. 380168

131, 168

"5, 365

99242406

246, 348.

' 91314. 330

107• 85, 191

2319. 321

343. 354




LINE




LINE PAGE



BY THE SAME AUTHOR.

AN ELEMENTARY GREEK SYNTAX.Crown 8vo, 2s.

HOMERIC GRAMMAR. For the use of Upper

Forms in Schools. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.

LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO.

LONDON, NEW YORK, AND BOMBAY


a syntax of attic greek - thompson

Documents